En Safety Handbook 08v2

8/10/2019 En Safety Handbook 08v2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 1/395Innovations in safety

The Safety handbook Experience – Systems – Products


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 2/395

Au t o m a t i o n # 1: 2 0 0 7

2 0

f o t o n

: d a g m a r z i t k o v

a

P l u t o s t y r a u t o m a t i o n h o s H ä s t e n s

A n d e r s Li n d h ( t v ) , p r o d u k t i o n s t e k n i k e r p å H ä s t e n s , v i s a r c e n t r a l s k å p e t m e d m o t o r s t y r n i n g a r

o c h s ä k e r h e t s P LC : n P l u t o i f a b r i k e n s n y a a u t o m a t i o n s l ö s n i n g f ö r i n t e r n m a t e r i a l h a n t e r i n g .

D i c k S t e n s s o n ( b a k o m ) f r å n A l l e l e k t r o T e a m i E s k i l s t u n a h a r t i l l s a m m a n s m e d s i n k o l l e g a F r e d -

r i k S t r å h l e ( t h ) a n s v a r a t f ö r s y s t e m e t s a r k i t e k t u r o c h p r o j e k t e t s g e n o m f ö r a n d e . S t y r t e k n i k e n

k o m m e r f r å n J o k a b S a f e t y o c h o p e r a t ö r s t e r m i n a l n e n f r å n B e i j e r .

o p ö s l

P LC

P l

H v - s k å p

g w y

f k v s -

S 1

S / s p p

n ö s p p m b y

n ö s p p L s å L s å

S / s p p

n ö s p p

n ö s p p

L s b

S 2

S 14

P b s

P l b s s

f i g u r : d ag t o i j e r

P lu t o ä r e n s ä k e r h e t s - P LC

b y b s s s s

s å k l l al l - s - s y s ä p p

l l 3 2 h k s l s l l v -

v s ä k h s b s s .

Alla P lu t o - e n h e t e r k -

v ä å å l l -

h ö b s l

s s ä k h s å .

www.jokabsafety.com

We make it simple to build safety systems. Developing innovative products and

solutions for machine safety has been our business idea since the company was

founded in Sweden in 1988. Our vision is to become “the best partner for machine safety”.

Many industries around the world, have discovered how much easier it has be-

come to build protection and safety systems with our components and guidance.

We develop innovative productsand solutions for machine safety

Experience We have great experience of practical application of safety requirements and standards from bothauthorities and production. We represent Sweden in standardisation organisations for machinesafety and we work daily with the practical application of safety requirements in combination withproduction requirements.

Systems

We deliver everything from a safety solution to complete safety systems for single machines orentire production lines. We combine production demands with safety demands for production-friendly solutions.

Products

We market a complete range of safety products, which makes it easy to build safety systems.We develop these innovative products continuously. Our extensive program of products, safetysolutions and our long experience in machine safety makes us a safe partner.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

IntroductionYour partner for machine safety, locally and globally. Our products revolutionise the market. Safety history.Standards and regulations. This is how you choose safety category. Product overview. Explanations of safety terms.

Pluto Safety PLC Pluto, Pluto Manager, Gateway, Profibus, DeviceNet, CANopen, Ethernet, Safe Encoder, IDFIX, program examples

Vital and Tina safety systemsConnection examples for Vital, Tina and Tina Duo

Safety relaysRT series, JSB series, Safety timers, Expansion relays, Connection examples

Light curtains, Light grids, Light beams

and Scanner Focus, Spot, Look, Bjorn, Focus Wet, Blanking programmer, Connection examples

Stop time measurement and machine diagnosisSmart, Smart Manager

Sensors/SwitchesEden, JSNY series, Magne, Dalton, Knox

Control devices3-position device JSHD4, Two-handed control unit Safeball, Foot-operated control device Fox

Emergency stop devicesInca, Smile, Smile Tina, Lin emergency stop

Contacts rails/Bumpers/Safety mats

Fencing systemsQuick-Guard, Quick-Guard E, SafeCad, Roller doors

EC Declaration of Conformity

Componentlist


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 4/395www.jokabsafety.com

1:2www.jokabsafety.com

1:2

Jokab Safety 2008

World-wide we use locally based employees with

global co-operation in machine safety

Your partner for machine safety, locally and globally

Production + Safety = Production-

friendly protection solutionsEvery day, all over the world, we are working with our custom-ers to find and design production-friendly protection solu-tions. This usually takes place in conjunction with the peoplewho are designing production solutions, and those who willbe using the protection. Naturally, one condition is that theprotection shall be practicable. For the protection and theproduction to be optimal, both the production equipment andthe protection must also be improved continuously.

Mats Linger and Torgny Olsson founded Jokab Safety ABin Sweden in 1988, together with Gunnar Widell, whoremained in the company until 2001. In 2002 JokabSafety North America was established, by means of amerger with the North American company NCC elec-tronics, which had been founded in 1987 by BrianSukarukoff and Scott Campbell (inset picture).



1:3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

www.jokabsafety.com1:3

Pluto AS-i

Our dynamic safety circuits and our comprehensive safetyPLC are probably the most revolutionary ideas that havehappened in the safety field in the control and supervisionof protection, in many respects:

They save on inputs: a dual safety circuit with one

conductor instead of two. In addition, many protectiondevices can be connected to the same input while main-taining the highest level of safety.

Reliability is better. Our electronic sensors have much

longer lives than mechanical switches

They are safer, since the dynamic safety sensors are

checked 200 times per second. Switches on a door canonly be checked each time they are used, for exampleonce per hour or even once a month.

With the All-Master Safety PLC it is easy to connect and

disconnect machinery from a safety viewpoint. Commonemergency stop circuits and sensors can be createdas soon as the buses are interconnected between oursafety PLCs.

We are continuously designing safety systems for difficultenvironments and also to create new safety solutions where

practical solutions are missing. New technical improvements

give new possibilities and therefore we continuously devel-

ope new products.

Our products revolutionisethe market

Programmable

Not programmable

Safety relay

Double static inputs thatonly test the switcheseach time they are used.

Vital

Dynamic "doubled up"safety signal that tests asensor, for example, 200

times per second.

Flexibility

Number of machines/different stops

Traditional safety PLC

Master-Slave with static inputs

Pluto All-Master

Safety PLC with static and dynamicsafety inputs.

Slaves

Master



1:4

Safety historyDevelopments of the 70'sOur background in safety started in the seventies when there was a significantfocus on the safety of manually operated presses, the most dangerous machinein those days. The probability of loosing a finger or hand while working with thesemachines was very high. New safety solutions for both safety devices as well asfor the control systems for presses were developed and introduced on both oldand new machines. We were directly involved in this work through the design ofTwo-Hand devices, control systems for presses, making safety inspections for theHealth and Safety authorities and writing regulations for safety of these machines.This work provided an excellent base for our knowledge in machinery safety.

The numbers of accidents involving presses decreased significantly duringthese years however there is still room for new ideas to enable safety equipmentbecome more practical and ergonomic.

Developments of the 80'sDuring the eighties, industrial robots (Irb’s) started to become commonplace inmanufacturing industry. This meant that workers were outside of the dangerousareas during production but had at certain times to go inside the machine in or-

der to e.g. adjust a product to the correct position, inspect the production cycle,troubleshoot and to programme the Irb. New risks were introduced and newsafety methods required. It was for example hard to distinguish whether produc-tion machines had stopped safely or simply waiting for the next signal, such as asensor giving a start signal while a product was being adjusted into the correctposition. Mistakes in safety system design resulting in serious accidents weremade, such as the omission of safety devices to stop the Irb, unreliable connec-tion of safety devices and unreliable safety inputs on the Irb.

In the mid eighties the standards committee for safety in Industrial Robot Sy-stems EN 775/ISO 775 was started. This was the first international standard formachine safety. In order to give the correct inputs to the standard, work aroundIrb’s was closely studied in order to meet production integrated safety require-ments. The introduction of a production oriented safety stop function was made,

using for example, software to stop machines smoothly and then safety relays/contactors to disconnect the power to the machines actuators after the machinehad stopped. This technique allows easy restart of production after a stop situa-tion by the machine safeguards.

There were a lot of discussions as to whether one could have both safety andpractical requirements in a standard, such as a safe stop function, which allowedan easy restart of the machine. Three-position enabling devices were also intro-duced for safety during programming, testing and trouble shooting of Irb’s andother equipment. In the robot standard the three-position enabling function wasfirst defined by only allowing for hazardous machinery functions in the mid switchposition. Releasing or pressing the three-position push button in panic leadingto a stop signal.

Developments of the 90'sIn Europe, during the nineties, the machinery directive was the start of a tremen-dous increase in co-operation across borders to get European standards forsafety for machinery and safety devices. The experience from different Europeancountries has led to a wide range of safety standards and this has made work insafety much easier. With the integration of Europe it is now only necessary for asafety company such as ourselves to get one approval for our components for allof Europe instead of one per country.

Developments 2000 -Internationally the work on safety has now been intensified within ISO. Theobjective is to have the same structure of safety requirements and standardswithin ISO as within EN. Jokab Safety is active both internationally and national-

ly in different standard working groups. The co-operation between countries isleading to better safety solutions, making it much easier to create safe workingenvironments around the world.

We protected people from loosingfingers or/and hands in dangerousmachines.

Three-position enabling devices werealso introduced for safety during pro-

gramming.

European standards for safety formachinery and safety devices.


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 7/3951:5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

1990

1995

1996

1998

2000

2001

2004

2005

2006

2007

1988

1989

1991

1992

1993

1994

1997

1999

2002

2003

2008

2009

AS-i

HMI

Profibus DP

DeviceNet

Ethernet

CANopen

First steel fencing system

Smallest safetyrelays JSBT5 andJSBR4

Stop timemeasurement

3-positiondevices

Quick-Guard aluminium

fencing system

RT series universal relays

Safeball - ergonomic control device

First safety relay

Timer reset and first light beam

Three-positionswitch for robots

SafeCad for Quick-Guard

Vital with dynamic safety circuitto category 4

Non-contact sensor Eden

Focus light beam protection

Pluto All-Master safety PLC

Dalton with Eden

Smart for machine diagnostics

Smile emergency stop withindication

Inca emergency stopfor concealed mounting

We develop innovative products

Knox - safe locking


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 8/395www.jokabsafety.com1:6

EN ISO 12100-1

EN ISO 14121-1

EN ISO 12100-2

EN ISO 13857

EN 349

EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1

EN 999

EN ISO 13850

EN1088

EN 60204-1

EN ISO 10218-1

EN 692

EN 693

Harmonised standardsHarmonised standards give support on how to fulfil therequirements of the Machinery Directive. The relationshipbetween the Machinery Directive and the harmonised stand-ards is illustrated by the diagram below. Within ISO (The International Organization for Stand-ardization) work is also going on in order to harmonisethe safety standards globally in parallel with the Europeanstandardisation work. One consequence of this is that manyexisting EN-standards will, when revised, change number.For example, EN 954-1 will when revised change number toEN ISO 13849-1. Along with the forthcoming new MachineryDirective, all harmonised standards will be reviewed andrevised to a greater or lesser extent. Jokab Safety takes an active part in the working groups

both for the ISO and EN standards.

Directives and standards are of great importance for manufactur-

ers of machines and safety components. EU Directives givingrequirements for the minimum level of health and safety are

mandatory for manufacturers to fulfil. In every member country

the Directives are implemented in each countries legislation.

Maskiner som släpps ut på marknaden/tas i drift från och med

den 29 december 2009 skall följa kraven i det nya maskindirek-

tivet 2006/42/EG.

The objectives of the Machinery Directive, 98/37/EC, are tomaintain, increase and equalise the safety level of machineswithin the members of the European Community. Based on

this, the free movement of machines/products between thecountries in this market can be achieved. The MachineryDirective is developed according to “The New Approach”which is based on the following principles

• The directives give the basic health and safety requirements,which are mandatory.

• Detailed solutions and technical specifications are foundin harmonised standards.

• Standards are voluntary to apply, but products designedaccording to the harmonised standards will fulfil the basicsafety requirements in the Machinery Directive.

Giving basic concepts, principles for design, and general aspects that can

be applied to all machinery

B1: Standards on particular safety aspects (e.g. safety distances, surfacetemperature, noise)

B2: Standards on safeguards,e.g. two-hand controls, interlocking devices,

pressure sensitive devices, guards

Dealing with detailed safety requirements for a particularmachine or group of machines

Examples of standards

98/37/ECThe Machinery

Directive

Directives andStandards

A-standard

B1-standard

B2-standard

C-standard


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 9/395www.jokabsafety.com 1:7

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

CE-marking and Declaration of conformityMachines manufactured or put on the market from the1 January 1995 shall be CE-marked and fulfil the require-ments according to the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC. Thisis also valid for old machines (manufactured before 1 January1995) if they are manufactured in a country outside the EEAand imported to be used in a country in the EEA. NOTE The point in time when the Machinery Directive wasimplemented in each Member Country varies.Machines have to be accompanied by a Declaration of Con-

formity (according to 98/37/EC, Annex IIA) that states whichdirective and standards the machine fulfils. It also shows ifthe product has gone through EC Type Examination.

Safety components have to be accompanied with a Dec-laration of Conformity (according to 98/37/EC, Annex IIC).

According to the requirements in the Machinery Directive,safety components should not be CE-marked. But manysafety components fall under the requirements in otherDirectives such as the Low Voltage Directive and the EMCDirective that require CE-marking. This means that a CE-markwill anyway be found on most safety components.A new Machinery Directive, 2006/42/EC, will come intoforce on 29 December 2009. This Directive is availableat http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/mechan_equipment/ma-

chinery/revdir.htm. Among the new features in the Directiveare full quality assurance as a certification procedure, andrequirements concerning partly completed machinery. Pre-pare in good time by reading the Directive and seeing howthe changes will affect your company.

From the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC2. For the purposes of this Directive:(a) ‘machinery’ means:— an assembly of linked parts or components, at leastone of which moves, with the appropriate actuators,control and power circuits, etc., joined together for aspecific application, in particular for the processing,

treatment, moving or packaging of a material,— an assembly of machines which, in order to achievethe same end, are arranged and controlled so thatthey function as an integral whole, — interchangeable equipment modifying the func-tion of a machine, which is placed on the market forthe purpose of being assembled with a machine or aseries of different machines or with a tractor by theoperator himself in so far as this equipment is not aspare part or a tool;

The definition of a machine can cover everything fromhand-held portable machines to production lines. There areexclusions, e.g. machinery for medical use used in directcontact with patients, means of transport, i.e. vehicles andtheir trailers intended solely for transporting passengers andagricultural and forestry tractors.

The Machinery Directive is valid also for

2. ... ‘safety components’ means a component, pro-vided that it is not interchangeable equipment, whichthe manufacturer or his authorised representativeestablished in the Community places on the marketto fulfil a safety function when in use and the failureor malfunctioning of which endangers the safety orhealth of exposed persons.

Safety components are e.g. light curtains, safety relaysand safety PLCs.

The Machinery Directive; for machines and safety components



"Old" machines "New" machines

1. Machine that is put on

the market or put into

service after 1/1 1995 in

the EEA.

Council Directive 89/655/EEC

(with amendment 96/63/EC and

2001/45/EC)

concerning the minimum safety andhealth requirements for the use ofwork equipment by workers at work.

Possible national legislation onspecific machines

Low Voltage Directive2006/95/EC

Machine that is put on the

market or put into service

before 1995 in the EEA.

Possibly

moredirectives

2. All machines that are

imported to the EEA

irrespective of date of

origin.

CE-marking +

Declaration of

conformity

The Machinery Directive98/37/EC

EMC-directive 2004/108/EC

Council Directive 89/655/EEC

(with amendment 96/63/EC

and 2001/45/EC) concerningthe minimum safety and healthrequirements for the use of workequipment by workers at work. N.B!Not annex 1, instead use applicabledirectives.

Requirements for the use of machineryFor a machine to be safe it is not enough that the manu-facturer has been fulfilling all valid/necessary requirements.The user of the machine also has requirements to fulfil. Forthe use of machinery there is a Directive, 89/655/EEC(with amendment 96/63/EC and 2001/45/EC). A newMachinery Directive, 2006/42/EC, will come into force on29 December 2009.

About CE-marked machinery the Directive gives the follow-ing requirement

From 89/655/EEC (with amendment 96/63/EC and 2001/45/EC)1. Without prejudice to Article 3, the employer mustobtain and/or use:(a) work equipment which, if provided to workers inthe undertaking and/or establishment for the first timeafter 31 December 1992, complies with:(i) the provisions of any relevant Community directivewhich is applicable;

(ii) the minimum requirements laid down in Annex I,to the extent that no other Community directive isapplicable or is so only partially;

This means that when repair/changes are made on the ma-chine it shall still fulfil the requirements of the Machinery Di-rective. This doesn´t have to mean that a new CE-marking isrequired. (Can be required if the changes are extensive)..

“Old” machinesFor machines delivered or manufactured in the EEA before1 January 1995 the following is valid.

(b) work equipment which, if already provided to work-ers in the undertaking and/or establishment by 31December 1992, complies with the minimum require-ments laid down in Annex I no later than four yearsafter that date.

(c) without prejudice to point (a) (i), and notwithstand-ing point (a) (ii) and point (b), specific work equipmentsubject to the requirements of point 3 of Annex I,which, if already provided to workers in the under-taking and/or establishment by 5 December 1998,complies with the minimum requirements laid down inAnnex I, no later than four years after that date.



1

2

34

5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Annex 1 contains minimum requirements for health andsafety. There can also be additional national specific require-ments for certain machines. NB The point in time whenthe Machinery Directive was implemented in each MemberCountry varies. Therefore it is necessary to check with thenational authorities in ones own country, to find out what isconsidered as “old” and respectively “new” machines.

Risk assessment – an important tool both

when constructing a new machine andwhen assessing risks on older machinesA well thought-out risk assessment supports manufac-turers/users of machines to develop production friendlysafety solutions. One result of this is that the safety com-ponents will not be a hindrance. This minimizes the risk ofthe safety system being defeated.

New machines

The following requirement is given by the Machinery Directive

The manufacturer is under an obligation to assess the

hazards in order to identify all of those which apply tohis machine; he must then design and construct it tak-ing account of his assessment.

The standard EN ISO 14121-1 gives guidance on the infor-mation required to allow risk assessment to be carried out.The standard does not point out a specific method to be

used. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer to select asuitable method.

Machines in use

Risk assessment must be carried out on all machines thatare in use; CE-marked as well as not CE-marked.

To fullfil the requirements from Directive 89/655/EEC(concerning the minimum safety and health require-

ments for the use of work equipment by workers atwork) risk assessment have to be made.

Documentation of risk assessment

The risk assessment shall be documented. In the assess-ment the actual risks shall be analysed as well as the levelof seriousness.

Protection or warning?How is it possible to choose safety measures that areproduction friendly and in every way well balanced? TheMachinery Directive gives an order of priority for the choice

of appropriate methods to remove the risks. Here it is furtherdeveloped in a five step method.

Prioritize safety measures according to the five step

method

1. Eliminate or reduce risks by design and construction2. Move the work tasks outside the risk area3. Use guards/safety devices4. Develop safe working routines/information/education5. Use warnings as pictograms, light, sound etc.

The further from middle of the circle, the greater the respon-

sibility for the safety is put onto the user of the machine. If fullprotection is not effectively achieved in one step, one has togo to the next step and find complementary measures.

What is possible is dependant on the need for accessibility,the seriousness of the risk, appropiate safety measures etc.



1. Make machine safe by Hazard: Cuts and wounds from sharp edges and corners on machinerydesign and construction

Safety

measure: Round off sharp edges and corners.

2. Move the work tasks Hazard: Crushing of fingers from machine movements duringoutside the risk area inspection of the production inside the risk area Safety

measure: Installation of a camera.

3. Use guard/safety Hazard: Crushing injuries because of unintended start duringdevices loading of work pieces in a mechanical press Safety

measure: Install a light curtain to detect operator and provide safestop of the machinery.

4. Safe working Hazard: Crushing injuries because the machine can tip duringroutines/information installation and normal use.

Safetymeasure: Make instructions on how the machine is to be installed

to avoid the risks. This can include requirements on thetype of fastening, ground, screw retention etc.

5. Warnings Hazard: Burns because of hot surfaces in reach

Safety

measure: Warning signs

Example on prioritizing according to the 5-step-method

The possibilities will increase to achieve a well thought-through safety system if each risk is handledaccording to the described prioritizing.

Combine the five step method with production friendly thinking.

This can give you e.g.

• fast and easy restart of machines after a stop from a safety device• enough space to safely program a robot• places outside the risk area to observe the production• electrically interlocked doors, instead of guards attached with screws, to be able to take the

necessary measures for removing production disturbances• a safety system that is practical for all types of work tasks, even when removing production

disturbances

Priority Example of hazard and safety measure taken

Jokab Safety has extensive experience within directives and standardsWe have long experience of the practical application of directives and standards from both authoritiesand production. We represent Sweden in standardization groups within machine safety and we work dailywith the practical application of safety demands in conjuction with production demands.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

EN ISO 12100-1

EN ISO 12100-2

EN ISO 13857

EN 349

(ISO 13854)

EN ISO 13850

EN 574

EN 953

EN ISO 13849-1

(replaces EN 954-1)

EN ISO 13849-2

EN 62061

EN 999 (will be replaced by

EN ISO 13855)

EN 1088

and EN 1088/A1

EN 60204-1

Safety of machinery – Basic concepts,

general principles for design –

Part 1: Basic terminology, methodology

Part 2: Technical principles

Safety of machinery - Safety distances to

prevent hazard zones being reached byupper and lower limbs

Safety of machinery – Minimum gaps

to avoid crushing of parts of the human

body

Safety of machinery – Emergency stop

– Principles for design

Safety of machinery – Two-hand control

devices – Functional aspects – Princi-

ples for design

Safety of machinery – Guards – General

requirements for the design and con-

struction of fixed and movable guards

Safety of machinery – Safety related

parts of control systems –

Part 1: General principles for design

Safety of machinery. Safety-related parts

of control systems. Validation

Safety of machinery. Functional safety of

safety-related electrical, electronic and

programmable electronic control systems

Safety of machinery. The positioning

of protective equipment in respect of

approach speeds of parts of the humanbod

Safety of machinery. Interlocking devices

associated with guards. Principles for

design and selection

Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment

of machines. General requirements

Part 1: This standard defines basic terminology and methodology used in

achieving safety of machinery. The provisions stated in this standard are

intended for the designer.

Part 2: This standard defines technical principles to help designers in

achieving safety in the design of machinery.

This standard establishes values for safety distances to prevent danger zones

being reached by the upper limbs. The distances apply when adequate safetycan be achieved by distances alone.

The object of this standard is to enable the user (e.g. standard makers, design-

ers of machinery) to avoid hazards from crushing zones. It specifies minimum

gaps relative to parts of the human body and is applicable when adequate

safety can be achieved by this method.

This standard specifies design principles for emergency stop equipment for

machinery. No account is taken of the nature of the energy source.

This standard specifies the safety requirements of a two-hand control device

and its logic unit. The standard describes the main characteristics of two-hand

control devices for the achievement of safety and sets out combinations of

functional characteristics for three types.

This standard specifies general requirements for the design and construction

of guards provided primarily to protect persons from mechanical hazards.

This standard provides safety requirements and guidance on the principles

for the design (see 3.11 of EN 292-1:1991) of safety-related parts of control

systems. For these parts it specifies categories and describes the charac-

teristics of their safety functions. This includes programmable systems for all

machinery and for related protective devices. It applies to all safety-related

parts of control systems, regardless of the type of energy used, e.g. electrical,

hydraulic, pneumatic, mechanical. It does not specify which safety functions

and which categories shall be used in a particular case.

This standard specifies the procedures and conditions to be followed for the

validation by analysis and testing of:

• the safety functions provided, and

• the category achieved of the safety-related parts of the control sys-

tem in compliance with EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1), using the design

rationale provided by the designer.

The standard defines the safety requirements and guiding principles for the

design of safety-related electrical/electronic/programmable parts of a control

system.

This standard provides parameters based on values for hand/arm and approach

speeds and the methodology to determine the minimum distances from specific

sensing or actuating devices of protective equipment to a danger zone.

This standard specifies principles for the design and selection - independ-

ent of the nature of the energy source - of interlocking devices associated

with guards. It also provides requirements specifically intended for electrical

interlocking devices. The standard covers the parts of guards which actuate

interlocking devices.

This part of IEC 60204 applies to the application of electrical and electronic

equipment and systems to machines not portable by hand while working,

including a group of machines working together in a co-ordinated manner

but excluding higher level systems aspects (i.e. communications between

systems).

Examples of regularly used EN/ISO standards



New standards for safety-related

parts of control systems

Risk graph for determining required PLr for safety function.

Since 10 November 2006 the revised standard EN 954-1has been in force. This is called EN ISO 13849-1. During atransition period extending until 1 November 2009 bothstandards will be valid. It is however worth remembering that

this only applies within the EU – at the international level (ISOlevel) the transition period does not apply – ISO 13849-1has completely replaced EN 954-1.The IEC has also produced a standard for safety in controlsystems, IEC 62061 Safety of machinery – Functional safetyof safety-related electrical, electronic and programmableelectronic control systems, in force since 23 May 2005.

When should each standard be applied?

• EN ISO 13849-1 can be applied to all protective functions(mechanical, electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic) up to thehighest level, where PL=e.

• EN 62061 can be used up to the highest level, SIL 3.This applies to protective functions that are electrical,electronic and programmable. Where all or part of the pro-tective functions are mechanical, hydraulic or pneumatic,

EN ISO 13849-1 should be applied.

There has been a more general standard for functional safetyin existance for several years, EN 61508 (del 1-7) Functionalsafety of safety-critical electrical, electronic and program-mable electronic control systems.

In what situations should either IEC 62061 or IEC

61508 be used?

Example: Designers of safety PLCs should use EN 61508;those who integrate a safety PLC into a machine controlsystem and prepare applications program software can useEN 62061.

Applying EN ISO 13849-1.

Key

1 The starting point for evaluating the contribution of theprotective function to risk reduction.

L A low contribution to risk reduction

H A high contribution to risk reduction

PLr The required performance level

Risk parameters

S Seriousness of the injury

S1 Light (usually temporary) injury

S2 Severe (usually permanent) injury, including fatality

F Frequency and/or exposure time to the source ofrisk

F1 Seldom or less often and/or a brief exposure time

F2 Frequent or continuous and/or a long exposure time

P Possibility to avoid or limit injuryP1 Possible under special conditions

P2 Hardly possible



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

How do you achieve the performance level (PLr) that is determined by the risk graph?

There are a number of parameters to take into account when designing a certain protection function. These are as follows:• MTTFd for each individual component – Mean Time To Failure, dangerous• DC, Diagnostic Coverage – to what extent dangerous faults are detected• the structure – which categories are to be used for the parts in their protective functions• CCF, Common Cause Failure – measures that will be relevant when working with some form of redundancy (for

categories 2,3 and 4)• how the function acts in a fault condition – also given by the selected category• systematic fault – measures to avoid these in the design

The Performance Level (PL) is expressed as the Probability of Dangerous Failure Per Hour within certain ranges.

Performance Level, PL PFHD

a 10-5 ≥ till <10-4

b 3x10-6 ≥ to <10-5

c 10-6 ≥ to <3x10-6

d 10-7 ≥ to <10-6

e 10-8 ≥ to <10-7

The standard gives the designer several choices forachieving a certain PL. The following illustration shows

how this is possible, depending on which levels the pa-rameters achieve.

The values of MTTFd, DC and the categories of our prod-ucts will be given to you when you contact us. In some

cases we can state a PL straight away for a protectivefunction or part of a protective function.

In the case of a risk assessment of a machine or type ofmachine, one determines which protective measures arenecessary in order to ensure that the safety of the machinerywill agree with the Machinery Directive and the standardsthat are to be applied. In respect of the safety measures thatinvolve the control systems of machines, one must decide"how safe" the safety must be - the higher the risk the morereliability is demanded of the safety function. In EN 954-1

categories are selected – B, 1, 2, 3 or 4 for these parts.Here it is not always possible (nor desirable) to be ableto assign a category to the entire safety function. With themethod in EN ISO 13849-1 one selects instead a requiredPerfomance Level (PLr) and this applies to the entire safetyfunction. The choice of required Perfomance Level (PLr)takes place in a similar way to the selection of a category,see the risk graph.

Förklaring

PL prestandanivå1 MTTFd för varje kanal = låg (kort tid)2 MTTFd för varje kanal = medel (medellång tid)3 MTTFd för varje kanal = hög (lång tid)



Simplified assessment of performance level

(PL)A safety function most often consists of the followingparts• Input – light beam, interlocked gate, etc.• Logic – monitoring of the input, control and supervision

of components for switching off energy• Output – switches, valves, etc. for switching off energy

A safety function can be said to consist of N parts.One way of verifying that the PL has been achieved by us-ing the risk graph, see the illustration on page 1:10, is tocalculate all the parameters (MTTFd, DCavg, etc.). If on theother hand the performance levels (PL) of the three parts(input, logic and output)of the safety function are known,the estimation of achieved PL becomes much simpler.

NOTE The calculated values in the table are based on thecentre point of each interval for the respective PL. The method is as follows: 1. Identify the part of the safety function that has the lowest

PL; this will be PLlow

2. Identify the number of Nlow ≤ N in the safety function thathave PLlow

3. Find the achieved PL in the table.

As an example - a common solution - consider an interlockedgate (safety interlock), a safety relay and two monitoredcontactors with positive output contacts.

PLlow Nlow → PL

a >3 → None, not permitted

≤3 → a

b >2 → a

≤2 → b

c >2 → b

≤2 → c

d >3 → c

≤3 → d

e >3 → d

≤3 → e

NOTE The calculated values in the table are based on the centre

point of each interval for the respective PL.

PLlow is PL = c and Nlow is 1. With the aid of the table one can see that PL for the entire safety functionwill be PL = c.The safety interlock is inherently in category 1 and can never be more than this even if both its contactsare used to obtain short-circuit supervision of a connaction to the safety relay.

Designers of safety systems can use this simple method. Contact us so that we can give you the per-formance levels (PL) of our products, and also guide you as to how the performance levels (PL) are to becalculated for the components that will be connected in order to remove the energy to moving parts.

Example:

Safety interlock

MTTFd = 100 years

Category 1

→ PL = c

Safety relay

MTTFd = 600 years

DC = 99.9%

Category 4

→ PL = e

Two positive output monitored contactors

MTTFd = 35 years

DC = 99.9%

Category 4

→ PL = e



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Applying EN 62061If one chooses to design a safety function in accordance with EN 62061, the level of reliability is expressed as theSafety Integrity Level, SIL. There are a total of 4 levels, but in the EN 62061 standard SIL 3 is the highest level. SIL also(similar to the Performance Level PL), is expressed as the Probability of Dangerous Failure Per Hour.

Safety Integrity Level, SIL Probability of Dangerous Failure per Hour (PFHD)

3 ≥10-8 to <10-7

2 ≥10-7 to <10-6

1 ≥10-6

to<

10-5

There is a method in EN 62061 for assigning the Safety Integrity Level.

Severity (Se) Class (Cl)

3-4 5-7 8-10 11-13 14-15

4 SIL2 SIL2 SIL2 SIL3 SIL3

3 (OM) SIL1 SIL2 SIL3

2 (OM) SIL1 SIL2

1 (OM) SIL1

OM = Other Measures

The seriousness of injury that can occur is defined at one offour levels. Class is the addition of the values of frequency(Fr, stated as a value between 1 and 5, where 5 representsthe highest frequency), probability that a dangerous eventwill occur (Pr, stated as a value between 1 and 5, where5 represents the highest proability) and the possibilityof avoiding or limiting injury (Av, sated as a value of 1, 3or 5, where 5 represents the least chance of avoiding orlimiting an injury). The safety function that is to be designed must at leastfulfil the SIL that has been assigned to it in the analysis.The safety function consists of a number of sub-elements.Example: a door is interlocked by a non-contact sensorwhich is in turn monitored by a Pluto safety PLC, with out-puts that break the power to two supervised contactors.The sensor is sub-element 1, Pluto is sub-element 2 andthe two supervised contactors are sub-element 3. If in theanalysis it has been established that SIL2 shall be used,every individual sub-element in the safety function mustfulfil the SIL2 requirements. The safety function must thenin its entirety fulfil the SIL2 requirements.

If the SIL requirements are not fulfilled in any of the sub-ele-ments or by the safety function in its entirety, there must bea re-design.

You will get the PFHD values of our products when youcontact us.

Finally

This is just a brief introduction to the EN ISO 13849-1 andEN 62061 standards. You are welcome to contact us sothat we can prepare suitable training and guide you in howto apply the standards to our products.

Definition of protective safety in accordance with

EN 62061

"Function of a machine whose failure can result in an im-mediate increase of the risk(s)"



The significance of this statement is that a fault such as a jammedrelay, a short circuit in a transistor or a short circuit between two

conductors should and must not result in the safety function failing,

with the consequent risk of personal injuries.Please note, “a fault” means that the system is only expected

to handle one fault at a time. Two components failing at the same

time is not regarded as likely as long as they cannot be made tofail by an external influence.

Methods for increased safety

In order to increase the reliability of a safety circuit, the following

methods are usually used:

• Well-tried safety components and safety principles• Redundancy/Duplication• Supervision

The European standard EN 954-1

EN 954-1 is a standard specically relating to safety-related partsof control systems. The standard has a system of categories, based

on the above mentioned methods, which increases the reliabilityof a safety function.

Category B

• Basic requirement• Correctly rated components• Circuits handling earth faults

Category 1

• All conditions of B apply• Well-tried safety components and safety principles• Components with a greater reliability.

Category 2

• All conditions of B apply• Individual supervised components• The safety function may fail• The loss of the safety function is detected by monitoring

Category 3 and 4

• All conditions of B apply• The safety function is always retained during a failure

• The difference between category 3 and 4 is that certain

types of fault are not detected in category 3.

Choice of category

It is above all a question of the technique available. Gate operationequipment can for example be fitted with a monitored interlocking

switch (category 1) or a dynamic sensor (category 4). However,interlocking circuits with relays and transistors, etc. normally require

solutions in categories 2 – 4 in order to achieve a higher safetylevel than for standard control circuits.

Appendix B to EN954-1 shows an example of how a categoryis chosen. The example gives some guidance but has its limita-tions. The safety category is chosen based on the safety risk of

the machinery. The risk is estimated based on the parameters S,F and P.

S Severity of injury

S1 Slight (normally reversible) injury S2 Serious (normally irreversible) injury including death

F Frequency and /or exposure time to the hazard F1 Seldom to quite often and/or the exposure time is

short

F2 Frequent to continuous and/or the exposure time islong

P Possibility of avoiding the hazard

P1 Possible under specic conditions P2 Scarcely possible

”A fault in the control circuit logic, or failure of or damage to the control circuit must

not lead to dangerous situations”. This is the declaration of the EU’s Machinery

Directive.

EN 954-1 is valid in parallel with EN ISO 13849-1 during a transition period, but

terminates on 1 November 2009 to be replaced completely by EN ISO 13849-1.

During the transition period, it is possible to choose which of the two standards to

apply. A further standard that can be applied to safety-related parts is EN 62061.

Information concerning these standards can be found on the previous pages.

This is how youchoose the safetycategory

Fig. 1 Method for selecting a safety category for safety-related parts of control system. Annex B (informative) of

standard EN 954-1.

•• Recommended category according to this method.

Possible category which can require additional

measures.

Overdimensioned measure according to this method.

Category



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

the safety signal is monitored all the time and a fault directlyleads to a stop signal or with a magnetic switch which has twoindependent contact elements which are monitored every timea gate opens. From the user's perspective the dynamic functionis preferable because several sensors can be connected toa single safety module and still achieve category 4. Also thesensor’s safety function is monitored without having to opena gate. For a magnetic switch the requirements for category 4are only fulfilled if one switch per monitoring unit is used andif the gate is opened regularly.

Since the standard EN 954-1 was written, development hasprogressed and the costs to fulll category 4 have droppeddramatically. Generally mechanical switches are replaced withnon-contact sensors to increase the reliability of productionequipment. The same goes for the safety side. With electronicnon-contact switches, with a transmitter and a receiver, oneavoids the problems of deterioration and excessive stresswhich harm the sensor. For that kind of sensor dynamic

monitoring is required to enable a safe function. This meansthat its function is constantly being monitored, hundred oftimes per second. The reaction time for a safe stop will thenbe the same during a malfunction as during the activation of astop (e.g. a gate opening). The monitoring frequency will also

be astronomical compared to that of mechanical switchesand magnetic switches, which are only monitored every timethey are used. In the new EN ISO 13849-1, which will replace954-1, probability calculations are used together with differentcategory levels to compare different “performance levels”. Evenwhen using EN ISO 13849-1 it can be so that one achievesreasonably high theoretical reliability with an electromechanicalswitch, although this presumes correct installation, properuse and otherwise ideal conditions. A non-contact switchinstead provides high levels of both theoretical and practicalreliability.

Our conclusion, use dynamic signals!

Our conclusion is that today it is more cost effective, safer andmore reliable to work with dynamic signals to achieve category4 for sensors and monitoring units. In that case it is alsopossible to fulll the Machinery Directive, 1.2.7. requirement:“A fault in the control circuit logic, or failure of or damage tothe control circuit, must not lead to dangerous situations”.Also one does not have to discuss whether the correct safetycategory has been chosen!

By taking the three parameters S, F and P into account asshown in the drawing (gure 1), a recommended control systemcategory can be obtained according to this method. However,the problem with this table is that it does not give a clear-cutanswer but several alternatives. For example, an automaticproduction plant with estimated risk factors of S2 (seriousinjuries), F1 (seldom to quite often), P2 (scarcely possible toavoid an accident) comes under the categories 1 – 4 althoughcategories 2 and 3 would be the preferred choice as theseare marked with two black lled rings. A higher category can

always be chosen and category 1 may also be chosen if thesystem´s intended behaviour is maintained. A justication forthe deviation should also be given. The fact that categories 1 and 4 are combined in the samesafety circuit is due to the standard not specifying a stricthierarchical safety order. When comparing categories 2 – 4,category 4 is normally the safest. However, when comparingcategory 1 with categories 2, 3 and 4, this is not always amatter of course.

A mechanical switch does not give a safe function!

When it comes to mechanically operated interlocked switches,it has long been accepted a Category 1 switch is adequate for

many installations, which is also supported by several standards.However some companies have now re-evaluated this and haveinstead started to demand two mechanical switches or non-contact switches/sensors, where they previously acceptedsingle mechanical switches. Many reported incidents form thebackground to this. The requirements for switches to providesafe functioning are that they are mounted correctly and thattheir positions do not change during their life-cycle, in otherwords, ideal conditions. In many installations the location ofhatches or doors changes over time. This has led to a switch notgiving a stopping signal when an interlocked gate has opened.The reasons for this are many, but they can be summarized inmechanical deterioration or physical damage to a door/hatch.

In turn this has led to an interlocked switch being affected byhigher stress than the switch manufacturer’s specifications. Toavoid this type of malfunction it is more appropriate to use non-contact switches/sensors because mechanical deteriorationdoes not affect the safety function, i.e. the stop signal is givendirectly if the position is wrong.A non-contact switch/sensor does not have a guided function

and is designed to fulfill the requirements in another way. Therequirements are fulfilled either with dynamic sensors where

Dynamic sensorsDoor 1 Door 2 Door 3

*Dynamic monitoring,

Vital/Pluto

Up to 30 doors (Eden sensors) can be connected to the dynamicmonitoring maintaining category 4.

*Static monitoring,

e.g. RT6Interlocked switch

D o o r 1

Maximum 1 door (2 interlocked switches) canbe connected to the static monitoring for cat-egory 4 to be maintained for the entire system.

* *



We train you on safetyrequirements

What requirements are there today?With the incorporation of Sweden into the EU there aremany new standards and regulations with which to comply.There have also been changes and revisions of existingstandards and directives.

As a business and designer one is obliged to know aboutand to follow all the regulations. But it can be difficult foreach individual company to keep track of all the new regu-lations and how they should be applied.

Your local Jokab Safety sales office can help you with

training and analysis during a build-up phase or as acontinuous consulting assignment.

Our course trainers have a extensive experience in machine safetyA distinguishing feature of all the engineers at Jokab Safety is that they work daily with practical applications of standardsand regulations. This is true for everything from safety components for individual machines to entire deliveries of safetysystems for larger production lines. Within the company there is also a very good knowledge of machine control andproduction. We are also represented in standardisation groups which decide on European and International standardsconcerning machine safety. Because Jokab Safety is represented globally, we have the knowledge of safety requirementsin different countries.

Training in machine safety

Are you building machines for sale or for your own use? Are you a user of machines? Are you working with automationof production plants or do you make technical evaluations of machines prior to purchase? Regardless of the purpose, there is a need for knowledge concerning what requirements and regulations exist inrespect of machine safety, and how they should be applied.

• Product liability and its consequences• CE-labelling• The Machine Directive and how to apply it• Choice of certication procedure with examination

of the parts which are required in order to be ableto CE-label a machine

• Harmonised standards and the applications ofthese, e.g.

- EN ISO 13849-1/-2 - EN ISO 12100-1/-2 - EN 60204-1 - EN ISO 13850 - EN ISO 13857, EN 999 (EN ISO 13855)

• Machine safety analysis; method and cases• Choice of safety measures/safety devices• Requirements for manufacturer´s technical

documentation• Requirements for manuals• Requirements for ”old machines”

• Specic interpretation cases, e.g. re-construction ofmachines

• Forthcoming changes in the Machine Directive

We offer company-adapted training in the following fields:

Company-adapted training in machine safety

Contact your local sales ofce with questions andyour current training needs. Together with you,we will customize the training to your specificcompany requirements.

- enhance your knowledge!



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Product training

Do you need assistance in CE-marking a machine? Do you want a third party to carry out a risk analysis on a machineline? Do you have the need of a partner to examine how various regulations´ effect the safety of your machines?

Training in risk analysis

We regularly have training courses in our offices. One of these covers risk analysis and how to choose productionadapted measures.

A course in risk analysis contains the following:

• Risk analysis - from theory to practice

• What durability towards errors shall the safety systemhave?

• Standard EN ISO 13849-1/-2• Safety distances for fencing systems and safety

components - how do you choose?• Cases, practice and brieng of risk analysis and choice of actions

Our unique Pluto Safety PLC gives new and great possibilites to build-up a cost effective and exible safetysystem. With this also comes the demands of higher knowledge. For you as a customer to be able to quickly getstarted using Pluto in the most effective way and to learn about its possibilities, we regularly offer trainings at ourlocal sales ofces. In the training course cost is included a Pluto, software for Pluto and full documentation. Wealso offer training on the other Jokab Safety products such as the Vital solution, safety relays and light beams/curtains.

Training - Pluto and other Jokab Safety products

Contact your local sales ofce with questions andyour current training needs. Together with you, wewill customize the training to your specific company

requirements.

Training courses at local sales office

Contact your local sales ofce with questions andyour current training needs. Together with you, wewill customize the training to your specific companyrequirements.

Consulting - Contact us

Come to us with your needs and wewill plan with you a suitable projectprogramme. You can also contact uswith short questions which we can solvedirectly over the phone or via e-mail.

Stopping time measurement is

required in order to be able to deter-

mine the correct safety distance.

We can offer assistance and support in both short and longerassignments. Here are a few examples of what we can offer you:

• Risk analysis with proposal of measures. We do this togetherwith the customer and it is often done as a pilot-project so that thecompany afterwards themselves can carry out analysis.

• Guide the customer business through a CE-marking of machine/ plant.• Write/review technical documentation/manuals

• Interpret standards and regulations• Stopping time measurement - We can measure the stopping time

on your machines with our Stopping time and motion analyser tool.

Knowledge of the stopping time is a prerequisite to be able to determinethe correct safety distance. EN 999 sets the requirements.

• Programming of Pluto Safety-PLC.

Consulting



Light beams/light

curtains/scanner –Focus and Spot

A complete range of light beams and light curtains.

System

• Industrial robots for different sectors

• Level crossings with barriers

• Mechanical/Hydraulic presses

• Packaging machinery

E-stops–Smile series and JSNY10

Unique e-stop devices that can work with dynamic dualsignals.

Dynamic circuits–Vital, Pluto and Tina adaptation

Dynamic safety circuits for multiple sensors in accordancewith the highest safety category. Tina converts volt freecontacts to dynamics safety signals, etc..

Sensors/switches–Eden, Magne and JSNY-series

Dynamic non-contact sensors, interlocking devices andmagnetic switches.

Safety relays–RT-series, JSB-series, safety timers

and expansions relaysThe smallest and most exible safety relays on themarket.

Safety circuit according to

Category 4 EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1



AS-i

HMI

Probus DP

DeviceNet

Ethernet

CANopen

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Training & consulting• Machine safety & risk analysis

• Standards

• Protection systems

• Programming• Product training

Control devices–Safeball, JSHD4

and Fox

Ergonomic three-position devices,two-hand control devices and footoperated switches.

Fencing system/SafeCAD/

Roller door –Quick-Guard and SafeCadA stable and exible fencing system which is easy toconstruct

Rails/bumpers/matsSafety contact rails, bumpers and mats.

Stopping time andMachine diagnosis tool –Smart

Smart stop analyser. Stop time and machine diagnosistool.

Safety PLC –Pluto

A unique ”All Master” safety PLC for simple design ofsafety systems.



EXPLANATION OF SAFETY TERMINOLOGY

Supervised Reset

The input must both be closed and opened before theoutputs of the safety relay are activated. Using thismethod both the reset device and the interconnectingcable are supervised.

Test

The input is used to supervise contactors and valves,and must be closed before the safety relay can bereset. It can also be used as a simple form of reset onlyrequiring a contact closure. In this case however, therisk of short circuit must be prevented and the resetdevice supervised separately.

Time Reset

This is used to prevent unintentional reset whensomebody is in the risk area. Within a guaranteedmaximum time two or more reset push buttons must beactivated. The PB’s must be placed in such physical

positions so that the users can overview the totaldanger area. The Time Reset function can be achievedusing a JSHT1 in combination with a safety relayincorporating a supervised reset.

Delayed Safety Stop

Where it is permissable to allow a machine to stopbefore disconnection of power, it is necessary toachieve a Delayed Safety Stop. The delay period beingthe time between the initiation of the stop signal and theopening of the safety contacts. The time delay must bedesigned in such a way that it will not increase in timein the case of a component failure. This type of delay

is permitted, dependant upon risk asses sment, for bothemergency stops and other safety devices.

Bypass Connection

This is sometimes permissible where it is required to,e.g., allow material transport into a dangerous area. TheBypass Connection must be of the same safety level asthe safety device being bypassed.

Time Bypass Connection

This is the provision of a guaranteed maximum timefor the transportation of material or passing with anenabling device.

Inching

Inching requires safety outputs to be closed for amaximum period of time allowing the machine tomove only a short distance each time the inchingcontrol is activated. The time must be designed sothat the specied time will not increase in the case ofcomponent failure.

Three Position Enabling/Hold to Run Device

These devices are used during trouble shooting ortesting of machines. If the device push button is pressedinto its bottom position or released completely a safe

duplicated stop signal is given. JOKAB SAFETY´sThree Position Devices have duplicated switches andare supervised by a true two input channel safety relay.

Contact Strip/Mat

Contact Strips/Mats can be supervised by a true two

input channel safety relay. A stop signal being generated

when both inputs are connected (shortcircuited) to

each other.

Brake StripWhen a Brake Strip is squeezed the contacts within

the strip are forced open and provides a stop signal via

a suitable safety relay.

Interlocked Hatch

When a Interlocked Hatch is opened an interlock

device gives a stop signal via a safety relay. If the hatch

cannot be entered by a human body automatic reset

can be allowed.

Interlocked Gate

When a Interlocked Gate is opened an interlock device

gives a stop signal via a safety relay. If the gate can

be passed by a human body a safety relay with a

supervised reset should be used.

Foot Pedal

A safety foot operated switch is used when the operator

has to have both hands free. Safety relays can be

used to supervise Foot Pedals to ensure both correct

operation and to ensure shortcircuits in connecting

cables do not cause unintentional start signals.

Two Hand Control

This requires the use of a safety relay to supervisethat the two start push buttons are pressed within 0.5

sec of each other before a start signal is allowed. The

highest safety level requires two contacts in each PB,

a duplicated stop function being given even if only one

PB is released (see JSBR4). Shortcircuits between

connecting wires are detected automatically. In the

lower safety level other safety relays can be used.

Emergency Stop

When an Emergency Stop push button is activated

a stop signal is given via a safety relay. Reset of the

Emergency Stop device should not by itself lead to astart signal being given.

Machine I/O

All types of machines have a need to interface to

emergency stops, contactors and other types of safety

devices. Approved safety relays make this easy to

perform.

True Two Channel

True Two Channel requires two inputs with different

voltages to be closed before the safety relay can be

activated. A stop signal is given even if only one inputis opened or a short circuit is detected across the

inputs.





Profibus DP

DeviceNet

Ethernet

CANopen

+

AS-i

Pluto Manager

www.jokabsafety.com

Pluto Safety PLCIncluding dynamic signals, the new safety principle.

20 I/O 31 AS-i safety nodes46 I/O12 I/O

(A/D)

Pluto/Gateway/Encoder

HMI



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Contents Page

Descriptions and examples in this book show how the products work and can be used. This does not mean that they can meet the requirements forall types of machines and processes. The purchaser/user is responsible for ensuring that the product is installed and used in accordance with theapplicable regulations and standards. We reserve the right to make changes in products and product sheets without previous notice. For the latestupdates, refer to www.jokabsafety.com. 2008.

Why you should use the Pluto safety PLC _______________________________2:2

Pluto with and without a databus ______________________________________2:4

_________________________________________________________ 2:6

____________________________________________________ 2:8

____________________________________________________ 2:10

____________________________________________________ 2:11

Pluto Manager ____________________________________________________ 2:12

Pluto Gateway _____________________________________________________ 2:14

__________________________________________________________ 2:16

_________________________________________________________ 2:18

_________________________________________________________ 2:20

__________________________________________________________

2:22

Safe encoder ______________________________________________________ 2:24

Example – Robot cell with Pluto _____________________________________ 2:28

Electrical connections ______________________________________________ 2:29

Pluto settings _____________________________________________________ 2:30

PLC code Pluto ____________________________________________________ 2:32



+ +

4 4 4+ +

4

6 4

+

+

+

Pluto AS-i

Pluto – All Master

Why you shouldhave Pluto safetyPLC's.

Pluto is an ”All-Master” safety PLC concept, that simplifiesthe design of safety systems and achieves the highest safety between Pluto and conventional safety PLC´s is that thereis no "Master-Slave" relationship between the control unitsconnected to the safety bus. Each Pluto is a 'Master' unit andcan see the other Plutos' inputs and outputs, and can therebymake decisions about its own safety environment.

Approval:

– for simplifying the design of and changes to safety systems!

Master

Slaves


Pluto All-Master

Our solution with All-Master

Pluto All-Master

Pluto All-Master

S a f e

b u s

nodes

This concept enables simple communication, programmingand changes to the safety system. With the use of a 'Gateway'device, a Pluto can communicate with other bus systemsand thereby form part of a larger network. Gateway units areavailable for several different bus systems, such as Profibus, safety slaves and standard slaves can be handled. Pluto offers an economic solution for both single machinesand for major machine systems.

EN 954-1, Category 4EN 61496-1, Type 4

Master

Slaves


Pluto All-Master

Our solution with All-Master

Pluto All-Master

Pluto All-Master



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Light beams Light grids/curtains devices

Sensors/switches

Two-handcontrols

Emergencystops

Strips Mats

– to supervise safety devices!

Most safety devices on the market can be connected di-rectly to Pluto units. By using dynamic signals with sensorsfrom Jokab Safety only one input is needed for category 4, is also possible to connect up to 10 sensors in series to asingle input on Pluto according to category 4.

For example non-contact Eden sensors, Spot light beamsand Tina emergency stop buttons can all be connected inseries to a single Pluto input. Even mechanical switches canbe connected to the 'dynamic' safety circuit using Jokab that can be used as both inputs and outputs.

– to save on inputs!

T w

o i n p u t s

Pluto

has inputs for static anddynamic sensors. Severalsensors can be connectedto one dynamic input inaccordance with category 4.

IO connections

both input and output at the same time (e.g. for a reset button with lamp

indication)

Dynamic signals

1–10 doors with one Eden per doorcategory 4

Dynamic signals

1-10 sensorscategory 4

Static inputs (mechanical switches)

2 for each door = category 4

input/output



Pluto B20

Ethernet

CANopen

DeviceNet

Profibus DP

HMI

4 independent

failsafe safety outputs

Pluto with databus - an overview

Pluto without a databus – A single Pluto can be used as a

fully programmable safety logic controller.

Pluto S20 Pluto S46

Gateway for two-way databuscommunication between Pluto andother control systems.

HMI panel can communicatewith Pluto in both direc-tions. Connection can bemade via the bus or directto the front of the Pluto.

words, they are similar to the equivalent versions with bus connections, the B20 and B46-6.

Connector expansion

Several expansion relays can be con-nected to a single Pluto safety outputwhile retaining the safety level.

Pluto is an All-Master-System for dynamic and static safety circuitswhere the inputs and other information are shared on a databus.Several safety sensors can be connected to one input while stillachieving the highest level of safety. There are also combined in-puts and outputs that can be used, for example, for lamp pushbut-tons where the input and output functions are used simultaneously.Pluto has inputs for all safety devices on the market, and the Pluto

Manager software selects how each input shall respond.

Patented

Pluto bridgeWith a Gateway set upas a Pluto bridge, it is increase the databus

length use different databus

speeds for each section filter information from

one section to reducethe databus loading onother sections.

20 I/O

Patented Patented Patented



Pluto B46 Pluto AS-i

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Safe bus

Absolute encoder.

8 single turn or multiturn absolute encoderscan be connected di-rectly to the safety bus.

Free software is available via our website, at

www.jokabsafety.com!

6 independent


Pluto AS-i is an AS-i module which can be con- on the bus or work together with an AS-i master digital outputs, as well as safety outputs.

Programming is performed using ladder orBoolean algebra – with timers, auxiliary mem-ory, registers, sequential programming andTÜV-approved function blocks. The programcan be downloaded cost-free from the web

site. Programs can be loaded via one Pluto toall the other Pluto units on the databus.

4 independent


Pluto Manager

PatentedPatented

+ 31 AS-i safety slaves

46 I/O

12 I/O(A/D)

ApprovalsEN 954-1, Category 4EN ISO 13849-1, PL eEN 61496-1, Type 4EN 61508, SIL 3EN ISO 62061, SIL 3EN ISO 60204-1EN 50178EN ISO 574, Type lllcEN ISO 50295 (Only Pluto AS-i)

Safety Monitor/Master



I/O Overview - Pluto

only one input if Jokab Safety dynamic safety components are used.

for electro-mechanical components such as contactors and valves. Failsafe relay outputs that are individually failsafe and individually programmable.

IDFIX

IDFIX



A1 X4

24VDC

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Both a lamp and a pushbutton can be connected to the same terminal. This function is intact. The lamp is only considered to be intact if sufficient current is being drawn from

Examples of connector expan-sion

Reset button that uses the combined input and output facility

Resetting with a lamp

Input connection

short-circuits it is possible to use up to three different dynamic signals and static voltage (+24 V) tosupply the inputs. The inputs are then programmed to only accept one of the signal types.

thereby be able to detect a short-circuit between the channels.

and the output of the sensor will be detected at the Pluto input. Category 4 can thus be achieved by usingonly one channel and one input.

Two-channel system Single channel dynamic system, category 4

Emergencystop with

Tina

Emergencystop with

Tina

Spot lightbeam

Eden sensor

input/output

(Current monitoring)



Technical data - general

Black and beige

24V DC ±15%

Cat. 4 in accordance withEN 954-1 EN 61508/EN 62061

Failsafe inputs I & IQ

Current at 24 V Max. overvoltage

also configurable as non-failsafeoutputs5.1 mA

Failsafe transistor outputs Q

–24 VDCSupply voltage - 1.5 V at 800 mA800 mA

Failsafe relay outputs Q Max. voltage Max current

250 V AC1.5 A

Non-failsafe outputs Q

Transistor +24V, PNP "opencollector" also configurable asfailsafe inputs800 mA

Indicationinput/output LED

Pluto databusMax number of Pluto units on

CAN100, 125, 200, 250, 400, 500,800, 1000 kb/sUp to 600 m150 m at 400 kb/s

AS-i databus

M2MasterSafety monitorSafety monitor & slave

Temperature

–10˚C to +50˚C–25˚C to +55˚C

Response timesDyn. A or static input to relayDyn. A or static input to Dyn. B or Dyn. C input to Dyn. B or Dyn. C input to

Software setting "NoFilt".

<20.5 ms + program exec. time

<16.5 ms + program exec. time

<19 ms + program exec. time

5 ms shorter response time on

<29 ms + program exec. time

Additional Response timesDatabus between Pluto unitsDatabus between Pluto unitson error

10 ms10–40 ms

Enclosure classification

Technical data - type-specific

Pluto A20

20 I/OCurrent monitoring

Pluto B16

16 I/ONon-failsafe outputs

Pluto B20

20 I/O

Failsafe inputs

Failsafe inputs or non-failsafe outputs Max total load 2.5 A

Max total load 2.5 A


Analogue inputs

Failsafe relay outputs –

Failsafe transistor outputs –

Current monitoring

±10%

– –

Pluto databus AS-i databus – – –

100 mA 100 mA 100 mA

6 A 6 A 6 A

Dimensions (w x h x d) 45 x 84 x 118 mm 45 x 84 x 118 mm 45 x 84 x 118 mm



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Pluto S20

20 I/ONon-Pluto databus

Pluto B46-6

46 I/O

Pluto S46-6

46 I/ONon-Pluto databus

Pluto AS-i

AS-i databus


Max total load 2 A Max total load 2 A

Max total load 2 A Max total load 2 A

Max total load 2 A

– – – –

– – – – –

100 mA 150 mA 150 mA 100 mA

6 A 10A 10A 6 A

45 x 84 x 118 mm 90 x 84 x 118 mm 90 x 84 x 118 mm 45 x 84 x 118 mm

The terminal blocks are detachable without needing to disconnect the wiring.

The units are assembled with a gap of at least 5 mm.



PLUTO ACCESSORIES

Name Article no. Explanation

Gate-P1Pluto GatewayProfibus

Gate-C1Pluto Gateway

CANopen

Gate-D1Pluto GatewayDeviceNet

Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databusand Profibus.

Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databusand CANopen.

Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databusand DeviceNet.

Gate-E1Pluto GatewayEthernet

Gateway for two-way communication between Pluto databusand Ethernet.

IDFIX-R

IDFIX-RW

IDFIX-DATA

R-120 Terminating resistor for Pluto databus.

Operator's panel

Pluto Manager Programming tool for Pluto including function blocks.Can be downloaded from www.jokabsafety.com

Pluto program-ming cable

For loading PLC programs and monitoring.

Databus cable

CAN-Bus cable yellow 2 x 0.50 mm²

CAN-Bus cable purple 2 x 0.50 mm² halogen-free

Absoluteencoder

Absoluteencoder

Absolute encoder model RSA 698 (multi turn)

Pluto communications cable for operator's panel



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



Step by step

Step 1I/O configurationThe inputs and outputs are configured depending on what they are connected to, static or dynamic signals,inputs and/or outputs, etc.

Step 2Defining variables databus communication (GM) and registers (R). The names of the variables can be changed as requiredinstead of the default variable names used in the PLC program.

Step 3Ladder programmingThe programming language used in Pluto contains function blocks, certified by TÜV Rheinland, with solutionsfor the most common safety functions. The function blocks can be used in conjunction with standard ladder

instructions. The programming language has a full instruction repertoire, similar to standard PLCs on themarket, including timers, arithmetic functions, sequential programming set, etc.

Pluto Manager

Programming a project

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3



TC1RTI

QIn1

In2

Reset

Test

IndReset

TCfault

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Internet support - Pluto

List of standards and special function blocks for Pluto Manager

Blocks in the standard library (func05):1. Two-channel function with input for start2. Two-channel function with test input

reset indication.

4. Two-channel function with simultaneous requirement.5. Single channel function with input for start.6. Single channel function with start and test inputs. 8. Two-channel function with max. time limitation

(equivalent to JSHT2). Time begins to count downwhen both inputs are activated.

9. Two-channel function with max. time limitation(equivalent to JSHT2). Time begins to count downwhen one of the inputs is activated.

10. Single channel pulse function, e.g. for timed reset.11. Two-channel pulse function, e.g. for timed reset.

12. Two single channel bypass connection functions withmax. time limiting.

time limiting.14. Two-channel bypass connection function with max.

time limiting and simultaneous requirement.15. Two-channel safety function with max. time

limited bypass connection.16. Two-hand control. 18. Counter which counts down from preset value to 0.

power level in Watts.

power level in Watts.24. Light curtain with single cycle operation.25. Light curtain with single cycle operation and reset

selection.

26. Multiplication.

Other function blocks1. Safety absolute encoder.

2. Electronic cam.

Special function blocks:1. Program library with program block for eccentric

shaft presses.2. Custom special blocks can be made available.

-ers, offering continuously updated product support. The

requirements

The safety designer has complete freedom to program the safety functions or to use TÜV-approved pre-defined safetyfunction blocks.

Function block example

TC1RTITwo-channel function with test and reset

inputs, and reset indication.

safety device outputs are connected.

Test is a condition that must be true at themoment of switching on, and can be usedfor monitoring external components. Testmust be true before the Reset input closes,i.e. the function block cannot be initiatedby Test.

Reset is a supervised reset input andmust be activated (positive flank) after the other inputs haveactivated for the function output to be activated.

and flashes when the function block is ready for resetting. The TCfault output is activated in the case of a two-channel

DescriptionThe function block acts as a conventional two-channel safety



Ethernet

Profibus DP

DeviceNet

CANopen

2:14

Pluto Gateway is a unit providing two-way communicationbetween a Pluto safety PLC and other field buses. There

GATE-P1 – Profibus-DPGATE-D1 – DeviceNetGATE-C1 – CANopenGATE-E1

rail, and can be connected anywhere in a Pluto databus.The unit has a common interface with Pluto, i.e. the samecabling, and the Pluto Manager PC program can be usedfor servicing and where necessary programming. Normal- which means that programming tools are not required toput the gateway itself into operation.

GatewayPluto

Use:

Bi-directional status informationfrom the Pluto safety PLC

Features:

Two-way communication

Built-in filter function, sharednetwork

Can be located anywhere in

the databusCommon interface with Pluto

Ready-made function blocks

For programming Pluto there are ready-made functionblocks which, via a Pluto Gateway, send and receive datafrom the supervisory system. The GATE-D1 and GATE-C1 types, which use a CANdatabus on both sides, can also usefully be used as CANbridges where it is required to split a Pluto databus intoseveral sections. This is particularly useful when long data-bus cables are needed. There is also a built-in filter functionwhich makes it possible to block data that is not requiredfor use on the other side of the bridge, which reduces thedatabus loading in the other sections and thereby permitslonger databus cables.


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 41/3952:15www.jokabsafety.com

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto Gateway



Profibus DP

Pluto safety PLC.

Data from Pluto

- -BUS modules in the gateway, one module for each Plutounit. Local data in Pluto units can be read by a "local data”module together with the PLC codes in the supervisorysystem.

Data to Pluto

non-safety-related information to a Pluto safety PLC. A to-tal of 64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bit registerscan be transmitted. Function blocks for these functions areavailable in Pluto Manager.

ProfibusPluto Gateway

PLC function blocks into the supervisory PLC system, Jokab Safety providesready-made function blocks for several popular brands ofPLC. The function blocks make it easier to receive andsend information to the Pluto system. The function blocksare supplied as open units with full access for the custom-er to change and add functions. These function blocks canbe obtained via the Jokab Safety web site.

Pluto databus LED

PC port

Profibus LED

Profibus connector


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 43/3952:172:17www.jokabsafety.com

119 mm

22,5 mm

101 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto Profibus

Technical data - Gateway Profibus

Manufacturer:

Article number/ordering data: GATE-P1

Databuses: -Pluto databus CAN (isolated)

Pluto databus speeds: 100, 200, 250, 400, 500, 800 and1000 kbit/s(automatic speed detection)

PROFIBUS speed: Up to 12 Mbit/s (automatic speeddetection)

PROFIBUS address:

PROFIBUS version: DP slave, DP-V0

Connections: (included) -nection.Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 V DC(included)

Status indication: Pluto databus status indication via LED

Operating voltage: 24 V DC, -15% till +20%

Current at 24 V: < 100 mA (recommended fuse ≤6 A)

Dimensions (w x h x d): 22.5 x 101 x 119 mm

Installation:

Operating temperature (ambient): -10°C to + 55ºC

Temperature, transport and storage: -25°C to + 55ºC

Humidity: EN 60 204-1 50% at 40ºC (ambient90% at 20ºC)

Enclosure classification:



DeviceNet

with Pluto safety PLC.

Data from Pluto

Via DeviceNet a supervisory PLC system can have access ”implicit” messages. Local data in Pluto units can be readvia DeviceNet ”explicit” messages.

Data to Pluto

Via DeviceNet a supervisory PLC system can transmit non-safety-related information to a Pluto safety PLC. A total of64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bit registers can be

transmitted (via DeviceNet ”implicit” or ”explicit” messag-es). Function blocks for these commands are available inPluto Manager.

Pluto bridge

A GATE-D1 can also be used to advantage as a CANbridge when it is required to divide a Pluto databus intoseveral sections. This is particularly useful when long data-bus cables are needed.

DeviceNetPluto Gateway

There is also a built-in filter function which makes it pos-There is also a built-in filter function which makes it pos-sible to block any data that is not required for use on theother side of the bridge, which reduces the databus load-ing in the other sections and thereby permits longer data-bus cables.

ABB Robotics IRC5

that describes this integration can be obtained via the Jok-ab Safety web site.

Pluto databus LED

PC port

DeviceNet LED

DeviceNet connector



119 mm

22,5 mm

101 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto DeviceNet

Technical data - DeviceNet

Manufacturer

Article number/ordering data: GATE-D1

Databuses: -Pluto databus CAN (isolated)-DeviceNet CAN (isolated)


DeviceNet speeds: switch)

DeviceNet address:

DeviceNet Version:

Connections: (included)Front, 5-pole terminal for DeviceNet(included)Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 V DC(included)

Status indications: Pluto databus status indication via LEDDeviceNet MNS status indication viaLED




Installation:


Temperature,

transport and storage: -25°C to + 55ºC





CANopen

with Pluto safety PLC.

Data from Pluto

Via CANopen a supervisory PLC system can have access the supervisory system.

Data to Pluto

Via CANopen a supervisory PLC system can send non-safety-related information to a Pluto safety PLC. A total of64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bit registers can be blocks for these commands are available in Pluto Manager.

CANopenPluto Gateway

Pluto bridgeA GATE-C1 can also be used to advantage as a CANbridge when it is required to divide a Pluto databus intoseveral sections. This is particularly useful when long data-bus cables are needed.

There is also a built-in filter function which makes it pos-sible to block any data that is not required for use on theother side of the bridge, which reduces the databus load-ing in the other sections and thereby permits longer data-bus cables.

Pluto databus LED

PC port

CANopen LED



119 mm

22,5 mm

101 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto CANopen

Technical data - Gateway CANopen

Manufacturer

Article number/ordering data: GATE-C1

Databuses: -Pluto databus CAN (isolated)-CANopen CAN (isolated)


CANopen speeds: switch)10, 20, 50, 100, 125, 250, 500, 800and 1000 kbit/s (via software)

CANopen address:

CANopen version: ”Version 4.02 of the CiA Draft Standard

Connections: (included)Front, 5-pole terminal for CANopen(included)Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 V DC(included)

Status indications: Pluto databus status indication via LEDCANopen status indication via LED




Installation:


Temperature, transport and storage: -25°C to + 55ºC





Ethernet

-cation with Pluto safety PLC.

Protocol

from and to Pluto safety PLCs via Ethernet protocols Eth-

server and a terminal server.

Data from Pluto

Via one of the Ethernet protocols a supervisory PLC system - Local data in Pluto units can be read by special commandstogether with the PLC codes in the supervisory system.

EthernetPluto Gateway

Data to PlutoVia the Ethernet protocol a supervisory PLC system cantransmit non-safety-related information to a Pluto safetyPLC. A total of 64 Boolean values and 8 different 16-bitregisters can be transmitted. Function blocks for thesefunctions are available in Pluto Manager.

Pluto databus LED

PC port

Ethernet LED

Ethernet connector



119 mm

101 mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Gateway

Ethernet, non safety

PLC

Pluto Pluto Pluto

Q1Q0IQ16IQ14IQ12

I Q 13 IQ 1 5 I Q 17 0 VI D + 24 V

I4I0C L I2

C H I 1 I 3

I5 I7 IQ 1 1 Q 3

IQ10I6 Q2

Q1Q0IQ16IQ14IQ12

I Q 13 IQ 1 5 I Q 17 0 VI D + 24 V

I4I0C L I2

C H I 1 I 3

I5 I7 IQ 1 1 Q 3

IQ10I6 Q2

Q1Q0IQ16IQ14IQ12

I Q 13 IQ 1 5 I Q 17 0 VI D + 24 V

I4I0C L I2

C H I 1 I 3

I5 I7 IQ 1 1 Q 3

IQ10I6 Q2

Pluto CAN bus, safety

M o d b u s T CP

P R OF I NE T

E t h er N e t / I P

BUS

PLUTO

GATE-E1

PR

K

Status

Net

Status

Mod

Gateway block schematic diagram - Pluto Ethernet

Technical data - Ethernet

Manufacturer

Article number/

ordering data: GATE-E1

Pluto databus CAN (isolated)

Pluto databus speeds 100, 200, 250, 400, 500, 800and 1000 kbit/s(automatic speed detection)

Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/sHalf and full duplex

Ethernet protocol Status from and to Pluto safetyPLC - Modbus TCP

Note that certain combinationsof server protocols cannot beused simultaneously.

configuration- Web server

EtherNet/IP

PROFINET

Modbus TCP According to the Modbus organi-sation, version 1.0b (approx. 20messages per second).

Binary server (TCP/IP) status from/to the Pluto system.

Web server addresses.

Terminal server (TCP/IP) Simple server with the samecommands as via the serial pro-gramming port in the unit.

IP address Static sharing via web server orvia programming port.

Gateway configuration

Connections databus (included)Front, Ethernet connection viaRJ-45 (screened cable cat. 5eFTP)Bottom, 2-pole terminal for 24 VDC (included)

Status indications Pluto databus status indicationvia LED (Pluto databus)Ethernet module status indica-tion via LED (Mod Status)Ethernet network status indica-tion via LED (Net Status)

Operating voltage 24 V DC, -15 % till +20 %

Current at 24 V < 150 mA (recommended fuse≤6 A)

Dimensions (w x h x d):

Installation

Operating temperature(ambient) -10°C to + 55ºC

Temperature,transport and storage -25°C to + 55ºC

Humidity EN 60 204-1 50 % at 40ºC(ambient 90 % at 20ºC)






1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – Safe Encoder RSA 597

Manufacturer

Article number/ordering data:

Ambient temperature

Temperature, transport and storage

Ingress protection class

At shaft inlet

Vibration (55 to 2000 Hz) 2

60068-2-6

Shock (6ms) < 2,000 m/s2

Material, enclosure Aluminium

Surface treatment Painted and chromed or anodised

Weight

Accuracy and resolution

Resolution

Accuracy ± ½ LSB (Least Significant Bit)

Operating voltage

Polarity-protected

Short-circuit protected

Databus speed 5 kbit/s - 1 Mbit/s, preset at 500kbit/s

Address input Active low

Code type Binary

Programmable functions

Resolution, 0 positionDirection, Databus speed

Current consumption 50 mA at 24V dc

Max current consumption 100 mA



Technical data – Safe Encoder RSA 698

Manufacturer


Ambient temperature

Temperature, transport and storage

Ingress protection class

At shaft inlet

Vibration (55 to 2000 Hz) < 100 m/s2

60068-2-6

Shock (6ms) < 2,000 m/s2

Material, enclosure Aluminium

Surface treatment Anodised

Weight Approx. 400g

Accuracy and resolution

Resolution, total

25 bit 12 bits, 4096 rotations

Accuracy ± 1 LSB (Least Significant Bit)

Operating voltage

Polarity-protected

Short-circuit protected

Databus speed 10 kbit/s - 1 Mbit/s

Code type Binary

Programmable functions Resolution, 0 position

Current consumption 50 mA at 24V dc

Max current consumption 100 mA



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Encoder Cam

Function block for electronic cam gear.

Function input register 'PosReg' is within the limitsfor ’MinPos’ and ’MaxPos’. that defines the sensor's zero position.Position <0 is not permitted. the position is greater than 2999 or lessthan 201.

Safe Encoder

Function block for a single-turn encoder

that generates safe position and speed

values from two absolute encoders.

FunctionThe block reads and evaluates one absoluteencoders. The position value is sent tothe 'Position' output. The 'Speed' output

is the average value for the speed, at the applications the values of 'Position' and'Speed' are used in conjunction with the

Safe EncoderMultiturn

Function block for a multi-turn encoder

that generates safe position and speed

values from two absolute encoders.

Operative system 2.4.4 or higher is

required.

FunctionThe block reads and evaluates twoabsolute encoders. The average value forthe two sensors is calculated and sent to

the 'Position' output. The 'Speed' outputis the average value for the speed, at therate of pulses/10 ms. The block monitorsthat the encoder position values do notdiffer by more than the input value set by - the values of 'Position' and 'Speed' are

Descriptions of inputs and outputs


(max 2% of Range) the position values are within the margin set by 'MaxDiff'

NOTE! Position values from single encoders are only available

NOTE!


the position values are within the margin set by 'MaxDiff'

NOTE! Position values from single encoders are only available

NOTE!



Example – Robot cell with Pluto

Description:The example describes a processing machine served bya robot. The machine safety system consists of one Plutoto which all protection has been connected. The robot hasbeen equipped with a Pluto to which the cell protectionhas been connected. The Pluto for the machine has beenconnected via a databus cable to the robot's Pluto so thatcommon functions, such as emergency stop, can be usedby the whole cell.

Function:Emergency stop takes priority and will stop both the ma-chine and the robot. The machine hatch acts as the zonedivider, when the hatch is closed the machine forms onezone and the robot another zone. When the machine hatchis open, both the machine and the robot belong to the is open, the machine and the robot will both stop, but if themachine hatch is closed, only the robot will be stopped.After the door has been opened, the system must be resetby means of the reset button on the outside of the door.Emergency stop is reset when the pressed-in button is

-ever start immediately on resetting the emergency stop orthe door.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Electrical connections

Apparatusenclosure

Robotenclosure

Electrical equipmentenclosure for machinery

Emergency stop

Emergency stop Safety interlock switch

Machineemergencystop

Machineprotectivestop

Robot

AutostopRobotEmergency stop

Door

SupplyMatning

Pluto databus



Pluto 0 settings

Pluto 0



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Pluto 1 settings

Pluto 1

the machine hatch.



Start

TC1S

QIn1

In2

Start

ResetT

QIn1

Reset

Test

IndReset

1

2

3

4

5

PLC code Pluto 0

Two-channel supervision with automatic reset emergency stop at the door.

E-stop_kanal_2

GM0.1 = E-stop_OK_mem Auxiliary memory for emergency stop OK

I0.0 = E-stop_kanal_1 Channel 1 from the emergency stop button

I0.1 = E-stop_kanal_2 Channel 2 from the emergency stop button

Emergency stop for the robotWhen the emergency stop is activated, the robot wil l perform an emergency stop.To reset the safety features, the emergency stop button must be reset.


GM1.1 = E-stop_machine_OK_mem Global auxiliary memory from two-channel supervision of the emergency stop on the machine.

Q0.3 = Robot_NS_OK Emergency stop for the robot

Automatic stop for the robotWhen the door of the cell opens the robot is set to automatically stop.To reset the safety features, the door must be closed and then the reset signal given.

Reset Reset_ind_1_mem

.2 = Door Signal from the door sensor

I1.15 = Reset Reset button Reset

M0.0 = Reset_ind_1_mem Auxiliary memory for indication in the reset button

Q0.2 = Robot_Autostopp_OK Automatic stop for the robot

Summary of local memories that shall generate the signal in the reset lamp.The global memory is then used in the Pluto where the output is.

Reset_ind_1_mem Reset_ind_1_memM0.0 GM0.0

GM0.0 = Reset_ind_mem Collective memory for indication in the reset button

M0.0 = Reset_ind_1_mem Auxiliary memory 1 for indication in the reset button



6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.

GM1.0 = Machine hatch_OK_mem Global auxiliary memory from two-channel supervision of the safety interlock switch in the machine hatch.

SR0.10 = SR_PlutoDisplay Pluto display figure

SR0.11 = SR_ErrorCode Error code. For user error 200 + no

Alarm 02 – Door open.To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.

Door SR_ErrorCode = 0 SR_PlutoDisplay = 202

10.2 = Door Signal from the door sensor


SR0.11 = SR_Errorcode Error code. For user error 200 + no

Alarm 01 - Emergency stop activatedTo generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.

SR0.11 = 0 SR0.10 = 201






1

Start

2

TC1S

In1

In2

Start

3

TC1S

QIn1

In2

Start

4

ResetT

QIn1

Reset

Test

IndReset

5

PLC code Pluto 1

Two-channel supervision with automatic reset of the emergency stop on the machine.

E-stop_machine_kanal_2


I0.0 = E-stop_machine_kanal_1 Channel 1 from the emergency stop button on the machine

I0.1 = E-stop_machine_kanal_2 Channel 2 from the emergency stop button on the machine

Two-channel supervision of the machine hatch switch.The switch has alternating contacts and the variable name shows the contact arrangement for the respect signals when the key is in the sensor.

- Machine hatch_NC gives a signal


I1.11 = Machine hatch_NC Channel 1 from the safety interlock switchI1.12 = Machine hatch_NO Channel 2 from the safety interlock switch

Emergency machine stop.When the emergency stop is activated, the machine will perform an emergency stop.To reset the safety features, the emergency stop button must be reset.



Q1.0 = Maskin_E-stop_OK Emergency machine stop.

Protective machine stop.When the protective stop is activated, the machine will stop. To reset the safety features, the door or the machine hatch must be closed and then the reset signal given.

Door Reset_ind_2_mem

Reset



6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12


I0.2 = Door Signal from the door sensor

I1.15 = Reset Reset button Reset

M1.0 = Reset_Ind_2_mem Auxiliary memory 2 for indication in the reset button

Q1.1 = Maskin_skyddstop_OK Protective machine stop.

Summary of memories that shall generate the signal in the reset lamp.

M1.0

GM0.0 = Reset_Ind_mem Collective memory for indication in the reset button

M1.0 = Reset_Ind_2_mem Auxiliary memory 2 for indication in the reset button

Q1.15 = Reset_Ind Indication lamp in the reset button.

To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.




Alarm 02 – Door open.To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.

Door SR_ErrorCode = 0 SR_PlutoDisplay = 202

I0.1 = Door Signal from the door sensor



Alarm 01 - Emergency stop activated.To generate an alarm, a UE code (UE = User Error) can be shown on the Pluto's display.This alarm code is selected by a value of between 200 and 299 being written into the Pluto's display register.SR_ErrorCode = 0 is used as a condition to prioritise an internal alarm from the unit.

SR1.11 = 0 SR1.10 = 201






Safety system - VitalSupervision of dynamic safety signals.

www.jokabsafety.com



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Contents Page

Descriptions and examples in this book show how the products work and can be used. This does not mean that they can meets the requirements forall types of machines and processes. The purchaser/user is responsible for ensuring that the product is installed and used in accordance with theapplicable regulations and standards. We reserve the right to make changes in products and product sheets without previous notice. For the latestupdates, refer to www.jokabsafety.com. 2008 v02.

Dynamic safety circuit for Vital and Pluto _______________________________3:2

Why you should use the Vital safety system _____________________________3:4

_________________________________ 3:5

___________________________ 3:6

___________________________ 3:7 _____________________________________________________3:8

_____________________________________________________ 3:9

Why could you use the Tina adapter unit? _____________________________ 3:10

________________________________________ 3:11

__________________ 3:14

______________________________________________ 3:15

__________________________________ 3:16

_____________________________________________ 3:17 ___________________________________________________________ 3:17

___________________________________ 3:19

Tina Duo 1/2

– Remote sensor expansion unit with reset capability for Vital/Pluto _____ 3:20

_______________________________________ 3:21

Connection example - Vital & Tina _____________________________ 3:22 – 3:39



Pluto Vital

Safety category 4 according toEN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1

Dynamic inputs on Vital/P

Standard sensors with switching outputs

Tina adapter

Dynamic safety circuits, connected to Pluto (with programming) or Vital (without programming).

The active safety sensors for the dynamic safety circuits offer a highersafety level than passive sensors, since a fault is already detected at its

Vital is a safety module with redundantsafety outputs, which can monitor up to -ply with the highest safety level. TinaDuo makes it possible to monitor even between manual and automatic reset of Pluto safety loop circuits.

The Tina adapters are used to adapt switchingsensors to the dynamic safety circuits. This allows the

use of switches with positive opening, contact strips,emergency stops and light curtains in the dynamicsafety circuits.

It can be useful to connect safetysensors in parallel if, for instance,a safety light beam/curtain (one ofthe sensors) is not supposed togenerate a shutdown, when a robotis in a safe position, monitored by



Tina Duo

Tina Duo

Tina Duo

Tina 8A

Tina 8B Profibus

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

utoThe drawing shows a door, which is monitored by an reset outside the danger zone.

27 sensors and Tina Duo

Tina Duo allows for the addition of one more and traditional sensors, equipped with Tina each Tina Duo on the site.

LEDAll active sensors and Tina adaptorshave LEDs, which indicate whethereverything is OK (green), the safetycircuit is interrupted (red), or if the

circuit has been opened by anotherseries-connected sensor (blinking).

Tina 8A is a connection block for 8 active sen-sors or sensors equipped with Tina adaptors.

There is also a Tina 8B Profibus version which

Reset

Reset

Reset



Features:

Safety solution with different types

of safety components in the samesafety circuit

Eden

FocusSafety light grid/Safety light curtain

E-stopVitalSafety module

Safety circuit in accordance withcategory 4 EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1

Interlocking deviceStripsBumpersMats

Spot 35Safety light beam

Spot 10

Safety light beam

Approvals:

- To be able to connect several safety compo-

nents in series (at category 4) and supervise

them with only one safety module!

to install/connect many different types of safety device in module is based upon a dynamic single-channel conceptas opposed to conventional dual-channel safety relays. Up

to 30 dynamic sensors can be connected directly in

the safety circuit and be supervised by only one Vitalmodule. Safety components with output contacts can be connected

selection, dual safety outputs, and an information output for

- To supervise safety components!

Most safety components on the market can be connected to to be achieved in a single-channel system. For example Jokab

- For easy installation and assembly of a

safety system!

that dynamically supervises a number of safety components. other safety components can be connected together using

Why you shoulduse the Vital safety

system

- why should you choose Vital?

safety circuit

Manually supervised or automatic

reset

Detachable connector blocks

dynamic signal and outputs

Information output with two functions

INCA 1





Number of Edens that can be used with Vital and Pluto

variation. The values have been established in a laboratory environment. The actual possible number of connected 2 cable is 2 in the tables are used.

Apparatus enclosureX number of metres of cableTerminals

Sensor

Sensor


Sensor

Sensor

X number of metres of cable

Number of Edens that can be used with Vital

2 2 2 2

metrescable

Numberof sensors

Number of Edens that can be used with Pluto

2 2 2 2Number

of sensors

metrescable



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Number of Tinas that can be used with Vital and Pluto

actual possible number of connected units may therefore differ from those given in the table. The values should 2 2 in the tables are used.

Apparatus enclosure

X number of metres of cableTerminals

Sensor

Sensor


Sensor

Sensor

X number of metres of cable

Number of Tina-3A, 6A, 7A and Smile Tinas that can be used with Vital

2 2 2 2

metrescable

Number

of sensors

Number of Tina-3A, 6A, 7A and Smile Tinas that can be used with Pluto

2 2 2 2

Number

of sensors

metrescable



Output connection – Vital 1

information relay output.

In order to protect the output contactsit is recommended that loads (inductive) suppressors, but will increase the switch-off

time of the load.

Relay outputs Information outputs

Reset connections – Vital 1

Testing external contactor status Automatic resetManually supervised reset

The manually supervised reset contact and opened in order to activate the relayoutputs.

are then activated at the same time as the

inputs.

B1

Connection examples of safety devices to Vital 1

supervised and automatic reset can be

used.

Connection of S1

numbers of sensors.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – Vital 1Manufacturer

Article number/Ordering data:

Safety category (according toEN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1)

Colour

Weight 220 g

Power supply

Fuse

Max line resistance

Power consumption (without load) (with max load)

Dynamic safety circuit

Input signal

Reset input X1

Supply for reset input

Minimum contact closure timefor reset

max. (inrush current during contact closure)

80 ms

Connection of S1

Number of sensors

Total max. cable length to Total max. cable length to Spot

The above limits vary depending on cable size and application.

Response time

When activating (input-output)When deactivating (input-output)

Relay outputsMax switching capacity, resistiveload

Minimum load Mechanical life

2

operations

Relay information output(changeover contact)

LED indicationOn

T R

1 2

overload. Indicates that the output relayshave been activated

Mounting

Connection blocks (detachable)Max screw torque Solid conductors

2222

Protection class

This equipment is intended for (CSA/UL Requirement):

appliances,portable equipment, etc. with smaller transientovervoltage than installation category (overvoltage category) III.This equipment is not to be used in any other way than stated intechnical description.

Connector blocks are detachable(without cables having to be disconnected)



1

2

3

4

Why could youuse Tina adapterunits?

- To adapt safety components to a dynamic

single-channel circuit according to safety

category 4!

Tina units allow safety components with mechanical contacts, - control unit. without using a Tina adapter unit.

- For bypassing of safety components in a

dynamic circuit! -ponents in a dynamic circuit and provides the possibility forsupervision of bypass lamp indication. During bypassing of

safety devices e.g. a light grid or an interlocked gate switch/sensor, it must only be possible to allow the bypass function ifa lamp indication is given. The lamp indication must thereforebe supervised. With this system it is possible to bypass oneor more safety components at the same time.

- As a connection block for simplified con-

nection to a dynamic circuit!

be connected together. The blocks are connected with asuitable multi-core cable, that contains status informationfrom each safety component, to the control cabinet. This electronic circuits which modify the coded dynamic signalin the safety circuit. Several connection blocks can be reduce system cable costs.

Approvals:

Application:

safety circuit

Individual indication for everyconnected safety mat, strip

or bumper.

Simple connection arrangements

Vital/Pluto safety circuit,category 4, using Tina adapter units



1

2

4

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

- why should I choose Tina?

the safety circuit

is available in several versions

Tina 4A, Tina 8A, Tina 11A and Tina 12A are used as ter- apparatus enclosure by means of a cable that also containsstatus information from each safety component that is con-

Tina 6A is used to connect door sensitive edges andsafety mats, and provides an indication for each unit (Tina to the edge or mat, the risk of electrical interference isreduced.

Tina 5A is used as a bypass for safety components in a case of a bypass.

Tina 2A/B, Tina 3A and Tina 7A are used to connect safetycomponents with mechanical contacts, such as emergencystops, switches and light curtains/light beams with relay -sulation as the safety component that is to be monitored,and this is to be connected to the Tina unit with as short a

cable as possible.Tina 10A/B/C units are used for connection of Focus light connector that enables reset, a reset lamp and switching of power.

of light beams with separate transmitter and receiver.

device

Tina





1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Description of the image on the previous page

Connection 1

Connection 2

each end. the light grid. The same status information signal is con-

Connection 3 transmitter and the receiver. The status information shown

Connection 4 -

Connection 5

Connection 6

which shows the status of the switch. The same information

Connection 7

Connection 8 inputs when no sensor is required, in order to complete thesafety connection circuit.

Note:

HH3301D Connection example – Vital 1 and Tina 8A with different safety device types



Connection of Tina 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 6A, 7A and 8A

Σ info

Σ info

M20

*

*

See connection example .

See connection example




See connection example .

*


Tina 3A

Tina 6A

Tina 7A*

Tina 8A

Tina 4A

Tina 1A

Tina 2A/B

only

M20

*

*

brown

white

blue

black

grey

*

*

white

brown

blue

black

grey

brown

blue

green

orange

male

male

female

male

Technical data – TinaManufacturer


Technical data – Tina 1A, 2A, 2B, 3A, 4A, 6A, 7A, 8A and 11A

Safety category with Vital or Pluto(according to EN 954-1/EN ISO13849-1)

Färg svart

LED on Tina 1A, 2A, 2B, 3A, 6A,7A and 11A

interrupted earlierprotection open, safety circuitinterrupted (continuous red lamp the connected unit opens)

Current consumption

Tina 3A, 6A och 7A

contactsShort circuit current betweencontacts

Tina 4A and Tina 8AMax torque for terminal block:

Temperature rangestock operating

Material based on polyamid

Max connected units/cablelength

Protection class

Connections for 1A, 2A, 2B, 3A,4A, 6A, 7A, 8A and 11A

white (2)

dynamic input signal

dynamic output signal

indication output

Note. Shielded cable is recommended between cabinet and Tina

Tina 11A



Tina 5A 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Function

The Tina 5A is designed for bypassing of safety de-

vices connected to the Vital/Pluto safety circuit and

for supervision of lamp indication.

During bypassing of safety devices e.g. a light grid or aninterlocked gate, it must only be possible to allow the bypassfunction if a lamp indication is on. The lamp indication musttherefore be supervised. Whether indication is required de- broken or short circuit in the indication lamp leads to an inter- stopping the bypassing.

The signal can be connected via output contacts from asafety relay, a safety timer or be initiated via a unit providing a Spot light beam.

connected to the output signal from the last safety devicewhich is to be bypassed.

S2 is used if: odd number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassed

using an odd number of dynamic safety units. See draw- even number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassed

using an even number of dynamic safety units. See draw-

S3 is used if:

odd number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassedusing an even number of dynamic safety units. See draw-

even number of dynamic safety units is to be bypassedusing an odd number of dynamic safety units. See draw-

The total number of dynamic safety units is calculated by

Technical data Tina 5AManufacturer


Safety category together withVital/Pluto, EN 954-1/

EN ISO 13849-1

Colour

Weight

Bypass connection

Connections (or resistor when lamp is notrequired 820 ohm/2W. resistor connected across termi- taken away and replaced with asuitable rated lamp when by-pass indication is required).

LED indication

Supply voltage ok

Current consumption A1-A2 indication lamp

Mounting

Operating temperature range

Protection class

Bypassing of Eden and Tina units. - inserted by the last unit in both loops with forward more than one unit towards each other, it is recom-



1 1 1

3

2

3

2

3

2

Technical data for Tina 10A, 10B and 10CManufacturer


Colour black

Safety category with Vital 1 orPluto in accordance withEN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1

Operating voltage

LED on Tina 10A/B/C

Focus open, safety circuit open

Current consumption

Ambient temperature

Material polyamide-based


Number of units connected

to Vital

with power separately or noreset lamp is used

Number of units connected toone Pluto input

2 offConnections

Tina 10A, 10B and 10C

connections, that make it easy to connect a light cabling, which reduces the cabling to and connec- -ing green/red indications.

Tina 10A - beam Focus receiver. See the connection examples

Tina 10B -

Tina 10C -

Focus Transmitter. See the connection examples

Tina 10A, 10B and 10C connections

Tina 10B Tina 10CTina 10A



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

➋

➌

➊

Technical data for Tina 12AManufacturer


Colour black

Safety category with Vital 1 orPluto in accordance withEN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1

Operating voltage

LED on Tina 12A

Safety circuit closed and sensorSafety circuit or sensor open

Current consumption

Material polyamide-based


Number of units connectedto Vital

Number of units connected toone Pluto input

Connections 1 brown (2)

red (8)

Function Dynamic output signal from Dalton 2 = locked

Tina 12A

It enables quick and easy connection of two Daltonprocess locks an information output to report the status of thesafety sensors.

are connected to1 a lock signal2 3

Cabling

connectors. This facilitates installation, saving a lot of time, and alsodramatically reduces the risk of incorrect connection. advantages that we believe a good cable should have. These are avail-

able in any length and in various standard lengths, with moulded straightor angled male or female connectors. 2 2 screening.

Advantages:

2

The screen is always connectedto negative in male connectors.

The guide pin in the smallconnector is indicated by arecessed arrow that is easy torecognise.

The cable is also available inany length

➋ ➌

➊



M12-C01 M12-C02 M12-C03 M12-C04

2

2

2

2

2

M12-3EM12-3DM12-3BM12-3A M12-3M

1

2 3

1

2

31

2

31

2

31

2

31

2

31

2

3

2 3 2 2

13

11

Example of safety component connections based on ’Y’ branch

’Y’ branch with M12 connection and M12-connection device with screw connectors

Female Male

Female Female

MaleMale Female

Female

Male

Female Female

Male Female

Female Female Female

Male

Female Male Female Male

See the connection

See the connection

See the connectionexamples

See the connection ex-

See the connectionexamples

See product list for applications



Smile 11EA Tina Eden Focus ResetFMI

ResetFMI

FocusEdenEden Smile 11EA Tina Smile 11EA Tina

Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver

Tina 1A

M12-3M

Tina 10B

M12-3B

Tina 8A

Vital

2 3

1

22 33

11

2 3

1

22

11 33

M12-3M

Tina 10B

M12-3B

2 3

1

22 33

11

2 3

1

22

11 33

A

B

B

A

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

One Vital supervises the entire robot cell!

The cell has dynamic protection connected to

a Vital, with the following functions:

anyone putting their hand into a risk area, and an same risk area. This means that a stop is only or-dered if a robot and a person are in the same area.When the station is clear, the person presses thereset button connected to the light curtain.

If the door is opened, the robot stops. To resetthe robot system, the door must be closed and asupervisory reset button operated.

If any of the emergency stop buttons is pressed,the robot performs an immediate emergency stop.

Connection example for the protection solution above

DoorDynamic safety circuit in accordance with

category 4 EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1

Door/



Pluto Vital

Approvals:

Tina Duo 1/2

Remote sensor expansion unitwith reset capability for Vital/Pluto

connected. It also permits resetting of the new sensors. The Tina Duo

possible to select local resetting with indication, or automatic resetting. The system can have 'an infinite' number of sensors connected to onemain Vital unit.

Features:

Safety unit for:

-

ing the number of sensors automatic or manual localreset.

Integral push button.

of sensors.

Information output.

Reset

supervisedoor



Tina Duo 2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data Tina Duo 1/2Manufacturer

Ordering data: button) integral reset button)

Safety category with Vital 1 orPluto in accordance with

EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1 Colour:

and end covers

Weight:

Power supply:

Consumption:

Response time:

Connectors:

LED's:

Jumpers behind

bottom cover:

Dimensions:

Connection diagram

White

White

White

White

Man./

White



Tina Duo with two separate local automatic reset circuits

Tina Duo 2 and Tina 4A with manual local reset



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Tina Duo with three circuits each with separate manual reset and with orwithout external power supply

HH3300F Vital 1 with Tina 8B Profibus and different types of safety devices



3:24

HH3300F Vital 1 with Tina 8B Profibus and different types of safety devices ____________ 3:23

HA3300A Connection example Vital 1 ____________________________________________ 3:25

HA3301A Vital 1 with several Eden ______________________________________________ 3:25

HA3302A Vital 1 and Tina 4A with 4 Eden ________________________________________ 3:26

HA3302B Vital 1 and 2 Tina 4A and 4 Eden and emergency stop _____________________ 3:26

HA3303A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 2A_____________________________________ 3:27

HA3304A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 3A ____________________________________ 3:27

HA3305A Vital 1 with Eden and lightgrid Focus/Tina 10C ____________________________ 3:28

HA3306C Vital 1 with 2 lightbeams Spot _________________________________________ 3:28

HA3306D Vital 1 with 3 lightbeams Spot __________________________________________ 3:29

HA3307A Vital 1 with Eden, lightgrid/Tina 3A and emergency stop/Tina 7A _____________ 3:29

HD3800A Vital 1 with safety light beam Spot ______________________________________ 3:30

HD3801A Vital 1, series and parallel _____________________________________________ 3:30

HE3811A Safety light beam Spot with time-limited reset _____________________________ 3:31

HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0,2–40 s. ____________________________ 3:31

HE3824D Eden and bypassed lightbeam with Eden ________________________________ 3:32

HE3824E Lightbeams with time-limited bypass 0,2–40 s. ____________________________ 3:32

HE3824F Eden and 2 bypass lightbeams with Eden ________________________________ 3:33

HE3824G Eden and 2 separetely bypassed lightbeams _____________________________ 3:33

HH3300A Vital 1 with different types of safety devices and M12–3A __________________ 3:34

HH3300D Vital 1 with Tina 4A and different types of safety devices ___________________ 3:34

HH3302D Vital 1 with Tina 8A and different types of safety devices ___________________ 3:35

HH3301E Connection example Vital 1 ____________________________________________3:35

HH3400A2 Vital 1 Solutions ____________________________________________________ 3:36

HB0005A Vital with Eden and Smile emergency stop, with separate reset ______________ 3:36

HB0006A Vital with 4 Eden units + Reset via M12-3E and Tina 4A ____________________ 3:37

HB0007A Vital with two Dalton units via Tina 12A __________________________________ 3:37

HB0001A Pluto with Smile emergency stop unit + Reset via M12-3E and Adam via Tina 4A _ 3:38

HB0002A Pluto with five Eden units, for two zones via M12-3E and Tina 4A ____________ 3:38

HB0003A Pluto with five Smile emergency stop units, via Tina 11A and Tina 4A _________ 3:39

HB0004A Pluto with different zones for Eden + Reset and two Eden units +via M12-3E _____ 3:39

Contents Page



3:25

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HA3300A Connection example Vital 1

It is the user's responsibilty to ensure that all control devices are correctly installed, cared for and operated to meat European, nationel and local codes/regulations. Subject to change without notice.

HA3301A Vital 1 with several Eden




3:26

HA3302A Vital 1 and Tina 4A with 4 Eden


HA3302B Vital 1 and 2 Tina 4A and 4 Eden and emergency stop




3:27

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HA3303A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 2A


HA3304A Vital 1 with emergency stop/Tina 3A




3:28

HA3305A Vital 1 with Eden and lightgrid Focus/Tina 10C


HA3306C Vital 1 with 2 lightbeams Spot




3:29

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HA3306D Vital 1 with 3 lightbeams Spot


HA3307A Vital 1 with Eden, lightgrid/Tina 3A and emergency stop/Tina 7A




3:30

HD3800A Vital 1 with safety light beam Spot


HD3801A Vital 1, series and parallel




3:31

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HE3811A Safety light beam Spot with time-limited reset


HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0,2–40 s.






3:33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HE3824F Eden and 2 bypass lightbeams with Eden


HE3824G Eden and 2 separetely bypassed lightbeams




3:34

HH3300A Vital 1 with different types of safety devices and M12–3A


HH3300D Vital 1 with Tina 4A and different types of safety devices


aa b c b

Dominate



3:35

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HH3302D Vital 1 with Tina 8A and different types of safety devices


HH3301E Connection example Vital 1




3:36

HH3400A2 Vital 1 Solutions


HB0005A Vital with Eden and Smile emergency stop, with separate reset




3:37

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HB0006A Vital with 4 Eden units + Reset via M12-3E and Tina 4A


HB0007A Vital with two Dalton units via Tina 12A




3:38

HB0001A Pluto with Smile emergency stop unit + Reset via M12-3E and Adam via Tina 4A


HB0002A Pluto with five Eden units, for two zones via M12-3E and Tina 4A




3:39

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HB0003A Pluto with five Smile emergency stop units, via Tina 11A and Tina 4A


HB0004A Pluto with different zones for Eden + Reset and two Eden units +via M12-3E




Safety Relays



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Contents Page

While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information materialJOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the usersresponsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national and

international codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by variousinternational approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustratethe various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples ina particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the productbased on the examples given. 2008 v02.

Why should you use Safety relays? _____________________________________4:2

The smallest and most flexible Safety relays on the market _______________4:3

Safety relay summary ________________________________________________4:4

Safety relay - RT - series• RT6 _________________________________________________________________________ 4:6 • RT7 ________________________________________________________________________ 4:10 • RT9 ________________________________________________________________________ 4:14• JSBRT11 ___________________________________________________________________ 4:18

Safety relay - JSB - series• JSBR4 _____________________________________________________________________ 4:20 • JSBT4 ______________________________________________________________________ 4:22

• BT50(T) ____________________________________________________________________ 4:24• BT51(T) ____________________________________________________________________ 4:26 • RT10 _______________________________________________________________________ 4:28 • JSBT5(T) ___________________________________________________________________ 4:30

Safety timers • JSHT1A/B __________________________________________________________________ 4:32• JSHT2A/B/C ________________________________________________________________ 4:34

Expansion relays

• E1T ________________________________________________________________________ 4:36 • JSR1T ______________________________________________________________________ 4:38 • JSR2A ______________________________________________________________________ 4:40 • JSR3T ______________________________________________________________________ 4:42

Connection examples ______________________________________________ 4:44



– to meet existing safety standards!

”A fault in the control circuit logic, or failure of or damageto the control circuit must not lead to dangerous situations”.

This is the requirement in the EU´s Machinery Directive98/37/EC under the heading 1.2.7. “ Failure of the control

circuit ”. The directive implies that no person should be putat risk if for example, a relay sticks or if a transistor or twoelectrical conductors short-circuit.

A safety relay will fulfill these requirements. A safety relay

Three posi-tion devices

Safetyinterlockswitches

Two-handdevices

Emergencystop

Safety strips& Bumpers

Safety matsLight curtains/Light grids

Light beams

– to supervise safety devices!

– for safe stops and reliable restarts!

Dual stop signals when thegate is opened.Entering or putting a hand orlimb into a hazardous areamust cause all machinery thatcan cause personal injuryto stop safely. Many seri-ous accidents occur whenmachinery is believed tohave stopped but is in factonly pausing in its programsequence. The safety relaymonitors the gate interlockswitch and cables and givesdual stop signals.

Supervised reset whenthere can be a personwithin the risk area.To make sure that nobodyis within the restricted areawhen activating the resetbutton. A supervised resetbutton must be pressed andreleased before a reset canoccur. Many serious acci-dents have been caused byan unintentional and unsu-pervised reset.

Timed reset when youcannot see the entire riskarea.Sometimes a double resetfunction is necessary tomake sure that no one is leftbehind in the risk area. First,after ensuring no other per-son is inside the hazardousarea, the pre-reset buttonmust be activated, followedby the reset button outsidethe risk area within an ac-ceptable time period e.g 10seconds. A safety timer anda safety relay can providethis function.

Automatic reset for smallhatches.Where body entry is notpossible through a hatch,the safety circuit can beautomatically reset.

The safety relays are resetimmediately when the hatchinterlock switch contacts areclosed.

Why should you use safety relays?

has, for example, inputs that are checked for short-circuits anddual redundant circuits that are checked at each operation.

This can be compared to the dual brake circuits in a car. Ifone of the circuits is faulty the other will stop the car. In asafety relay there is an additional function which only allowsa machine to start if both circuits are ok.

The standard for safety related parts of the control sys-tem describes various safety categories depending on thelevel of risk and application. One single universal relay withselectable safety categories solves this.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

The most flexible safety relayson the market!We have the most flexible safety relays on the market. Ourfirst universal relay was developed in 1988.Nowadays, the flexibility is even greater and size has beenreduced by 85 %.

A universal relay is a safety relay with various input optionsfor various safety devices and risk levels.

Internally, the safety relay is of the highest safety level(category 4 according to EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1).A machine supplier can therefore, with one single safety relay,select the input configuration that best suits their custom-ers' safety requirements. In addition, our safety relays havedetachable connector blocks for ease of replacement andtesting. As our universal relays incorporate all input options,

they are compatible with all our previous safety relays as wellas with other manufacturers' products.

Is a universal relay expensive? No, our latest patentedconstruction is extremely simple and the number of majorcomponents is less compared to our previous universalrelays. This means that the safety relays are even more reli-able than before.

We also have a great deal of experience from safetysolutions in our own system developments. It would be ourpleasure to share these experiences with you! Please seethe complete safety solutions in the section “Connectionexamples”. Please do not hesitate to contact us if you shouldrequire any other safety solutions.

Safety outputs for immediate and de-layed stops at optional times.

Inputs for various safety devices. Input for manual orautomatic resetting.

Detachable connector blocks.

Outputs for program stop, gate openedor closed and reset indication.

Some of the advantages with JOKAB SAFETY’s safety relays:

• Small and compact• Detachable connector blocks

• Low power consumption• Permits the use of longemergency stop cables

• EX compatibility

• Functions set by externalhardwired links

• LED indication for inputs andoutputs• Powerful switching capacity

• Universal relays• Excellent reliability

• Approved in Europe,USA, Canada• Supervised reset• Time reset

RT7: the mostflexible safetyrelay on themarket!

Scale 1:1



R T 6

R T 7

R T 9

J S B R T 1 1

J S B R 4

J S B T 4

J S B T 5 T ,

B T 5 0 T ,

B T 5 1 T

J S B T 5 ,

B T 5 0 ,

B T 5 1

R T 1 0

J S H T 1 A / B

J S H T 2 A / B / C

E 1 T

J S R 1 T

J S R 2 A

J S R 3 T

l l l l l l l l

l l l l

l l l l

l l l l l l

l l l l l l

l

l l l l l l l l

l l l l l l l

l l l l l l l

l l l l l l

l

l l

l

l l l l l l l l l l

l l l l l

summary

- Which safety relay should you choose?

First of all, we would recommend the selection of one ofour latest universal relays in the RT-series. These are bothpractical and cost effective.

SAFETY RELAYS

To facilitate the choice of safety relay or combinations ofsafety relays, please see:– the table below dividing the safety relays into

application fields– the table on the opposite page showing possible input

and output options– the relevant data sheet giving comprehensive

information about each specific safety relay

– the circuit diagram for various applications in thesection “Connection examples”.

Note: All earlier types of relays that can now be replacedby those in this manual are still kept as stock items and

can be supplied upon request.

Input alternatives (see also technical data on the next page)

Single-channel, 1 NO from +24 V

Safety category 1.

The input must be closed before theoutputs can be activated. A stop signalis given when the input is opened.

Two-channel, 2 NO from +24 V

Safety category 3

Both the inputs must be closed before theoutputs can be activated. A stop signalis given if one or both of the inputs areopened. Both the inputs must be opened

and reclosed before the outputs can bereactivated. A short-circuit between theinputs is not monitored by the safety re-lay. Category 4 can only be achieved if asafety device with short circuit monitoredoutputs is connected.

Two-channel, 1 NO & 1 NC from +24V

Safety category 4

One input must be closed and one mustbe opened before the outputs can beactivated. A stop signal is given if one orboth of the inputs change position or if

the inputs short-circuit. Both inputs mustbe put into their initial position before theoutputs can be reactivated.

Two-channel, 1 NO from 0 V &

1 NO from +24 V. Safety category 4

Both the inputs must be closed before theoutputs can be activated. A stop signalis given if one or both of the inputs areopened. Both the inputs must be opened

and reclosed before the outputs can bereactivated. A Stop signal is given if thereis a short-circuit between the inputs.

Application fields

Safety relaysSafety-

timersExpansion relays

Interlocking switch/Gate/Hatch

Light curtains

Light beams

Safety mats

Contact strips

Two-hand control device

Emergency stop

Hold to run/enabling device

Foot control device

Area supervision

Time resetting

Time bypassing

Inching

Output expansion

Delayed output



R T 6

R T 7

R T 9

J S B R

T 1 1

J S B R

4

J S B T 4

J S B T 5 T

B T 5 0 T

B T 5 1 T

B T 5 0

( J S B T 5 )

B T 5 1

R T 1 0

J S H T

1 A / B

J S H T

2 A / B / C

E 1 T

J S R 1

T

J S R 2

A

J S R 3

T

1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4 4 4 1–4° 1–4° 1–4° 1–4° 1–4° 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4 1–4

l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

l l l l

l l l l

l l l l l l l l l l l l

l l l l l l

l l l l l l

l l l l l l l l l l l

l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

3 2 2 7 3 3 3 4 2 4* 4* 4

2 3† 3 4 4* 4* 2¤

2¤ 2¤

1 1 2 1 1 1 1* 1

1† 1 1*

2 3 1 1 1 1

4 3 2 9 4 4 4 4‡ 4‡ 4 4 4 5

2¤ 2¤ 2¤

2‡

5

45 45 22,5 100 45 45 22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5 22,5 45 45 22,5 45 45 22,5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Monitored manual reset

Safety category 4.A monitored reset means that the safetyrelay will not be reset if the reset but-ton gets jammed when pressed in or ifthe input short-circuits. In order for the

resetting to be complete, the input mustbe closed and opened before the outputscan close.

Automatic/unmonitored manual

resetAutomatic reset means that the outputsare closed immediately when both theinput conditions are satisfied and thetest input is closed.

Testing of contactors, relays &valves

Can be carried out with both auto-matic and manual reset.

Contact strips/Safety mats

Safety category 1.For an unpressurised mat/strip, boththe relay inputs must be closed for theoutputs to be activated. In the case of anactivated mat/strip and short-circuit input

channels, the relay will be de-energized.Current limitation prevents the safetyrelay from being overloaded when thechannels short-circuit.

T9T114

Technical data

Safety relaysSafety-

timersExpansion relays

Safety category

Safety input

Single-channel, 1 NO from +24 V

Two-channel, 2 NO from +24 V

Two-channel, 1 NO & 1 NC from +24 V

Two-channel, 1 NO from 0 V & 1 NO from + 24 V

Contact strips/Safety mats

Reset & test input

Monitored manual

Automatic/Unmonitored manual

Testing of contactors, relays, valves, etc.

Output

NO

NO delayed

NO impulse outputs

NC

NC delayed

Info. output

Switching capacity (resistive load)

6A/250VAC/1500VA/150W

4A/250VAC/1000VA/100W

6A/250VAC/1380VA/138W

10A/250VAC/1840VA/192W

Width (mm)

* Indicates the possibility of selecting delayed outputs ¤ Indicates one relay contact per output (other relays having two contacts per output)‡ delayed ° Category 4 depending on connection (When used as expansion relay with Pluto Safety PLC, then Category 4) † fixed 0.5 s delay



RT6Safety relay

Would you like a single safety relay for all your safety

applications?

Then choose the RT6 universal relay to supervise both yoursafety devices and the internal safety of your machinery. Inaddition you can select the safety level required for eachinstallation. All this is possible because the RT6 has the mostversatile input option arrangement available on the market.Many other relays can therefore be replaced by the RT6.

The relay also comes with other options such as manualor automatic reset. Manual supervised reset can be usedfor gates and other safety devices that can be bypassed.Automatic reset can be used for small hatches, if deemedacceptable from risk assessment.

The RT6 also has information outputs that follow the in-puts and outputs of the relay. These outputs will for exampleindicate if a gate is open or closed and if the safety relayneeds to be reset.

The RT6 is designed with a minimum amount of compo-nents thus keeping both production costs and componentacquisitions to a minimum.

Choose the RT6 to simplify your safety circuits and reduceyour costs.

Approvals:

Safety relay for:

Emergency stops

Light curtains

Three position devices

Interlocked gates/hatches

Magnetic switches

Light beams

Safety mats

Contact strips

Foot operated switches

Features:

Five input options

Single or dual channel input

Manual supervised or auto-matic reset

Test input for supervision ofexternal contactors

Width 45 mm

LED indication of supply,inputs, outputs, short-circuitand low voltage level.

3 NO / 1 NC relay outputs

Two voltage free transistor

information outputsSupply 24 VDC, 24, 48,115 or 230 VAC

Quick release connectorblocks



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Inputs

The RT6 can be configured to operate with any of the followinginput options:1. Single channel, 1 NO contact from +24 V DC, safety cat. 1.2. Dual channel, 2 NO contacts from +24 V DC, safety cat. 3.3. Dual channel 1 NO, 1 NC contact from +24 V DC, safety cat. 44. Dual channel, 1 NO contact from 0V and 1 NO contact from

+24 V DC, safety cat. 4.

5. Safety mats/contact strips 1 ‘contact’ from 0V and 1 ‘contact’from +24 V DC, safety cat. 1.

When the input/inputs are activated and the test/supervised resetis complete, relays 1 and 2 are energized. Simultaneous activationis not required where there are dual channels. The two relays arede-energized when the input/inputs are de-activated in accordancewith the input option chosen or in case of a power failure. Relays1 and 2 must both be de-energized before the outputs can beactivated again

Transistor output status information

The RT6 has two voltage free transistor outputs that can be con-nected to a PLC, computer or other monitoring device. These

outputs give the input and output status of the relay.

Reset and testing

The RT6 has two reset options; manual and automatic. The manualsupervised reset is used when the RT6 is monitoring safety devicesthat can be bypassed, i.e. to ensure that the outputs of the safetyrelay do not close just because a gate is closed. The automaticreset should only be used if deemed an acceptable risk.

In addition, the RT6 can also test (supervise) whether, for ex-ample, contactors and valves etc are de-energized/de-activatedbefore a restart is allowed.

Indication of low voltage

The ‘On’ LED will flash if the relay supply voltage falls below an

acceptable level. This indication will also be given if a monitoredsafety mat/contact strip is actuated. See connection option 5.

Safety level

The RT6 has internal dual and supervised safety functions. A short-circuit, internal faulty component or external interference will notpresent a risk to options with the highest safety level. A manualreset requires that the reset input is closed and opened before thesafety relay outputs are activated. A short-circuit or a faulty resetbutton is consequently supervised.

When the RT6 is configured for dual channel input, both theinputs are supervised for correct sequence operation before theunit can be reset.

The input options 3 and 4 have the highest safety levels as allshort-circuits and power failures are supervised. This in combinationwith internal current limitation makes the relay ideal for supervisionof safety mats and contact strips.

Regulations and standards

The RT6 is designed and approved in accordance with appropri-ate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1and EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examplesFor examples of how our safety relays can solve various safetyproblems, see the section “Connection examples”.

Technical information - RT6

Connection of supply - RT6

The RT6 DC option should be suppliedwith +24 V on A1 and 0 V on A2.

The RT6 AC option should be suppliedwith the approprate supply voltage viaconnections A1 and A2.

The S23/ must be connected toprotective earth.

NOTEWith both DC and AC modules, if cable shielding is usedthis must be connected to an earth rail or an equivalentearth point.

**Only for AC supply

DC-supply of AC-units

All AC-units can also be supplied by+24 VDC to S53 (0VDC to S23).

DC supply AC supply



The input (contact to S14) must be closedbefore the outputs can be activated. Whenthe input contact is opened the relay safetyoutput contacts open.

*

Connection of safety devices - RT6

Both input contacts (S14 and S34) mustbe closed before the relay outputs can beactivated. The safety relay contacts willopen if one or both of the input contactsare opened. Both the input contacts mustbe opened and reclosed before the relaycan be reset. A short-circuit between inputs

S14 and S34 can only be supervised if thedevice connected to the inputs has short-circuit supervised outputs, e.g. JOKABFocus light curtains.

can be activated. The safety relay contactswill open if one or both of the inputs

change state or in case of a short-circuitbetween S14 and S44. Both inputs mustreturn to their initial positions before therelay outputs can be reactivated.

Reset connections - RT6

The manual supervised reset contact con-nected to input X1 must be closed andopened in order to activate the relay out-puts.

Automatic reset is selected when S53,X1 and X4 are linked. The relay outputsare then activated at the same time asthe inputs.

*connected to S13 for safety mat/contact strip

Contactors, relays and valves can besupervised by connecting ‘test’ contactsbetween S53 and X1. Both manual super-vised and automatic reset can be used.

Testing external contactor status

Output connections - RT6

The RT6 has three (3 NO) safety outputsand 1 NC information output.

In order to protect the output contactsit is recommended that loads (inductive)are suppressed by fitting correctly chosenVDR’s, diodes etc.

Diodes are the best arc suppressors,but will increase the switch off time ofthe load.

The RT6 has two(2) voltage free transistoroutputs for information.

The transistor outputs are supplied withvoltage to Y13, either from S53 (+24V)or an external 5-30 VDC supply. Y14 andY24 follow the relay inputs and outputsas follows:

• Y14 becomes conductive when the relayinput conditions are fulfilled.• Y24 becomes conductive when both the

output relays are activated.

***NOTE

These outputs are only for information purposes and must not be connected tothe safety circuits of the machinery.

One input contact must be closed (S14) andone opened (S44) before the relay outputs

1. SINGLE CHANNEL, 1 NO from +24V

2. DUAL CHANNEL, 2 NO from +24V

3. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO, 1 NC from

+24V

4. DUAL CHANNEL, 1 NO from +24V,

1 NO to 0V

Relay functions as for option 2, but a short-circuit, in this case between inputs S14

and S24, is supervised (safety outputsare opened).

Both ‘contact’ inputs from a inactivatedsafety mat/contact strip must be made inorder to allow the RT6 relay outputs to beactivated. When the safety mat/contact

strip is activated or a short-circuit is detectedacross S14-S23, the relay will de-energize(safety outputs open) and the ‘ON’ LEDwill flash. As output S13 has an internalcurrent limit of 70 mA, the RT6 will not beoverloaded when the mat/contact strip isactivated or a short-circuit is detected.

5. Safety mat/Contact strip

Manual supervised reset Automatic reset

Relay outputs Transistor outputs



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data - RT6

Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Article number/Ordering

data

10-026-00 RT6 24DC10-026-02 RT6 24AC10-026-03 RT6 48AC10-026-04 RT6 115AC10-026-05 RT6 230AC

Colour black and beige

Weight 335 g (24 VDC), 485 g

(24-230 VAC)

Supply

Voltage (A1-A2) 24 VDC +15/-20%,24/48/115/230 VAC,+15/-10%, 50-60 Hz

Power consumption

DC supply, nominal voltageAC supply, nominal voltage

<2.4 W5.3 VA

Connection S13

Short-circuit protected voltage output, 70 mA +/- 10% currentlimitation. Is used for the inputs S14, S34 and S44.

Connection S53

Short-circuit protected voltage output, internal automatic fuse 270 mA.

Is used for the reset and autoreset inputs X1 and X4

Connection S23

0V connection for input S24

Safety inputs

S14 (+) inputS24 (0V) inputS34 (+) inputS44 (+) input

20 mA20 mA20 mA30 mA

Reset input X1

Supply for reset inputReset currentMinimum contactclosure time for reset

+24 VDC300 mA current pulse at contactclosure, then 30 mA100 ms

Maximum external connection

cable resistance at nominal

voltage for

S14, S24, S34S44, X1

300 Ohm150 Ohm

Response time

At Power on DC/ACWhen activating (input-output)When deactivating (input-output)At Power Loss

<90ms/<220ms<20 ms<20 ms<150 ms

Relay outputs

NONCMaximum switching capacity res.load ACMaximum switching capacity res.load DCMaximum switching capacityres. loadMinimum load

Contact materialMechanical life

31

6A/250 VAC/1500 VA

6A/24 VDC/150 W

12A distributed on all contacts10mA/10 V (if load on contacthas not exceeded 100 mA)Ag+Au flash>107 operations

Transistor outputs

External supply to Y13Y14

Y24

Maximum load of Y14, Y24Maximum voltage drop atmaximum load

Short-circuit proof+5 to +30 VDCIndicates that the input condi-tions have been fulfilledIndicates that the output relaysare activated15 mA /output

2.4 V

LED indication

On

In1 In2

1 2

Supply voltage OK, the LED is onFlashing light in case of under-voltage or overloadIndicates that the input conditionsare fulfilled.Indicates that the output relaysare activated.

Mounting

RailOperating temperature range

35 mm DIN rail-10° C to + 55° C

Connection block (detachable)

Maximum screw torqueMaximum connection area Solid conductors

Conductor with socket contactAir and creep distance

1 Nm

1x4mm2 /2x1.5mm2/12AWG

1x2.5mm2

/2x1mm2

4kV/2 IEC 60664-1

Protection class

EnclosureConnection block

IP 40 IEC 60529IP 20 IEC 60529




RT7Safety relay

Universal relay with delayed outputs

The RT7 is a universal relay that can be used to supervise bothsafety devices and the internal safety of your machinery. In ad-dition, you can select the safety level that is required for eachinstallation. All this is possible because the RT7 has the mostversatile input options arrangement available on the market. TheRT7 can therefore replace many other relays.

The RT7 has four (4 NO) dual safety outputs of which twomay be delayed for up to three seconds in order to achieve asafe and ‘soft’ stop. A ‘soft’ stop allows machinery to brakeand stop gently before power is removed. A ‘soft’ stop has

many benefits: the machinery life will be prolonged, processedproducts will not be damaged, and restarts from the stoppedposition are made possible and easier.

Another option with the RT7 is manual or automatic reset-ting. A manual supervised reset is used for gates and othersafety devices that can be bypassed, while an automatic resetis used for small safety hatches if deemed appropriate from arisk point of view.

In addition, the RT7 has information outputs that follow theinputs and outputs of the relay. These outputs indicate if forexample a gate is opened or closed, if there is a delay or if therelay needs to be reset.


Approvals:

Safety relay for:

Emergency stops

Light curtains



Magnetic switches

Light beams

Safety mats

Contact strips


Features:

4 NO/1 NC relay outputs, 2NO outputs can be delayedfor soft stops

Delay times RT7A 0; 0,5;

1,0; 1,5 s RT7B 0; 1,0; 2,0;3,0 s

Five input options


Manual supervised or auto-matic reset

Test input for supervision ofexternal contactors

Width 45 mm

LED indication of supply,inputs, outputs, short-circuitand low voltage level

Three voltage free transistorinformation outputs

Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48,115 or 230 VAC

Quick release connector

blocks



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical information - RT7 A/B

Inputs

The RT7 can be configured to operate in either of the followinginput options:1. Single channel, 1 NO contact from +24 VDC, safety cat. 1.2. Dual channel, 2 NO contacts from +24 VDC, safety cat. 3.3. Dual channel, 1 NO, 1 NC contact from +24 VDC, safety cat. 4.4. Dual channel, 1 NO contact from 0V and 1 NO contact from

+24 VDC, safety cat. 4.5. Safety mats/contact strips, 1 ‘contact’ from 0V and 1 ‘contact’ from

+24 VDC, safety cat. 1.

When the input/inputs are activated and the test/supervised resetis complete, relays 1,2,3 and 4 are activated. Relays 1 and 2 areimmediately de-energized when the inputs are deactivated in ac-cordance with the input option selected. Relays 3 and 4 are eitherde-energized immediately or after the selected time delay.All the relays (1,2,3 and 4) must be de-energized before the RT7can be reset.

Transistor output status information

The RT7 has three(3) voltage free transistor outputs that can beconnected to a PLC, computer or other monitoring device. Theseoutputs give the input and output status of the relay.

Reset and testing

The RT7 has two reset options; manual and automatic.The manual supervised reset is utilised when the RT7 is used

to monitor safety devices that can be bypassed, i.e. to ensure thatthe outputs of the safety relay do not close just because the gateis closed.

The automatic reset should only be used if acceptable from arisk point of view. The RT7 can also test (supervise), if for example,contactors and valves etc are de-energized/de-activated before arestart is allowed.


The ‘On’ LED will flash if the relay voltage falls below an accept-able level. This indication will also be given if a monitored safetymat/contact strip is actuated. See connection option 5.

Safety level

The RT7 has internal dual and supervised safety functions. Powerfailure, an internal faulty component or external interference will notpresent a risk to options with the highest safety level. A manualreset requires that the reset input is closed and opened before thesafety relay outputs are activated. A short-circuit or a faulty resetbutton is consequently supervised.

When the RT7 is configured for dual channel input, both theinputs are supervised for correct sequence operation before the

unit can be reset. The input options 3 and 4 have the highest safetylevels as all short-circuits and power failures are supervised. Thisin combination with internal current limitation makes the relay idealfor supervision of safety mats and contact strips.


The RT7 is designed and approved in accordance with appropri-ate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

**Only for AC supply

The RT7 DC option should be suppliedwith +24 V on A1 and 0 V on A2.

The RT7 AC option should be suppliedwith the appropriate supply voltage viaconnections A1 and A2.

The S23/ must be connected toprotective earth

NOTE

With both DC and AC modules, if cable shielding is used

this must be connected to an earth rail or an equivalentearth point.

Connection examples

DC-supply of AC-units

All AC-units can also be supplied by+24 VDC to S53 (0VDC to S23).

DC supply AC supply



*

1. SINGLE CHANNEL, 1 NO from

+24V

The input (contact to S14) must be closedbefore the outputs can be activated. Whenthe input contact is opened the relay safetyoutput contacts open.


Both input contacts (S14 and S34) mustbe closed before the relay outputs can beactivated. The safety relay contacts will open ifone or both of the input contacts are opened.Both the input contacts must be openedbefore the relay can be reset. A short-circuitbetween the inputs S14 and S34 can only

be supervised if the device connected to theinputs has short-circuit supervised outputs,e.g. JOKAB Focus light curtains.


+24V

One input contact must be closed (S14) andone opened (S44) before the relay outputscan be activated. The safety relay contactswill open if one or both of the inputs changestate or in the case of a short-circuit betweenS14 and S44. Both inputs must be returnedto their initial positions before the relay out-puts can be reactivated.


1 NO from 0V

Relay functions as option 2, but a short-circuit,

in this case between inputs S14 andS24, is supervised (safety outputs areopened).


Both ‘contact’ inputs from an inactivatedsafety mat/contact strip, must be made inorder to allow the RT7 relay outputs to beactivated. When the safety mat/contact stripis activated or a short-circuit is detectedacross S14-S23, the relay will de-energize(safety outputs open) and the ‘ON’ LED willflash. As output S13 has an internal currentlimit of 70 mA, the RT7 will not be overloadedwhen the mat/contact strip is activated or ashort circuit is detected.

Manual supervised reset

Time delays are selected by linking theappropriate T0, T1 and T2 connections.

When a stop signal is detected a programstop command is first given to the PLC/servowhich brakes the dangerous machine opera-tions in a ‘soft’ and controlled way.

The delayed relay safety outputs will thenturn off the power to the motors, i.e. whenthe machinery has already stopped. It takesusually around 0.5 to 3 seconds for a danger-ous action to be stopped softly.

The manual supervised reset contact con-nected to input X1 must be closed andopened in order to activate the relay out-puts.

Automatic reset

*connected to S13 for safety mat/contactstrip

The RT7 has four (4 NO) safety outputsof which two can be delayed, and 1 NCinformation output.

In order to protect the RT7 output contactsit is recommended that loads (inductive)are suppressed by fitting correctly chosenVDR’s, diodes etc. Diodes are the best arcsuppressors, but will increase the switch offtime of the load.Transistor outputs

The RT7 has three(3) voltage free transistor

information outputs.

The transistor outputs are supplied withvoltage to Y13 either from S53 (+24V) orexternally from 5 to 30 VDC. Y14, Y24and Y34 follow the inputs and outputs asfollows:• Y14 becomes conductive when the re-

lay input conditions are fulfilled.• Y24 becomes conductive when both

the output relays are activated.• Y34 becomes conductive when both

the delay output relays are activated.

***NOTE

These outputs are only for information purposes and must not be connected to the safety circuits of the machinery.

Connection of safety devices - RT7 A/B

Reset connections - RT7 A/B

Automatic reset is selected when S53, X1and X4 are linked. The relay outputs are thenactivated at the same time as the inputs.


Contactors, relays and valves can besupervised by connecting ‘test’ contactsbetween S53 and X1. Both manual supervisedand automatic reset can be used.

Output connections - RT7 A/B

Relay outputs Time delay outputs



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – RT7 A/B


Article number/Ordering data

RT7B

RT7A

10-028-10 24DC 3 s10-028-12 24AC 3 s10-028-13 48AC 3 s10-028-14 115AC 3 s10-028-15 230AC 3 s10-028-20 24DC 1,5 s10-028-22 24AC 1,5 s

10-028-23 48AC 1,5 s10-028-24 115AC 1,5 s10-028-25 230AC 1,5 s

Colour Black and beige

Weight 405 g (24 VDC) 550 g ( 24-230 VAC)

Supply

Voltage (A1-A2) 24 VDC +15/-20%,24/48/115/230 VAC,+/-15%, 50-60 Hz

Power consumption

DC supply, nominal voltageAC supply, nominal voltage

4.6 W8.7 W

Connection S13

Short-circuit protected voltage output,70 mA +/-10% current limitation.Is used for the inputs S14, S34 and S44.

Connection S53

Short-circuit protected voltage output,internal automatic fuse, max 270 mA.Is used for the reset and autoreset inputs X1 and X4.

Connection S23

0V connection for input S24.

Safety inputs

S14 (+) input

S24 (0V) inputS34 (+) inputS44 (+) input

20mA

20 mA20 mA25 mA

Reset input X1

Supply for reset inputReset currentMinimum contactclosure time for reset

+24 VDC600 mA current pulse at contactclosure, then 30 mA.100ms

Maximum external connec-

tion cable resistance at

nominal voltage for

S14, S24, S34S44, X1

300 Ohm150 Ohm

Response time

At Power on DC/ACWhen activating (input-output)When deactivating (input-output)At Power loss

<90/<140 ms<20 ms<20 ms<80 ms

Delay time options

RT7ART7B

0; 0.5; 1.0; 1.5 secs0; 1.0; 2.0; 3.0 secs

Relay outputs

NO direct (relays 1/2)NO direct or delayed (relays 3/4)NC (relays 1/2)Maximum switching capacityres. loadRelays 1/2 AC

DCRelays 1/2 total

Relays 3/4 AC

DCRelays 3/4 total

Minimum load (Relays 1/2/3/4)


221

6A/250 VAC/1500 VA6A/24 VDC/150 W9A distributed on all contacts

6A/250 VAC/1380 VA

6A/24 VDC/138 W6A distributed on all contacts

10 mA/10V (if load on contacthas not exceeded 100 mA)AgSnO

2+ Au flash

>107 operations

Transistor outputs

External supply to Y13Y14

Y24

Y34

Maximum load of Y14,Y24, Y34Maximum voltage drop atmaximum load

+5 to +30 VDCIndicates that the input condi-tions are fulfilledIndicates that the output relays1/2 are activatedIndicates that the delay output

relays 3/4 are activated15 mA /output

2.4 V

LED indication

On

In1 In2

1 2

t

Supply voltage OK, the LED is on.Flashing light in case of under-voltage or overload.Indicates that the input conditionsare fulfilled.Indicates that the output relays1/2 are activated.Indicates that the delay outputrelays 3/4 are activated.

Mounting


24VDC 24-230VAC

35 mm DIN rail

-10° C to + 55° C-10° C to + 45° C

Connection blocks

(detachable)

Maximum screw torqueMaximum connection area Solid conductors Conductor with socket contactAir and creep distance

1 Nm

1x4mm2 /2x1.5mm2 /12AWG1x2.5mm2 /2x1mm2

4kV/2 IEC 60664-1

Protection class

EnclosureConnection block

IP 40 IEC 60529IP 20 IEC 60529




RT9 Approvals:

Safety relay for:

Emergency stops

Light curtains



Magnetic switches

Light beams

Safety mats

Contact strips


Features:

Would you like a small safety relay for all your safety

applications?

Then choose the compact RT9 universal relay to supervise bothyour safety devices and the internal safety of your machinery.In addition, you can select the safety level that is required foreach installation. All this is possible due to the RT9 offeringthe most versatile input option arrangement available on themarket. The RT9 can therefore replace many other relays.

Other RT9 options include selection of either manualsupervised or automatic resetting. The manual supervisedreset can be used for gates and other safety devices that can

be bypassed. Automatic reset can be used for small safetyhatches, if deemed acceptable from risk assessment.

In addition, the RT9 has a double information output that willindicate e.g if a gate is open or if the relay needs resetting.

The RT9 uses the latest component technology andmodern assembly techniques to ensure a highly cost effectivesolution.


Five input options


Manual supervised or automatic

reset

Test input for supervision of

external contactors

Width 22.5 mm

LED indication of supply, inputs

and outputs, short-circuit and

low voltage level

2 NO relay outputs

One changeover relay with a

double information output

Supply 24 VDC

Quick release connector blocks

Safety relay



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical information - RT9

The RT9 can be configured to operate in either of the followinginput options:1. Single channel, 1 NO contact from +24VDC, safety cat. 1.2. Dual channel, 2 NO contacts from +24VDC, safety cat. 3.3. Dual channel, 1 NO, 1 NC contact from +24VDC, safety cat. 4.4. Dual channel, 1 NO contact from 0V and 1 NO contact from

+24VDC, safety cat. 4.5. Safety mat/contact strips, 1 ‘contact’ from 0V and 1 ‘contact’

+24VDC, safety cat. 1.

When the input/inputs are activated and the test/supervised resetis complete, relays 1 and 2 are energised. These are de-energisedwhen the input/inputs are de-activated in accordance with the inputoption chosen or in case of a power failure.Relays 1 and 2 must both be de-energized before the RT9 canbe reset.

Relay output status information

The RT9 has a changeover contact relay output that can be con-nected to a PLC, control lamp, computer or similar. The output givesinformation about the status of the relay.

Reset and testing

The RT9 has two reset options; manual and automatic. The manualsupervised reset can be used when the RT9 is monitoring safetydevices that can be bypassed, i.e. to ensure that the outputs ofthe safety relay do not close just because a gate is closed. Theautomatic reset option should only be used if appropriate from arisk point of view.Due to special internal circuits the RT9 can be automatically resetregardless of the operational voltage rise time, this being an importantfactor when large loads are started up on the same power suppliesat the same time.

In addition, the RT9 can also test (supervise), if for example,contactors and valves etc are de-energised/de-activated before

a restart is made.

Short circuit

protection

Automatic

fuse


The ‘On’ LED will flash if the relay supply voltage falls below anacceptable level. This indication will also be given if a monitoredsafety mat/contact strip is actuated. Please see Connectionoption 5.

Safety level

The RT9 has internal dual and supervised safety functions. Powerfailure, an internal faulty component or external interferencewill not present a risk to options with the highest safety level. Amanual reset requires that the reset input is closed and openedbefore the safety relay outputs are activated. A short-circuit ora faulty reset button is consequently supervised.

When the RT9 is configured for dual channel input, boththe inputs are supervised for correct operation before the unitcan be reset.

The input options 3 and 4 have the highest safety levelsas all short-circuits and power failures are supervised. This incombination with an internal current limitation makes the relayideal for supervision of safety mats and contact strips.


The RT9 is designed and approved in accordance with appropri-ate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples

For examples of how our safety relays can solve various safetyproblems, please see the section “Connection examples”.

Connection of supply - RT9

The RT9 should be supplied with +24 V on A1

and 0 V on A2.

NOTE

If cable shielding is used this must be connectedto an earth rail or an equivalent earth point.

Inputs

DC supply



Connection of safety devices - RT9

Automatic reset

Output connections - RT9

Relay outputs

The RT9 has two (2 NO) safety outputs.In order to protect the output contacts

it is recommended that loads (inductive)are suppressed by fitting correctly chosenVDR’s, diodes etc. Diodes are the best arcsuppressors, but will increase the switch off

time of the load.

Information outputs

The RT9 has a single changeover contactinformation relay output.The relay outputY14 is connected internally to 0V and 24Vin the following way:• Y14 is internally closed to 0V whenthe RT9 is not reset.

• Y14 is internally closed to +24V whenthe relay is reset.


Contactors, relays and valves can besupervised by connecting ‘test’ contactsbetween A1(+) and X1. Both manualsupervised and automatic reset can beused.

The input (contact to S14) must be closedbefore the outputs can be activated. Whenthe input contact is opened, the relay safetyoutput contacts open.

1. SINGLE CHANNEL, 1 NO from

+24V


Both input contacts (S14 and S34) mustbe closed before the relay outputs can beactivated. The safety relay contacts willopen if one or both of the input contactsare opened. Both the input contacts mustbe opened and reclosed before the relay

can be reset.A short-circuit between inputs S14 andS34 can only be supervised if the deviceconnected to the inputs has short-circuitsupervised outputs, e.g. JOKAB Focuslight curtains


+24V

One input contact must be closed (S14) andone opened (S44) before the relay outputs

can be activated.The safety relay contacts will open ifone or both of the inputs change state orin case of a short-circuit between S14 andS44. Both inputs must be returned to theirinitial status before the relay outputs can bereactivated.


1 NO from 0V

Relay functions as option 2, but a short-circuit, in this case between inputs S14and S24 is supervised (safety outputs areopened).


Both ‘contact’ inputs from a inactivatedsafety mat/contact strip must be made

in order to allow the RT9 relay outputsto be activated. When the safety mat/contact strip is activated or a short-circuitis detected across S14-S23, the relay willde-energize (safety contacts open) andthe ‘ON’ LED will flash. As output S13has an internal current limit of 70 mA, theRT9 will not be overloaded when the mat/contact strip is activated or a short-circuitis detected.

Reset connections - RT9

The manual supervised reset contactconnected to input X1 must be closedand opened in order to activate the relayoutputs.

Automatic reset is selected when A1(+), X1and X4 are linked. The relay outputs are thenactivated at the same time as the inputs.

Manual supervised reset



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data - RT9


Article number/Ordering data 10-029-00 RT9 24DC


Weight 210 g

Supply

Voltage (A1-A2)24 VDC +/- 20%

Power consumption

Nominal voltage 2.5 W

Connection S13 Short-circuit protected voltageoutput, 70 mA +/- 10% currentlimitation. Is used for the inputsS14, S34 and S44.

Input currents

(at nominal supply voltage)

S14 (+) inputS24 (0V) inputS34 (+) inputS44 (+) input

30 mA20 mA20 mA25 mA

Reset input X1

Supply for reset input

Reset current

Minimum contact closure timefor resetMinimum contact closure time(at low limit voltage -20%)

+24 VDC

300 mA current pulse at contactclosure, then 30 mA

80ms

100ms

Maximum external connection

cable resistance at a nominal

voltage for

S14, S24, S34S44, X1

300 Ohm150 Ohm

Response time

At Power onWhen activating ( input-output)

When deactivating (input–output)At Power Loss

<100 ms<20 ms

<20 ms<80 ms

Relay outputs

NOMaximum switching capacityres. load ACMaximum switching capacityres. load DCMax. total switching capacity:

Minimum load


2

6A/250/1500 VA

6A/24 VDC/150W8A distributed on all contacts

10 mA/10V (if load on contacthas not exceeded 100 mA)Ag+Au flash>107 operations

Relay information output

(Changeover contacts)

Y14 - (0V)+(24V)

Maximum load of Y14Short-circuit protection forinformation output

Indicates that RT9 is not reset.Indicates that RT9 is reset.250 mA

Internal automatic fuse

LED indication

On

In1 In2

1 2

Supply voltage OK, the LED is on.Flashing light in case of under-voltage, overload or currentlimitingIndicates that the input conditionsare fulfilled.Indicates that the output relayshave been activated.

Mounting


35 mm DIN rail-10°C to + 55°C

Connection blocks

(detachable)

Maximum screw torqueMaximum connection area:Solid conductorsConductor with socket contactAir and creep distance

1 Nm

1 x 4mm2 / 2 x 1.5mm2/12AWG1 x 2.5mm2 / 2 x 1mm2 4kV/2 IEC 60664-1

Protection class

EnclosureConnection blocks

IP 40 IEC 60529IP 20 IEC 60529




JSBRT11Safety relay

Approvals:

Safety relay for:

Emergency stop

Light curtains



Magnetic switches

Light beams


Features:

Selectable inputs and safety

category

Manual supervised or automatic

reset

Width 100 mm

LED indication for supply, inputs

and outputs

7 NO + 2 NC relay outputs

Supply 24 VDC 24, 48, 115 or

230 VAC


A flexible safety relay with many outputs

The JSBRT11 has been designed to provide the safety systemcircuit designer with the ability to select from both a rangeof input connection configurations and either automatic or

supervised reset.The unit can be hardwire configured to operate in either

of the following input configurations:

• Mode 1: Single Channel (1 NO contact from +24 VDC),safety category 1.

• Mode 2: Dual Channel (2 NO contacts from +24 VDC),safety category 3.

• Mode 3: Dual Channel (1 NO, 1NC contacts from + 24VDC), safety category 4.

• Mode 4: Dual Channel (1 NO contact from 0 V and 1 NOcontact from + 24 VDC), safety category 4.In addition the unit can also be used to test that contactors

and valves have fallen/returned to their ’reset’ state before anew ’start’ signal is given.

Safety level

The JSBRT11 has dual and monitored internal safety func-tions. Power failure, internal component failures or externalinterference (with the exception of short circuiting of inputcontact when used in a single channel input mode) do notresult in a dangerous function.

When wired for supervised reset, should a short circuitappear across the reset input the relay will not automaticallyreset when the input/inputs are made. Only when the super-

vised reset input is made and broken will the relay reset.The JSBRT11 provides detection of contact failure in theinputs when wired in dual channel mode. Both inputs haveto be opened and closed in order to enable the reactivationof the relay.

The highest safety level of the JSBRT11 is in configurationmode 3 and 4 because all short circuits are supervised i.e.a short circuit between the inputs leads to a safe state asthe outputs drop out.


The JSBRT11 is designed and approved in accordance withappropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/

EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples




1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Test

Supervised manual resetDUAL CHANNEL*, 1 NO,

1 NC from +24V

SINGLE CHANNEL *, 1 NO from +24V

DUAL CHANNEL*, 2 NO from +24V DUAL CHANNEL*, 1 NO from +24V,

1 NO from 0V

Automatic reset

* With the input conditions shown, the JSBRT11 is in its de-energized state, i.e. output contacts are open.

Electrical connection – JSBRT11

S u p p

l y *

**

The supply voltage is connected across A1and A2. The input connection configurationand type of reset required is set by connectingthe unit as shown in the diagrams below.

When the input/inputs and the test/super-vised reset are made K1 and K2 energise.K1 and K2 will de-energize if the poweris disconnected or a stop signal is given inaccordance to the configuration mode wired.Both K1 and K2 have to be de-activatedbefore the outputs of the JSBRT11 canbe closed again.Configuration mode 1.

When the single input opens both K1 and

K2 relays are deactivated.

Configuration mode 2.Both inputs have to be closed in order toenable the unit to be activated. A stop signalis given if both or one input is opened. Bothinputs have to be opened and reclosed inorder to enable the reactivation of the unit.If the possibility of short circuits betweenthe inputs cannot be excluded, configura-tion mode 3 or 4 should be used in order toreach the highest safety level.Configuration mode 3.

One input has to be closed and the otherinput has to be opened in order to enablethe unit to be activated. A stop signal is

given if both or one input change state.

Both inputs have to change state in orderto give a dual stop function and to allow anew start after stop.Configuration mode 4

Operation as mode 2 but short circuits be-tween the inputs leads to a safe state i.e. therelays inside the JSBRT11 will drop out.Supervised reset connection.

The input to X1 (see diagram below) has tobe closed and opened in order to activate theunit, after input/inputs are made according tothe configuration mode selected. This modeis selected when X1 - X4 is open-circuit.

Automatic reset connection.

The input has to be closed in order to activatethe unit after input/inputs are made accord-ing to the configuration mode selected. Thismode is selected when a connection betweenX1 and X4 is made.Test.

Test contacts of contactors can be connected

between S53 and X1 for supervision.

*Supervision circuit **Test and Automatic reset circuit *** Only for AC-supply

Technical description – JSBRT11

***

It is recommended that all switched loadsare adequately suppressed and/or fusedin order to provide additional protectionfor the safety contacts.

Technical data – JSBRT11Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Colour: Black and Beige

Power supply A1 - A2: 24 VDC +/- 15%24, 48, 115, 230 VAC +/- 15%, 50-60 Hz

Power consumption: < 3 VA

Relay Outputs: 7 NO and 2 NC

Max. switching capacity res. load AC: 6A/250 VAC/1500 VA

Max. switching capacity res. load DC: 6A/24 VDC/150 W

Max. total switching capacity: 21A distributed on all contacts

Min. load: 10mA/10 V(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA)

Contact material AgSnO2+ Au flash

Max. Input wire res. at nom. voltage: 200 Ohm (S14,S24,S34,X1,X4); 100 Ohm (S44)

Response time at deactivation (input-output): <20 ms

Response time at activation (input-output): <30 ms

Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1.5 mm2

Conductor with socket contact: 1x2.5 mm2/2x1mm2

Mounting: 35 mm DIN-rail

Protection class, enclosure: IP 40 IEC 60259

terminals: IP 20 IEC 60259

Air and creep distance: 4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1

Operating temperature range: -10°C to +55°CFunction indication: Electrical Supply, Input 1 and 2,

Output relays 1 and 2

Weight: 610 g (24 VDC) 790 g (24-230 VAC)

Test Reset

72

100mm

118

72

100mm

118



10-025-00 24DC10-025-02 24AC10-025-03 48AC10-025-04 115AC10-025-05 230AC

K

K



JSBR4Safety relay

Approvals:

Safety relay for:

Two-hand devices of type IIIc

Emergency stop


Interlocked Gates/Hatches

Contact strips

Safety mats


Features:

A universal relay for two-hand- and many other safety

devices

The JSBR4 has two inputs, which both have to be closedto keep the safety output contacts closed. A short-circuitacross the inputs will cause the output contacts to open.The inputs can however be subjected to a continuousshort-circuit without damaging the safety relay. In order to make the safety outputs close the reset inputmust be closed and opened. In this way an unintentionalreset is prevented in the case of a short-circuit in the resetbutton cable or if the button gets jammed in the actuatedposition. The reset input can also be used for test/super-vision to ensure that contactors or valves have returned

to their initial off/stop position before a new start can beallowed by the safety relay.

When the JSBR4 is used as a two-hand device relay,both buttons have to be pressed within 0.5 seconds ofeach other in order to close the outputs. When the JSBR4 is used for Safety Mats and SafetyStrips the ”stop” condition is given following detection ofa short-circuit between input channels A and B. The safetymat, safety strip or the relay will not be damaged by a con-tinuous short-circuit. This also gives the advantage that ifthere is a failure between the inputs in the installation, thesafety relay will not be damaged.

Safety level

The JSBR4 has a twin supervised safety function. Com-ponent failure, short-circuit or external disturbance (e.g.loss of power supply) will not prevent the safe function of

the relay. This is valid both for the inputs A and B as wellas for the reset input. The JSBR4 operates at the highestsafety level for safety relays (category 4). Regulations and standards

The JSBR4 is designed and approved in accordance with appro-priate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,

EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

The JSBR4 complies with the highest safety level for theconnection of a two-hand device of type IIIc in accordance

with EN 574.

Connection examples


Dual input channels

synchronism 0.5 s

Supervised reset

Test input

Width 45 mm

LED indication for supply,

inputs and outputs

3 NO/1NC relay outputs

Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48,

115 or 230 VAC




1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical description – JSBR4

The electrical supply is connected acrossA1 and A2. After Voltage reduction andRectification (AC-versions) or reverse polarityprotection (DC-version) there is an overloadprotection-circuit. When the inputs S13-S14 and S23-S24have closed and the reset is made, the relaysK1 and K2 are activated.A dual stop signal is given when K1 and

Electrical connection – JSBR4

K2 drop, due to short circuiting betweenthe inputs, opening of the inputs or powerfailure. If one input is opened the other inputmust also be opened for K1 and K2 to beactivated again.The monitoring circuit checks K1 and K2 and

that the reset circuit to X2 is both closed andopened before K1 and K2 are energized. Boththe stop and reset function therefore comply

with the requirement that a component fault,short circuit or external interference do notresult in a dangerous function. The safety outputs consist of contactsfrom K1 and K2 connected internally inseries across terminals 13 - 14, 23 -24 and33 - 34. These contacts are used to cutthe power to components which stop orprevent hazardous movements/functions.It is recommended that all switched loadsare adequately suppressed and/or fused inorder to provide additional protection for thesafety contacts. Note: Output 41-42 is intended for indica-tion purposes only, e.g. gate opened.No load between S14 and S24 allowed.

Emergency stop with manual resetting. Interlocked gate with manual reset.

Two hand device with buttons in separateor same enclosure. Buttons to be pressedin within 0.5 s of each other. Footpedalswitches can be connected in the sameconfiguration.

Enabling device, JSHD4. Stop condi-tion is given in both top and bottom PBpositions.

Contact mat/strip with manual reset.

Control and supervision of external con-ductor, relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’sexpansion relays.

* Only for AC-supply

Prot.circ. Reset & Supervision circ.

*

Technical data – JSBR4Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Power supply: 24 VDC +/- 15%24/48/115/230 VAC +/- 15% , 50 - 60 Hz


Relay outputs: 3 NO + 1 NC

Maximum switching capacity res. load AC: 6A/250 VAC/1500 VA

Maximum switching capacity res. load DC: 6A/24 VDC/150 W

Max. res. load total switching capacity: 12A distributed on all contacts

Minimum load: 10mA/10 V (if load on contact has not exceeded100 mA)

Contact material: Ag + Au flash

Max. Input Wire res. at nom. voltage: 300 Ohm (S13 - S14 and S23 - S24)

Response time at deactivation: < 20 ms (145 ms at power loss)

Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 1 x 4 mm2/2 x 1,5 mm2.Conductor with socket contact: 1 x 2,5 mm2/2 x 1 mm2.


Protection class enclosure/terminals: IP 40/20 IEC 60529

Operating temperature range: -10°C to +55°C

Air and creep distance: 4kV/2 DIN IEC 60664-1

LED indication: Electrical Supply, Inputs, Outputs

Weight: 350 g (24 VDC), 460 g (24 - 230 VAC)


10-002-00 24DC10-002-02 24AC10-002-03 48AC10-002-04 115AC10-002-05 230AC


74

mm45

120

74

mm45



Approvals:

JSBT4Safety relay

Safety relay for:

Emergency stops


Interlocked Hatches

Safety mats

Contact strips


Dual input channels

synchronism 0.5 s

Test input

Width 45 mm

LED indications for power on,

inputs and outputs


Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48, 115or 230 VAC


Safety relay with synchronised dual input channels

(within 0.5s)

The JSBT4 has two inputs, both of which have to beclosed in order to keep the safety output contacts closed.

A short circuit between inputs A and B will cause the out-put contacts to open. The inputs can be continuously shortcircuited without damaging the safety relay. For the outputs to close, the test input must be closed.The test input is intended to monitor that contactors orvalves have dropped/returned before a new start is permit-ted. This test input must not be confused with the reset func-tion required for gates that a person can walk through andwhere there is a high safety requirement (see JSBR4). If the JSBT4 is used for safety Mats and safety Strips,the "stop" condition is given following detection of a short

circuit. The safety mat, safety strip or the relay will not bedamaged by a continuous short-circuit. This also providesthe advantage that if there is a failure between inputs Aand B in the installation, the safety relay will not be dam-aged.

Safety level

The JSBT4 has a twin supervised safety function. Compo-nent failure, short-circuit or external disturbance (e.g. lossof power supply) will not prevent the safe function of therelay. Safety category level 3 or 4, depending on use.

The true two-channel safety function has the advantagethat the cabling installation demands for safety can be re-duced, due to the fact that a short-circuit between the in-puts will directly open the relay's safety outputs.


The JSBT4 is designed and approved in accordance with appro-priate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC,

EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples


Features:



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

TEST

TEST

TEST

TEST

LOAD

TEST

Technical description – JSBT4

Electrical connection – JSBT4

Technical data – JSBT4Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Power supply: 24 VDC +/- 15%24/48/115/230VAC +/- 15%, 50 - 60 Hz






Minimum load: 10mA/10 V(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA)


Max. Input Wire res. at nom. voltage: 300 Ohm (S13 - S14 and S23 - S24)

Response time at deactivation: < 20 ms, 145 ms with switched supply/power loss


Conductor with socket contact: 1x2.5 mm2/2x1mm2.



Operating temperature range: -10°C – +55°C

Air and creep distance: 4kV/2 IEC 60664-1


Weight: 350 g (24VDC), 460 g (24-230VAC)

The electrical supply is connected acrossA1 and A2. After Voltage reduction andRectification (AC-versions) or reverse polarityprotection (DC-version) there is an overloadprotection-circuit.

When the inputs S13-S14 and S23-S24are closed within 0.5 seconds of each otherthe relays K1 and K2 are energized . A dualstop signal is given, K1 and K2 de-energize,when there is a short circuit between or anopening of the inputs or at power loss. If one

input is opened the other one also has to beopened in order to activate K1 and K2 again.The test circuit, X1 - X2,has to be closed inorder to activate the outputs, thereafter thetest circuit can be opened or closed conti-nously. If the test circuit is closed after theinputs there is no requirement to close themwithin 0.5 seconds of each other.

The internal supervision circuit monitorsthe two Inputs and relays K1, K2. The stopfunction then fulfils the requirement that one

failure (short circuit, component, externaldisturbance) shall not prevent the safe func-tion of the JSBT4.

The safety outputs consist of contactsfrom K1 and K2 connected internally inseries across terminals 13 - 14, 23 -24 and33 - 34. These contacts are used to cutthe power to components which stop orprevent hazardous movements/functions.It is recommended that all switched loadsare adequately suppressed and/or fused inorder to provide additional protection for thesafety contacts.

The NC output 41 - 42 should only be usedfor monitoring purposes e.g. Indication lampor PLC input etc. The output contacts areclosed until the module is reset.

Note: Output 41-42 is intended for indica-tion purposes only, e.g. gate opened. No loadbetween S14 and S24 allowed.

Emergency stop with automatic resetting. Interlocked hatch with automatic resetting. Contact mat/strip with automatic reset

Control and supervision of external contactor,relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s expansionrelays.

Monitoring to ensure that the Start buttoncannot stick in pressed position. Shortcircuiting over the closing contact is not mon-itored. The RT-series and JSBR4 have builtin short circuiting monitored resetting.

Enabling device, JSHD4. Stop condition isgiven in both top and bottom positions.

Prot.circ. Reset & Supervision circ.

*


10-004-00 24DC10-004-02 24AC10-004-03 48AC10-004-04 115AC10-004-05 230AC10-004-14 115AC1 s.10-004-20 24DC 1.5 s.


74

mm45

120

74

mm45

TEST

*Only for AC-supply



BT50(T)Safety relay/expansion relay

Approvals:

Safety relay for:

Emergency stop

Interlocked hatch

Expansion of Pluto

Features:

Single and “dual” channel

Test/"reset" input

Width 22.5 mm

LED indication


Supply 24 VDC


BT50 - Additional powerterminals

BT50T - One changeover relaywith a double information output(Y14)

BT50T

Delay times selectable from

0 - 1.5 s

Safety relay/expansion relay to Pluto

The BT50 is designed to connect safety devices, such asemergency stops, directly in the voltage supply circuit tothe relay. Despite a maximum built-in width of 22.5 mm therelay is very powerful.

With 3NO safety outputs, 1NC output (for monitoringpurposes), a test input and complete internal supervision,the BT50 is quite unique. In addition, delayed outputs(BT50T) can be ordered. In order for the safety outputs to close, the supply volt-age, e.g. by means of an emergency stop button, must beconnected to A1 and A2 and the test input closed. Afteractuation of the relay the test input can be opened again.

The test input is intended to supervise that contactorsor valves have dropped/returned before a new start canbe permitted.The test input can also be used for startingand the start button can be supervised (see the connec-tion example on the next page).

More outputs

By connecting a BT50 to a safety relay/PLC it is easy to in-crease the number of safe outputs. This means that an un-limited number of dangerous machine operations and func-tions can be stopped by using just one safety relay/PLC.

Safety levelThe BT50 has a twin and supervised internal safety func-tion. Power failure, internal component faults or externalinterference cannot result in dangerous functions. Input via A1 on its own is not protected from short

circuiting, and therefore installation is critical for the safe-ty level to be achieved. To achieve a higher safety level ascreened cable can be used and/or connection made toboth A1 and A2 (see the example on the next page).


The BT50 is designed and approved in accordance with appropri-ate directives and standards. Examples of such are 98/37/EC, ENISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples

For examples of how our safety relays can solve varioussafety problems, please see the chapter “Connectionexamples”.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – BT50(T)Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Operational voltage: 24 VDC + 15%/-25%






Minimum load: 10mA/10 V(if load on contact has not

exceeded 100 mA)


Max Input Wire res. at nom. voltage: 200 Ohms

Response time at deactivation (input - output): Version B <20 ms or delayed max 1500 ms (oldversion of BT50 <60 ms)

Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 2x1.5 mm2

Conductor with socket contact: 2x1mm2.





LED indication: Electrical Supply, Relay and X4

Weight: 200 g

Technical description – BT50(T)

Emergency stop with dual connection directto the supply voltage. Controlled monitoring of external con-tactor, relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’sexpansion relays.

Monitoring to ensure that the On but-ton is not stuck in pressed position. Ashort circuit over the closing contact isnot monitored.

Emergency stop with reset when emergencybutton returns.

Hatch with automatic reset. BT50 as emergency stop and controlrelay with Start and Stop function.

When supply voltage is connected to A1and A2, relays K1 and K2 are activated. K1and K2 drop if the supply voltage is discon-nected. Both relays K1 and K2 must drop for

them to be activated again. Another require-ment is that the test circuit, A1 - X4, mustbe closed for the outputs to be activated.Thereafter A1 - X4 can either be open orconstantly closed.

The supervising circuit ensures that bothK1 and K2 have dropped before they canbe reactivated. The stop function complieswith the requirement that a component fault

Electrical connection – BT50(T)

or external interference cannot lead to adangerous function.

The safety outputs consist of contactsfrom K1 and K2 connected internally in

series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 - 24,and 33 - 34. These contacts are used tocut the power to components which stopor prevent hazardous movements/functions.It is recommended that all switched loadsare adequately suppressed and/or fused inorder to provide additional protection for thesafety contacts.

The NC output 41 - 42 should only beused for monitoring purposes e.g. indicationlamp for emergency stop pressed.

1.0 s1.5 s

0 s0.5 s

A2 T1 T2 A2 T1 T2

BT50T - Delay times

BT50T - Info. output

* BT50 has additional power terminals A1 and A2.

*

*

*

Supervision circuitK1

K2

Max load250 mA

A1 X4

LOAD


10-033-00 BT5010-033-10 BT50T


A1 X4



BT51(T)Safety relay/expansion relay

Approvals:

Safety relay for:

Emergency stopInterlocked hatch

Expansion of Pluto

Features:


Test/"reset" input

Width 22.5 mm

LED indication

4 NO relay outputs

Supply 24 VDC


BT51 - Additional powerterminals

BT51T - One changeover relaywith a double information output(Y14)

BT51TDelay times selectable from0 - 1.5 s

Safety relay/expansion relay to Pluto

The BT51 is designed to connect safety devices, such asemergency stops, directly in the voltage supply circuit tothe relay. Despite a maximum built-in width of 22.5 mm therelay is very powerful.

With 4 NO safety outputs, test input and complete in-ternal supervising, the BT51 is quite unique. In additionyou can order delayed outputs (BT51T). In order for the safety outputs to close, the supply volt-age, e.g. by means of an emergency stop button, must beconnected to A1 and A2 and the test input closed. Afteractuation of the relay the test input can be opened again. The test input is intended to supervise that contactorsor valves have dropped/returned before a new start canbe permitted.The test input can also be used for startingand the start button can be supervised (see connection

example on next page).

More outputs

By connecting BT51 to a safety relay/PLC it is easy toincrease the number of safe outputs. This means that anunlimited number of dangerous machine operations andfunctions can be stopped from one safety relay/PLC.

Safety level

The BT51 has a twin and supervised internal safety func-tion. Power failure, internal component faults or externalinterference cannot result in dangerous functions.

Input via A1 only is not protected from short circuiting,and therefore installation is critical for the safety level to beachieved. To achieve a higher safety level a screened ca-ble can be used and/or connection made to both A1 andA2 (see example overleaf).


The BT51 is designed and approved in accordance withappropriate directives and standards. Examples of suchare 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1,EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples

For examples of how our safety relays can solve varioussafety problems, please see the chapter “Connectionexamples”.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – BT51(T)Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Operational voltage: 24 VDC + 15%/-25%


Relay outputs: 4 NO



Max. res. load total switching capacity: 12 A distributed on all contacts

Minimum load: 10mA/10 V(if load on contact has not exceeded

100 mA)


Max Input Wire res. at nom. voltage: 200 Ohms

Response time at deactivation: <20 ms or delayed max 1500 ms (BT51T)







LED indication: Electrical Supply, Relay and X4

Weight: 200 g

Technical description – BT51(T)

When supply voltage is connected to A1and A2, relays K1 and K2 are activated. K1and K2 drop if the supply voltage is discon-nected. Both relays K1 and K2 must drop for

them to be activated again. Another require-ment is that the test circuit, A1 - X4, mustbe closed for the outputs to be activated.Thereafter A1 - X4 can either be open orconstantly closed.

The supervising circuit ensures that bothK1 and K2 have dropped before they canbe reactivated. The stop function complieswith the requirement that a component fault


The safety outputs consist of contactsfrom K1 and K2 connected internally in

series across terminals 13 - 14, 23 - 24, 33- 34 and 43 - 44. These contacts are usedto cut the power to components which stopor prevent hazardous movements/functions.It is recommended that all switched loadsare adequately suppressed and/or fused inorder to provide additional protection for thesafety contacts. 1.0 s

1.5 s

0 s0.5 s

A2 T1 T2 A2 T1 T2

BT51T - Delay times

BT51T - Info. output

Supervision circuit

Max load

250 mA

Emergency stop with dual connection directto the supply voltage. Controlled monitoring of external con-tactor, relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’sexpansion relays.

Monitoring to ensure that the On but-ton is not stuck in pressed position. Ashort circuit over the closing contact isnot monitored.

Emergency stop with reset when emergencybutton returns.

Hatch with automatic reset. BT51 as emergency stop and controlrelay with Start and Stop function.

Electrical connection – BT51(T)

* BT51 has additional power terminals A1 and A2.

*

*

*

A1 X4

LOAD


10-033-20 BT5110-033-30 BT51T


A1 X4



Safety relay for contact rails, bumpers and safety

mats

The RT10 is a safety relay that monitors one or more series-connected contact rails, bumpers or safety mats with atwo-wire connection and termination resistance.

Operation, a short-circuit or an open circuit in the contactrail, bumper or safety mat, or a change in the terminationresistance will be detected by the RT10 and any hazardousmachinery movement inhibited.

Despite its compact design, the RT10 has two safetyoutputs, two information outputs, five LEDs, dual connectionterminals for supply voltage and a detachable terminal blockwhich considerably simplifies installation and servicing.

In addition there is a manual or automatic reset facility.Manually supervised resetting can be used, for example,

with safety mats across which passage is permitted. Auto-matic resetting can be used when passage over or throughthe protection area is not possible and if suitable from arisk viewpoint.

Regulations & standards

The RT10 is designed and approved in accordance withappropriate directives and standards.

Examples of applicable regulations and standards are98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1 and EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples

You will find examples of how our safety relays can solvevarious safety problems in “Connection examples”.

Advantages:

Safety relay for:

Approval:

Contact rails

Safety mats

Manual or automatic resetfacility

Test input for monitoringexternal contacts

22.5 mm width

LEDs to indicate power on,inputs and outputs, short-circuits and open circuits

2 NO relay outputs

One relay output with dualinformation

Operating voltage 24 V DC

Detachable connection blocks

Two-wire connection

RT10Safety relay Not ready at the time of printing



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Electrical connections – RT10

Technical data - RT10Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Article number/ordering data: 10-029-50 RT10 24DC


Weight 210 g

Operating voltage

Operating voltage (A1-A2) 24 VDC +/- 20%

Power consumption

At nominal voltage 2 W

Safety input resistance S15/S16

OKShort-circuitOpen circuit

1.2 kOhmless than 150 Ohmsmore than 1.5 kOhm

Reset input X1

Supply for resetX1

Minimum closing time at nominalvoltageMinimum closing time at undervoltage(-20%)

+ 24 V DC300 mA pulse when closingthereafter 30 mA

80 ms

100 ms

Response times

At activationAt start (input-output)At deactivationAt loss of power

<100 ms<20 ms<20 ms<80 ms

Relay outputsNOMax. switching capacity res. load ACMax. switching capacity res. load DCMax. total switching capacity res. loadMax. switching capacityContact materialMechanical life

26A/250 V AC/1500 VA6A/24 V DC/150 W8A distributed on all contacts10 mA/10 V (at max. load <100 mA)Ag + Au flash107 operations

Relay output with dual information

Y14 -(0V)+(24V)

Max. load at Y14Short-circuit protection forinformation output

Indicates that the RT10 is not reset.Indicates that the RT10 is reset.250 mA

Internal automatic fuse

LED indications

On

S/O

R1 2

Supply voltage OK, LED continuous-ly lit. LED flashing on undervoltage,overload or current limiting.Indicates short-circuit or open circuitat safety input.Input conditions fulfilled OK.Indicates that the output relays areactivated.

Installation

Rail

Ambient temperature

35 mm DIN rail

-10°C to + 55°CConnection blocks (detachable):

Max. torque, terminal screwsMax. connection area: Solid conductors:

Conductor with socket contact:Air and creep distance:

1 Nm

1 x 4 mm2/2 x 1.5mm2/12 AWG1 x 2.5mm2/2 x 1 mm2

4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1

Protection class

EnclosureConnection blocks

IP 40 IEC 60529IP 20 IEC 60529




JSBT5(T)Safety relay

Approvals:

Safety relay for:

Emergency stop

Interlocked hatch

Features:


Test/start input

Width 22.5 mm

LED indication


(T) = delayed outputs 0.5 sec.

Supply 12 VDC, 24 VDC/AC


The JSBT5 is designed and approved in accordance withappropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples


Single channel safety relay

The JSBT5 is designed to connect safety devices, such as

emergency stops, directly in the voltage supply circuit tothe relay. Despite a maximum built-in width of 22.5 mm therelay is very powerful.With 3 NO safety outputs, 1 NC, test input and completeinternal supervising, the JSBT5 is quite unique. In additionyou can order delayed outputs (JSBT5T).In order for the safety outputs to close, the supply volt-age, e.g. by means of an emergency stop button, must beconnected to A1 and A2 and the test input closed. Afteractuation of the relay the test input can be opened again. The test input is intended to supervise that contactorsor valves have dropped/returned before a new start canbe permitted.The test input can also be used for startingand the start button can be supervised (see connectionexample on next page).

Safety level

The JSBT5 has a twin and supervised internal safety func-tion. Power failure, internal component faults or externalinterference cannot result in dangerous functions. Input via A1 only is not protected from short circuiting,and therefore installation is critical for the safety level to beachieved. To achieve a higher safety level a screened ca-ble can be used and/or connection made to both A1 andA2 (see example overleaf).



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – JSBT5(T)Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Operational voltage: 12 VDC, 24 VDC/AC + 15%/-25%, 50 - 60 Hz






Minimum load: 10mA/10 V

(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA)

Contact material: AgCuNi

Max Input Wire res. at nom. voltage: 200 Ohm

Response time at deactivation: <60 ms or delayed max 500 ms (JSBT5T)







Function indication: Electrical Supply

Weight: 200 g

Technical description – JSBT5(T)

Emergency stop with dual connection direct

to the supply voltage.

Controlled monitoring of external contactor,

relay, valve or JOKAB SAFETY’s expansionrelays.

Monitoring to ensure that the On but-

ton is not stuck in pressed position. Ashort circuit over the closing contact isnot monitored. The JSBR4 has built inshort circuit monitored resetting.

Emergency stop with automatic reset whenemergency button returns.

Hatch with automatic reset. JSBT5 as emergency stop and controlrelay with Start and Stop function.

When supply voltage is connected to A1and A2, relays K1 and K2 are activated.K1 and K2 drop if the supply voltage is

disconnected. Both relays K1 and K2 mustdrop for them to be activated again. Anotherrequirement is that the test circuit, X1 - X2,must be closed for the outputs to be activa-ted. Thereafter X1 - X2 can either be openor constantly closed.

The supervising circuit ensures that both

Electrical connection – JSBT5(T)

K1 and K2 have dropped before they canbe reactivated. The stop function complieswith the requirement that a component fault


The safety outputs consist of contactsfrom K1 and K2 connected internally inseries across terminals 13 - 14, 23 - 24,and 33 - 34. These contacts are used tocut the power to components which stop

or prevent hazardous movements/functions.It is recommended that all switched loadsare adequately suppressed and/or fused in

order to provide additional protection for thesafety contacts.

The NC output 41 - 42 should only beused for monitoring purposes e.g. indicationlamp for emergency stop pressed.


10-005-01 JSBT5 24AC/DC10-005-07 JSBT5 12VDC10-005-11 JSBT5T 24AC/DC

82

22.5

99

mm



2

1

JSHT1 Safety timer for:

Approvals:

Safety timer

The JSHT1A/B closes two independent relay outputs

during a guaranteed maximum time when the inputsare opened.

Hardwire time selection 5 – 40 s

Selectable single or dualchannel input

Test input

Width 45 mm

LED indication for supply,inputs and outputs

1+1 NO relay outputs

Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48, 115or 230 VAC


Features:

Time reset

Time bypassing

Time reset procedure. First pushPB1, then exit dangerous area and

close the door, then push PB2(PB1 and PB2 must be pressedwithin the predetermined time pe-riod selected). After this procedurethe machine can be safely restarted.

Light beam being bypassedfor a maximum pre-set time

e.g. 5 sec. by the JSHT1during entrance and exit withthe JSHD4 Three PositionEnabling device.

Time reset

Time reset can prevent unintentional reset of safety sys-tems when someone is still in the dangerous area of themachine. During a guaranteed maximum time, one or se-veral PB´s for reset must be activated. The reset buttonsshould be sited in such a way that operatives have a clearoverview of the whole area which is guarded. Time resetis made by the combination of a safety relay and the timerrelay JSHT1A/B.

Time bypassingThe JSHT1 can also be used for time bypass of lightbeams for e.g. autotruck into a dangerous area.

Operation

When the inputs open the output contacts close. The out-put contacts open when the inputs close or when the timeperiod has expired. The time period is hardwire selectableon terminals T1, T2 and T3. The time given is the maximumtime. One or two channel operation is also hardwire selec-table.

Regulations and standardsThe JSHT1A/B is designed and approved in accordancewith appropriate directives and standards. Examples ofsuch are 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1,EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples




1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

JSHT1A JSHT1B

Electrical connection – JSHT1 A/B

Technical description – JSHT1 A/B

The electrical supply is connected acrossA1 and A2. The internal supervising circuitis activated directly when the supply is on.The inputs A and B must both be closedand then opened. Thereafter K1 and K2

are activated and the outputs close. K1and K2 are activated for the hardwiredselected time (set by connections on theterminals T1, T2 and T3). If there is a shortcircuit between the inputs or the inputs

are closed again before the set time pe-riod has expired the outputs will open. Inorder to close the outputs again both theinputs have to be closed and both internalrelays K1 and K2 deactivated (controlled bythe supervising circuit) and the inputs againopened.

By external hardwire connections theJSHT1 can be made single or dual chan-nel input. See figure below.

Connection for dual channel inputConnection for single channel input

* It is recommended that all switched loads are adequatelysuppressed and/or fused in order to provide additional pro-tection for the safety contacts. In the figure the monitoringof two contactors in the test input is shown.

Selection of time by hardwire links

** Only for AC-supply.

Connection andmonitoring circuit

Timer

**

Technical data – JSHT1 A/BManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Power supply: 24 VDC ± 15 %, 24/48/115/230 VAC ± 15 %,50 - 60 Hz (AC versions JSHT1A only)


Max Input Wire res. at nom voltage/channel: 100/200 Ohm (1 Channel/ 2 Channel))

Response time at activation: < 30 ms

Response time at deactivation: < 15 ms

Selectable time(± 15 % at nom. v.): JSHT1A: 5-10-15-20 sec

JSHT1B: 5-15-30-40 secRelay outputs: 2 x 1 NO







Conductor with socket contact: 1x2.5 mm2/2x1mm2


Protection class enclosure/terminals: IP20/IP40 IEC 60529


Air and creep distance: 4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1LED indication: Electrical Supply, Inputs, Outputs

Weight: 24 VDC: 330 g 24/48/115/230 VAC: 430 g


10-011-00 JSHT1A 24DC10-011-02 JSHT1A 24AC10-011-03 JSHT1A 48AC

10-011-04 JSHT1A 115AC10-011-05 JSHT1A 230AC10-011-10 JSHT1B 24DC

120

74

mm45




JSHT2 Safety timer

Safety relay for:

Approvals:

Time bypassing

Inching

Time bypassing

Sensors detect the autocarrier and are connected to theJSHT2 which supervises the sensors and bypasses thelight beam for a maximum predetermined time.

Inching

Inching applications require safety outputs to be closedfor a predetermined maximum period of time, allowing themachine to move only a short distance each time the in-ching control is activated. For each new motion the inching

control e.g. PB or pedal must be released and activatedagain.

Operation

When the inputs close the output contacts close. The out-put contacts open when the input opens or when the timeperiod has expired. The time is hardwire selectable on theterminals T1, T2 and T3. The time given is the maximumtime. Single or dual channel operation is also hardwire se-lectable.


The JSHT2A/B/C is designed and approved in accordance

with appropriate directives and standards. Examples ofsuch are 98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1,EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

Light beam being bypassedonly for the time it takes the

autocarrier to pass.

Shaft only turns a smallamount each time the PB is pressed.

Connection examples


Features:

Hardwire time selection

0.2 – 40 s

Selectable single or dualchannel input

Test input

Width 45 mm

LED indication for supply, inputsand outputs

1+1 NO relay outputs

Supply 24 VDC, 24, 48, 115 or230 VAC


The JSHT2A/B/C closes two independent relay outputs

during a guaranteed maximum period of time when

the inputs are closed.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

JSHT2A JSHT2B JSHT2C

Technical description – JSHT2 A/B/C

Electrical connection – JSHT2 A/B/C

The electrical supply is connected acrossA1 and A2. The internal supervising circuit isactivated directly when the supply is on. Theinputs A and B must both be opened andthen closed. Thereafter K1 and K2 are ac-tivated and the outputs close. K1 and K2are activated for hardwired selected time

(set by connections on the terminals T1,T2 and T3). If there is a short circuit bet-ween the inputs or the inputs are openedagain before the set time period has expi-red the outputs will open. In order to closethe outputs again both the inputs have tobe opened and both internal relays K1 and

K2 deactivated (controlled by the super-vising circuit) and then the inputs closedagain. By external hardwire connectors theJSHT2 can be made to operate fromeither single or dual channel inputs. Seefigure below.

Connection for dual channel inputConnection for single channel input

Selection of time by hardwire links* It is recommended that all switched

loads are adequately suppressedand/or fused in order to provideadditional protection for the safetycontacts. In the figure the monitoringof two contactors in the test inputis shown.

** Only for AC-supply.

Connection andmonitoring circuit

Timer

**

Technical data – JSHT2 A/B/CManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Power supply: 24 VDC ± 15 %24/48/115/230 VAC ± 15 %, 50 - 60 HZ


Max Input Wire res. at nom voltage/channel: 100/200 Ohm (1 Channel/ 2 Channel)

Response time at activation: < 30 ms

Response time at deactivation: < 15 ms

Selectable time(± 15 % at nom. v.): JSHT2A: 0.2 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 1.0 sec

JSHT2B: 5 - 10 - 15 - 20 secJSHT2C: 5 - 15 - 30 - 40 sec

Relay outputs: 2 x 1 NO






Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 1 x 4 mm2, 2 x 1,5 mm2

Conductor with socket contact: 1 x 2,5 mm2, 2 x 1 mm2


Protection class enclosure/terminals: IP 20/IP 40 IEC 60529


Air and creep distance: 4 kV/2 IEC 60664-1


Weight: 24 VDC: 310 g. 24/48/115/230 VAC: 410 g.


10-012-00 JSHT2A 24DC10-012-02 JSHT2A 24AC10-012-03 JSHT2A 48 AC10-012-04 JSHT2A 115 AC10-012-05 JSHT2A 230 AC10-012-10 JSHT2B 24DC10-012-12 JSHT2B 24AC

10-012-13 JSHT2B 48 AC10-012-14 JSHT2B 115 AC10-012-15 JSHT2B 230 AC10-012-20 JSHT2C 24DC


120

74

mm45



Stop category 1 may also be permitted when it is notpossible to gain physical access to the machine beforethe safe stop is affected e.g:

operations and functions have been stopped.

dangerous machine function.

Safety level

The E1T has twin stop functions, that is, two relays with

mechanically operated contacts. A monitored stop func-tion is achieved by connecting the test output (terminalsX1 and X2) to the test or reset input on the safety relaywhich is being expanded. One condition for a safe delayed stop is that the delaytime cannot increase in the event of a fault. The E1T com-plies with this requirement.


The E1T is designed and approved in accordance with ap-propriate directives and standards. Examples of such are98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/

EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples


E1TExpansion relay

Expansion relay with:

Approvals:

More safety outputs

Delayed safety outputs

Features:

Width 22.5 mm

Supply 24 VDC

LED output indication

4 NO relay outputs

Single or dual channel

operation option

Quick release connector blocksMore outputs

By connecting expansion relays to a safety relay it is easyto increase the number of safe outputs. This means thatan unlimited number of dangerous machine operationsand functions can be stopped from one safety relay.

Safe soft stop

When a gate is opened a program stop is first given to themachine’s PLC/servo which brakes the dangerous opera-tions in a soft and controlled way. The safety outputs thenbreak the power to the motors, that is, when the machinehas already stopped. Normally between 0.5 and 1 secondis needed to brake a dangerous machine operation softly.

Soft stop ensures many advantages:

-fied.A safe soft stop is achieved by means of a safety relaywhich gives the program stop, and an expansion relay,E1T, which gives safe delayed stop signals. See section”Connection examples”. The drop time delay on a E1T canas standard be selected from 0 to 3 seconds. By connec-ting several E1T´s in series even longer times can be ac-hieved.

When are delayed safe stops used?

Delayed safety stop signals can be used for emergencystops according to EN418 § 4.1.5. Stop category 1, i.e. acontrolled stop with power to the actuator(s) available toachieve the stop and then removal of power when stop isachieved.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – E1TManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Operational voltage: 24 VDC ± 15%

Power consumption: 2W

Relay outputs: 4 NO

Max. switching capacity res. load AC: 6A/250VAC/1500VA

Max. switching capacity res. load DC: 6A/24VDC/150W


Total unit switching cap: 12A distributed on all contacts

Min. switching load: 10 mA/10 V(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA)


Maximum external resistance at a nominal voltage: 150 Ohm (S14, S24)

Response time at deactivation (input - output): < 0,020 s, 0,5 s, 1 s, 1,5 s, 2 s, 3 s, ± 20%

Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1,5 mm2

Conductor with socket contact: 1x2,5 mm2/2x1mm2.

Mounting: 35 mm DIN rail

Protection class encloure/terminals: IP 40/20 IEC 60529



LED indication: Output status

Weight: 220 g

Technical description – E1T

The E1T has to be connected to a safetyrelay in order to fulfill the necessary safety

requirements (see connection examplesbelow). The safety relay controls and mo-nitors the E1T (The E1T can be connectedfor single or dual channel operation - seebelow). When the inputs S14 and S24close, relays K1 and K2 are activated. A

stop signal is given, K1 and K2 drop, if theinputs are opened or during power failure. K1and K2 drop either directly or after a delay* (ifincorporated). Delay time of module is fixedand shown on front panel of device. The delaycircuit is so arranged that the design timecannot be exceeded.

To check that both the relays K1 andK2 drop during a stop signal they must bemonitored. This is achieved by connectingX1 and X2 to the test or reset input on thesafety relay which is expanded (see below).K1 and K2 are mechanically operated relays,therefore, if one of the output contactsshould stick closed then the relay’s contactin X1-X2 cannot be closed thus preventinga new ready signal being given to the safety

relay.Inductive loads should be equipped with

an arc suppressor to protect the outputcontacts.

Diodes are the best arc suppressorsbut will increase the switch off time ofthe load.

Electrical connection – E1T

Single channel expansion of outputs for asafety relay connected to an emergencystop.

Dual channel expansion with delayed safetyoutputs for a safety relay monitoring a gate.


10-030-00 E1T 0s 24DC10-030-10 E1T 0,5s 24DC10-030-20 E1T 1 s 24DC10-030-30 E1T 1,5s 24DC10-030-40 E1T 2s 24DC10-030-50 E1T 3s 24DC


SAFETY RELAY RT6 SAFETY RELAY RT6

DELAYED SAFETY STOP



JSR1TExpansion relay


Approvals:

Features:

More safe outputsDelayed safe outputs

Information output

Width 45 mm

Supply 24 VDCLED function indication

4 NO/1 NC relay outputs

Single and dual channel


More outputs

By connecting expansion relays to a safety relay it is easyto increase the number of safe outputs. This means that an

unlimited number of dangerous machine operations andfunctions can be stopped from one safety relay.

Safe soft stop

When a gate is opened a program stop is first given to themachine’s PLC/servo which brakes the dangerous opera-tions in a soft and controlled way. The safety outputs thenbreak the power to the motors, that is, when the machinehas already stopped. Normally between 0.5 and 1 secondis needed to brake a dangerous machine operation softly. Soft stop ensures many advantages:

simplified.

A safe soft stop is achieved by means of a safety relaywhich gives the program stop, and an expansion relay, JS-R1T, which gives safe delayed stop signals. See section”Connection examples”. The drop time delay on a JSR1Tcan as standard be selected from 0 to 10 seconds. Byconnecting several JSR1T´s in series even longer timescan be achieved.

When are delayed safe stops used?

Delayed safety stop signals can be used for emergency

stops according to EN418 § 4.1.5. Stop category 1, i.e. acontrolled stop with power to the actuator(s) available toachieve the stop and then removal of power when stop isachieved.

Stop category 1 may also be permitted when it is notpossible to gain physical access to the machine before thesafe stop is affected e.g:

operations and functions have been stopped.

dangerous machine function.

Safety level

The JSR1T has twin stop functions, that is, two relays withmechanically operated contacts. A monitored stop function

is achieved by connecting the test output (terminals X1and X2) to the test or reset input on the safety relay whichis being expanded. One condition for a safe delayed stop is that the de-lay time cannot increase in the event of a fault. The JSR1Tcomplies with this requirement.


The JSR1T is designed and approved in accordance withappropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples




1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

SAFETY RELAY RT6

DELAYED SAFETY STOP

SAFETY RELAY RT6

Technical description – JSR1T

Expansion of outputs for safety relay con-nected to emergency stop with automaticreset.

The JSR1T has to be connected to a safety

relay in order to fulfill the necessary safetyrequirements (see connection examples be-low). The safety relay controls and monitorsthe JSR1T. (The JSR1T can be connectedfor single or dual channel operation - seebelow). When the inputs S14 and S24close, relays K1 and K2 are activated. A stop

Dual-channel expansion with delayed safetyoutputs for safety relay monitoring a gate.

signal is given, K1 and K2 drop, if the inputsare opened or during power failure. K1 andK2 drop either directly or after a delay* (Ifincorporated). Delay time of module is fixedand shown on front panel of device. Thedelay circuit is so arranged that the designtime cannot be exceeded.

To check that both the relays K1 andK2 drop during a stop signal they must bemonitored. This is achieved by connectingX1 and X2 to the test or reset input on thesafety relay which is expanded (see below).K1 and K2 are mechanically operated relays,therefore, if one of the output contactsshould stick closed then the relay’s contactin X1-X2 cannot be closed thus preventing

a new ready signal being given to the safetyrelay.

Inductive loads should be equipped withan arc suppressor to protect the outputcontacts.

Diodes are the best arc suppressorsbut will increase the switch off time of theload.

Electrical connection – JSR1T

Technical data – JSR1TManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Power supply: 24 VDC ± 15%

Power consumption: < 2 W





Minimum load: 10mA/10 V (if load on contact has not

exceeded 100 mA)


Max Input Wire res. at nom voltage: 150 Ohm (S14, S24)

Response time at deactivation(input- output): < 0,020 s, 0,5 s, 1 s, 1,5 s, 2 s, 3 s, 5 s, 8 s,10 s ± 20 %

Terminals (Max. screw torque 1 Nm): Single strand: 1x4 mm2/2x1,5 mm2

Conductor with socket contact: 1x2,5 mm2/2x1mm2




Air and creep distance: 4KV/2 IEC 60664-1

LED indication: Output Relay Supplies

Weight: 280 g


10-015-00 JSR1T 0 6A 24 DC10-015-05 JSR1T 1,5 6A 24DC10-015-06 JSR1T 8 6A 24 DC10-015-10 JSR1T 0,5 6A 24 D10-015-20 JSR1T 10s 6A 24DC10-015-30 JSR1T 1 6A 24 DC10-015-40 JSR1T 2 6A 24 DC10-015-50 JSR1T 3 6A 24 DC10-015-60 JSR1T 5 6A 24DC


120

74

mm45

JSR1T

JSR1T

JSR1T



JSR2AExpansion relay

Approvals:

More safe outputs

Greater current switching

capacity

Information output


Features:

Switching up to

10 A/250V/output

Width 45 mm

LED function indication

4 NO/1 NC relay outputs

5 supply versions

Supply 24 VDC/VAC, 48 115

and 230 VACQuick release connector blocks

More outputs

The JSR2A expansion relay is used to provide increased

switching capacity and number of safety outputs to a safetyrelay. This means that an unlimited number of dangerousmachine operations and functions can be stopped from onesafety relay.

Greater current switching capacity

The JSR2A Expansion relay enables switching of up to 10amps (AC/DC) per output contact.

Safety level

The JSR2A has twin stop functions, that is, two relays withmechanically positively guided contacts. A monitored stopfunction is achieved by connecting the test output (terminals

X1 and X2) to the test or reset input on the safety relay whichis to be expanded.


The JSR2A is designed and approved in accordance withappropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples




1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – JSR2AManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Supply A1 - A2: 24 VDC/AC, 48, 115, 230 VAC + 15%, 50-60 Hz

Power consumption: < 2.5 VA


Maximum switching capacity res. load AC: 10A/250VAC/1840VA

Maximum switching capacity res. load DC: 10A/24 VDC/192W


Minimum load: 10mA/10V/100mW

(if load on contact has not exceeded 100 mA)

Contact Material: AgSnO2+ Au flash

Max. wire resistance at nominal voltage:

24 VDC/VAC:

48/115/230 VAC:

100 Ohm200 Ohm

Mechanical operational Life: >107 operations

Response time:

At deactivation (input - output):

At activation (input - output):

<25 ms<15 ms

Terminals (removable):

Max. screw torque: 1 Nm

Connection Area (max.):

Single strand:

Conductor with socket contact:

1 x 4 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 /12AWG1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1 mm2

Mounting: 35 mm DIN railOperating temperature range: -10oC to +55oC


Protection class:

Enclosure:

Terminals:

IP 40 IEC 60529IP 20 IEC 60529

LED indication:On

1 2

Supply voltageOutput relays 1 and 2

Weight: 313 g

S u p p l y

OutputsTest The JSR2A has to be connected to a suit-able safety relay in order to fulfill the nec-essary safety requirements (see chapter“Connection examples”). The Safety Relaycontrols and monitors the JSR2A unit. (TheJSR2A can be connected for single or dualchannel operation - see Electrical connectiondiagrams below). When the inputs to S14and S24 close, internal relays K1 and K2are activated. A stop signal is given, K1 andK2 drop, if the inputs are opened or during

power failure.To check that both the K1 and K2 relays

drop during a stop signal they must bemonitored. This is achieved by connectingX1 and X2 to the test or reset input on thesafety relay which is expanded. K1 andK2 have mechanically positively guidedcontacts, therefore, if one of the outputcontacts should stick closed then therelay’s contact in X1-X2 cannot be closedthus preventing a new ready signal beinggiven to the safety relay.

Dual channel expansion of RT6 with JSR2Aconnected for automatic reset.

One channel expansion of RT6 withJSR2A connected for manual reset.

Electrical connection – JSR2A

Technical description – JSR2A

NOTE

The total switching capacity of the JSR2Ais 26A.The load on each single contact must notexceed 10 A.

Min. switching requirement of 10mA is notvalid after the contact has been subjectedto load currents exceeding 100 mA.

Reset


10-027-01 JSR2A 10A 24AC/DC10-027-03 JSR2A 10A 48 AC10-027-04 JSR2A 10A 115AC10-027-05 JSR2A 10A 230AC


120

74

45

(mm)



JSR3TExpansion relay

Approvals:

Features:

Hardwire selection ofdelay time

Delayed safe outputs

Width 22.5 mm

Supply 24V AC/DCOutput indication

2 x 1 NO relay outputs

Hardwire Selectable Delay0.5 - 10.0 sec by hardwire linksand Time trim potentiometer

Delayed outputs

By connecting the JSR3T expansion relay to a compatibleSafety relay it is easy to obtain safe "delayed" outputs.

The JSR3T provides the system designer with the facilityto hardwire selected time delays in steps between 0.5 and10 seconds.

Use of delayed outputs

There are many applications where delayed outputs are neces-sary and permissible. For example delayed stop signals canbe used for emergency stops according to EN418 § 4.1.5Stop Category 1 (a controlled stop with power to the machineactuator(s) available to achieve the stop and then removal ofpower when stop is achieved). Stop Category 1 may also bepermitted when it is not possible to gain physical access tothe machine before the safe stop is effected e.g. by:

• Covers and Gates which are locked until dangerousoperations and functions have been stopped.

• Long distances between a safety device and dangerousmachine functions.

Using this technique of stopping a machine provides manyadvantages i.e.:• Machines last longer as they are not subjected to excessive

loading etc when requested to stop.• Parts being processed are not damaged.• Restarting machines from stopped position is simpli-

fied.A safe "Soft" stop is achieved by means of a safety relay

giving a programme stop to the machine control system.e.g. when a gate is opened or emergency stop is activated.The output of the Safety relay is used to provide both a stopsignal to the machine control system i.e. via a PLC whichapplies the necessary braking/stopping of the machine in a

controlled way, and to switch a delayed expansion relay e.gJSR3T. The delayed safety outputs of the JSR3T expansionrelay are then used to control the safe disconnection of thepower to the actuators/motors etc. of the machine.

Safety level

The JSR3T has twin stop functions, using two positivelyguided contact relays.

In order to achieve the level of monitoring required the

JSR3T must be used with a suitable Safety Relay e.g.JSBR4, or RT6. The JSR3T test output (terminals X1 andX2) must be connected to the test input of the Safety relaybeing expanded (see connection examples).

The JSR3T provides delay times that even in the event ofan internal fault condition complies with the requirement thatthe set delay cannot increase in time.


The JSR3T is designed and approved in accordance withappropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/

EN ISO 13849-1.

Connection examples


Expansion relay with

delay with:



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Electrical connection – JSR3T

termined by the hardwire link configurationchosen (set by connecting links on the ter-minals Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4.) and the settingof the Time Trim potentiometer.

NOTE 1

Max. time set by hardwire links can only bereduced (up to approx. 30% reduction) byTime Trim potentiometer.

NOTE 2Both the output contacts of K1 and K2 (13- 14 and 23 - 24) must be used. Outputcontacts must be either connected in se-ries (forming one safety output) or used inparallel circuits in order to obtain necessaryredundancy.

When supply voltage is connected to A1 andA2, relays K1 and K2 are activated. Whenthe supply voltage is removed relays K1 andK2 remain energized for a time period de-

Technical description – JSR3T

It is recommended that all switched loads are adequately suppressed and/orfused in order to provide additional protection for the safety contacts.

Selection of time delay by hardwire links (Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4).

Selected delay can be lowered by up to approx. 30% by means of presetpotentiometer on front panel.

Technical data – JSR3TManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Power supply: 24 VAC/DC, 50 - 60 Hz


Relay Outputs: 2 x 1 NO (See Connection examples)

Maximum switching capacity res. load AC: 4A/250VAC/1000 VA



Minimum load: 10mA/10V (if load on contact has not

exceeded 100 mA)

Contact material: AgNi

Max. Input wire res. at nom voltage: 100 Ohm

Response time at activation: <20ms

Response time at deactivation: <0.5 - 10.0 sec. at nom. voltage. Selected delaycan be lowered by up to approx. 30% by meansof preset potentiometer on front panel.




Protection class, enclosure/terminals: IP 40/20 IEC 60529

Operating temperature range: –10°C to +55°C

Air and creep distance:: 4kV/2 IEC 60664-1

LED indication: OutputsWeight: 158 g

Article number/Ordering data:10-017-01 JSR3T 24 AC/DC

82

22.5

99

mm



4:44

HA5400A Connection examples JSBR4 ___________________________________________ 4:45

HA6400A Connection examples JSBT4 ___________________________________________ 4:45

HA6500A Connection examples JSBT5____________________________________________ 4:46

HA6500B Connection examples BT50 ____________________________________________ 4:46

HA6501B Connection examples BT50T ___________________________________________ 4:47

HA6500C Connection examples BT51 ____________________________________________ 4:47

HA6501C Connection examples BT51T ___________________________________________ 4:48

HA7100A Connection examples JSBRT11 _________________________________________ 4:48

HA7600A Connection examples RT6 ______________________________________________ 4:49

HA7600B Principle drawing RT6 _________________________________________________ 4:49

HA7672A Enabling device JSHD4 - EX with RT6 ____________________________________ 4:50

HA7700A Connection examples RT7 ______________________________________________ 4:50

HA7900A Connection examples RT9 ______________________________________________ 4:51HE3811B Safety Light Beam Spot with time-limited reset _____________________________ 4:51

HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s ______________________________ 4:52

HE3824E Lightbeams with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s _____________________________ 4:52

HG7636B Focus light grid/curtain with three-position device __________________________ 4:53

HG7611A Interlocked door with RT6 and pre-reset __________________________________ 4:53

HG7636A Interlocked door with three-position device ________________________________ 4:54

HG7646A Interlocked door with three-position device and time-limited entrance/exit ______ 4:54

HG7654A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR1T _____________________ 4:55

HG7658A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR2A _____________________ 4:55

HG7673A Interlock switch JSNY8 with RT6 ________________________________________ 4:56

HG7674A Safety interlock switch JSNY9M/MLA with RT6 ____________________________ 4:56

HG7674B Safety interlock switch JSNY9S/SLA with RT6 _____________________________ 4:57

HH0000C Three-position device JSHD4 with various safety modules ___________________ 4:57

HI8552A Connection examples JSHT2 intermittent running ___________________________ 4:58

HK7600A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT6 _______________________________________ 4:58

HK7100A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT10 ______________________________________ 4:59

HL7600B Several JSNY7 connected to one RT6 with unique indication _________________ 4:59

HM0000A Magnetic switch JSNY7 with various safety modules ________________________ 4:60

HN7660A Delayed outputs RT6 with output expansion JSR3T and RT7 _________________ 4:60

HP7600A Machine control - Isolation of PLC inputs and outputs _______________________ 4:61

HP7600B Machine control-Isolation of PLC outputs __________________________________ 4:61

HR7200B Focus light curtain/beam _______________________________________________ 4:62

HR7800B Focus lightbeam/curtain ________________________________________________ 4:62HT5400A Two-hand device with safety relay JSBR4 _________________________________ 4:63

HB0008A Focus light curtain/light beam connected to an RT9 with the aid of a M12-3D _____ 4:63

Contents Page



4:45

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HA5400A Connection examples JSBR4

HA6400A Connection examples JSBT4



4:46

HA6500A Connection examples JSBT5

HA6500B Connection examples BT50



4:47

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HA6501B Connection examples BT50T

HA6500C Connection examples BT51



4:48

HA6501C Connection examples BT51T

HA7100A Connection examples JSBRT11



4:49

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HA7600A Connection examples RT6

HA7600B Principle drawing RT6





4:51

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HA7900A Connection examples RT9

HE3811B Safety Light Beam Spot with time-limited reset



4:52

HE3824C Lightbeam with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s

HE3824E Lightbeams with time-limited bypass 0.2–40 s



4:53

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HG7636B Focus light grid/curtain with three-position device

HG7611A Interlocked door with RT6 and pre-reset



4:54

HG7636A Interlocked door with three-position device

HG7646A Interlocked door with three-position device and time-limited entrance/exit



4:55

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HG7654A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR1T

HG7658A Interlocked door with RT6 and output expansion JSR2A



4:56

HG7673A Interlock switch JSNY8 with RT6

HG7674A Safety interlock switch JSNY9M/MLA with RT6



4:57

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HG7674B Safety interlock switch JSNY9S/SLA with RT6

HH0000C Three-position device JSHD4 with various safety modules



4:58

HI8552A Connection examples JSHT2 intermittent running

HK7600A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT6



4:59

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HK7100A Safety mat/Contact strip with RT10

HL7600B Several JSNY7 connected to one RT6 with unique indication



4:60

HM0000A Magnetic switch JSNY7 with various safety modules

HN7660A Delayed outputs RT6 with output expansion JSR3T and RT7



4:61

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HP7600A Machine control - Isolation of PLC inputs and outputs

HP7600B Machine control-Isolation of PLC outputs



4:62

HR7200B Focus light curtain/beam

HR7800B Focus lightbeam/curtain



4:63

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HT5400A Two-hand device with safety relay JSBR4

HB0008A Focus light curtain/light beam connected to an RT9 with the aid of a M12-3D



Light curtains, Light grids,

Light beams and Scanner



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Contents Page

While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information materialJOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the users

responsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national andinternational codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by variousinternational approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustratethe various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not quarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples ina particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the productbased on the examples given. 2008 v02.

Why use light beams/light curtains? ___________________________________5:2

• Reset – 3 alternatives __________________________________________________ 5:4

• Muting _____________________________________________________________ 5:5

• Blanking ____________________________________________________________ 5:5

Light curtain for short safety distance __________________________________5:6

Cycle initiation with light curtain _______________________________________5:7

Safety light curtain and light grid - Focus __________________________________ 5:10

• Summary _________________________________________________________ 5:11

• Technical data _____________________________________________________ 5:12

• Reset ____________________________________________________________ 5:12

• Laser aligner JSRL-3 _________________________________________________ 5:13• Muting with MF-T and MF-L units ________________________________________ 5:13

• Muting with FMC and FMI units _________________________________________ 5:15

Muting sensors – Mute R ___________________________________________ 5:18

Muting sensors – Mute D ___________________________________________ 5:19

Focus stand system - Bjorn _________________________________________ 5:20

Focus Wet ________________________________________________________ 5:22

Blanking programming – BP 1 ______________________________________ 5:23

Connection examples ______________________________________________ 5:24

Safety Light Beam Spot ____________________________________________ 5:32

Laser scanner Look ________________________________________________ 5:36



Why use light gridsand light curtains?

Light beams and light curtains are a production friendly safety component that do notphysically impact on the actions of the machine operator. Light barrier protection is also a

good safety component for use when goods are to be passed in and out of a risk area.

How does a light beam/light curtain

work?Both light grids and light curtains utilise optical transmitterand receiver units. From the transmitters beams of infrared

light are sent to the receiver. When a light beam is interrupteda dual stop signal is given to the dangerous machines insidethe light beam/curtain protected area.

What is the difference between a light

curtain and a light beam?A light curtain has several beams that are placed closelytogether whereas a light grid consists of only one, two,

three or four light beams. The beams are closest on a lightcurtain that is used for finger detection. Then the resolution when used for thigh detection (90mm resolution). For lightgrids the beams are normally placed at a relative distance curtain is often a question of available safety distance, reach



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

What safety requirements are there for a light protection device?High safety demands are stated in the standard demands are on a safe stopping function and that light fromlight sources other than the transmitter or other disturbances do not affect the safety function. Depending on how the safety function is built up thereare safety components of type 2 and 4 to choose between.Type 2 and 4 relates in principle to category 2 and 4 Type 4 which has the highest safety level, states that afault is not allowed to affect the safety function and that the

fault shall be detected by the outputs falling immediately

Light grids for long distances Light grids with monitored by-

passing during material transport

Light curtain for short safety

distances

Light curtain as area

protection

Light curtain to protect during

cycle initiation

Type 2 states that a simple but monitored safety function isrequired, which means that the safety function shall be monitored through periodic tests which break the output when afault occurs. Between the testing times there can though befaults which result in the safety component malfunctioning.The test function can either be built into the safety deviceor an external unit (e.g. the machine´s control system) can

products in the machine directive´s appendix 4, which me

ans that an external certifying procedure with an officiallyrecognised institution is called for.

Light curtain for inner area

limiting



12

A

a

b

B

Button 1 is pressed and afterwards, within a chosentime e.g. 5 seconds, button 2 is pressed for resettingthe light beam.

Reset button with light indication.

A light beam b indicates that the robot is situated in area

A. In this position it is possible to walk in through the gateto area B without stopping the robot.

Reset – 3 alternatives

Supervised manual resetWhen a light beam/light curtain is interrupted it will givea stop signal to dangerous machines within the risk area the machine the light beam/light curtain has to be reset.This is done with the reset button which is placed where itcannot be reached from within the area which is protected. a short circuit nor a component fault shall give automaticreset. When the reset button has been set the outputs are

Automatic reset is used when the light beam is used forarea monitoring. When the light beam is actuated this indicates that e.g. a robot is in the area. The robot is stopped if a person enters the same area e.g. through a gate.When the light beam is free again the control unit will bereset automatically.

Automatic reset

someone is inside the risk area. To reset the light beam(see figure) button 1 must first be pressed and afterwards when one cannot see the entire area that is protected bythe light beam.

Supervised time-reset



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Bypassing may be needed for different reasons. One of themost common reasons for bypassing is during in and outfeeding of material on a conveyor, auto industrial trucks, etc.Another common application is bypassing while passing with Important aspects for bypassing are that it should be safe ,not be activated by mistake and be difficult to defeat. In otherwords it should give a reliable bypassing when a loadingcarrier comes but not allow a human to pass. To achieve thehighest safety level a dual and supervised bypassing systemis needed (usually with at least two independant signals).If this is done with sensors, it is recommended they be ofdifferent kinds, because of the probability of them both malfunctioning for the same reason e.g. common mode failure.An example of a solution is to use a mechanical limit switch To avoid deliberate defeating/ manipulation of the bypassing thereby monitoring that the sensors are both activated anddeactivated in every bypassing cycle. The number of variations in bypassing systems are almost

infinite.This depending on the specific requirements of eachplant/machine. For Focus there are a number of bypassingpossibilities prepared.

Automatic bypassing of light beam when an auto industrial truck passes.

Muting(bypassing)

Blanking (fixed or floating)Blanking, (fixed or floating,) means permanent switchingoff of a number of beams in the protected field of a lightcurtain. This is a function that is permitted and used when anobject that is larger that the resolution of the light curtain ispermanently located in the protected area, without breakingthe safety outputs (OSSD). If the object is removed from theprotected area, the safety outputs are broken.

”Fixed blanking” means that the area that is intentionallyswitched off does not change while the machinery isoperating. Other protected areas remain unaffected, withunchanged resolution.

”Floating blanking” means that the area that is intentionally

switched off can be changed and follow the location of theobject that is being moved around in the protected areawhile the machinery is operating. Other beams are activeand providing normal protection, but often with reducedresolution.

When a “blanking” function is used, it is very important thatthe light curtain provides protection and can detect objectsas small as a finger or hand, depending on the resolution,anywhere outside the area that is rendered inactive becausethe object is there.

It must not be possible to select the “blanking function”without using a key, tool or similar unlocking device.



A light curtain can be used in a machine or a productionplant in the same way as a hatch. There is a great differencethough when it comes to the risk situation. When one has alight curtain installed with a short safety distance in front ofa dangerous machine, there is a high risk for spontaneous dangerous machine movement does not stop during such anengagement, one has a small chance of avoiding injury be Therefore it is of great importance that the whole chainin the stopping circuit is fully dualled and supervised. Evenvalves and contactors which ultimately control dangerous

movements normally have to be doubled up and supervised.

Automatic machinesFor light curtains on automatic machines there shall be areset function which is active when the machine is set forautomatic production whether or not it is a passable protection. After an engagement one must first use a reset functionthen the restart of the cycle should be made with a seperatestarting device. The same reset applies for machines with

Operator protection during manually serviced machinesWith manually operated machines where one or moreoperators pick in and out parts between every cycle. Thistype of application is the most risky because the number ofengagements into the machine´s dangerous area is oftenseveral times per minute.

Light curtains on presses method among press applications and there has since longexisted detailed information on the usage of light curtainson presses. (see next spread for presses)

Safety levelOnly light curtains of type 4 are accepted on presses.

ResetOn the servicing side i.e. the side or sides where there is an

operator that picks in and out parts, there shall be a seperatereset function for the light curtain, usually a button. If thereare several light curtains e.g. on the front and back thereshall be one for each. If the light curtain is actuated during a

dangerous movement the press should not be able to restartwithout being reset. During engagement after the end of thecycle no reset is needed. For a light curtain which is placed as protection on thosesides which are not servicing sides, there shall be a resetbutton which always needs to be activated after an engagement.

Hand resolution

Finger resolution

Light curtain for short safety distance



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Installation – correct and incorrect during cycle initiation

Cycle initiation

that a new cycle starts when you take your hand out from thelight curtain. A cycle is defined as the hand being placed inand taken out once. Usually it is possible to choose between press stroke is started when the light curtain has has been has been actuated twice. The operator thereby operates thepress by the action of putting parts in and out.

Because the press starts without any particular commandthere are some risks involved and therefore many conditionshave to be met before the machine operates. To restrict the usage to smaller presses which cannot be

entered there are the following limitations: The table height not be larger than 600 mm and the table depth may not be seconds after the the end of the cycle, a new cycle shouldnot be accepted without the light beam being again manuallyreset. Note. For machines with cycle initiation, the installation of the light curtain must be in accordance with machineparameters and all relevant standards and regulations.

Correctly installed. The operator cannot reachinto the machine withoutactuating the light curtain.

Incorrect intallation.

Gap below the light curtain.The operator can reach intothe machine without actuating the light curtain.

Incorrect installation. Gapabove the light curtain. Theoperator can reach into themachine without actuating thelight curtain.

Cycle initiation withlight curtain

Correctly installed. mented with a horizontallight curtain to detectthe operator.

Installation of light curtain

trapping/crushing risk without actuating the light curtain.The most important thing is that there are no gaps under,on the sides and over the top during cycle operation. Thelower edge of the light curtain must therefore be slightlybelow the press table edge. Also if it is open above the lightcurtain the height must be adapted so that it is not possible physical adjustment possibilities must be limited so that nogaps can occur.

Between the light curtains protection area and mechanical from standing there. In practise to acheive this demand and therequired safety distance one usually has to complement withe.g. additional mechanical protection or additional horizontally solution could be a lying or an angled light curtain.



Safety distance - light curtain according to EN999

The safety distance ’S’ is a minimum distance betweena light curtain and a dangerous area. The safety distance shall guarantee that a person is not able to reach adangerous machine part before the machine movementhas stopped. This is calculated with the formula from with concern to the speed in which the body approachesthe risk area.

Calculation of safety distances for vertical and horizontal installation accordingto EN999

S = safety distance in mm mm above the groundH2 = the upper beam may not be situated lower than 900 mmabove the ground

S = safety distance in mmH = the light curtain field must be positioned between 0 and1000 mm above the floor

S = safety distance in mmK = body/part of body (e.g. hand) speed in mm/sT = T1 + T2whereT1 = the safety device´s reaction time in secondsT2 = the machine´s reaction time in seconds

sion towards the risk area before the safety device hasbeen actuated.

The safety distance for vertical installation

For S ≤ 500 mm the safety distance is calculated

with the following formula:

where d is the light curtain´s resolution in mm.

K here is 2000 mm/s which represents the speed of

If the safety distance according to the formula

above gets larger than 500 mm one can insteaduse:

K is1600 mm/s which represents the speed of the body.

The safety distance for horizontal installation is

calculated with the following formula:

where H is the safety field´s height above the reference

plane , e.g. the ground

on the resolution, d, that the light curtain has, there is aminimum height that the safety field may be placed. This iscalculated with: one can therefore install the light curtain from H = 0 andup. The higher it is situated, the shorter the safety distancegets. The highest permissable height H of the safety fieldis 1000 mm. When you use a horizontal light curtain as entry protec to prevent people from inadvertently stepping over it. Theestimated safety distance is measured from the machine’shazardous section to the outermost beam of the horizontal

light curtain (seen from the machine).

Resolution for finger

( ≤14 mm) gives C = 0



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Safety distances for new and old presses

New presses

ments from the standards EN 692 EN 693

The same requirements apply for vertical installation onpresses as with vertical installation on other machines with

Other manually serviced machines

The rules for presses may well be applied to other machineswhich function in a similar way and that have the same risksituation. There is no other standard which is as detailed onthe usage of light curtains.For cycle initiation the light curtains resolution, d, must be≤ presses.

Old presses

N.B. For old presses there are different rules for eachcountry.

Safety distance for light beams according to EN999

For light beams the safety distance is calculated

from the following:

is the risk assessment that decides the number of beamsthat are to be chosen. The following possibilities must beconsidered.

To fulfill the requirements the beams should be installed at

the following heights:

Number of beams Height over the reference

plane, e.g. ground

4

2 400, 900

Resolution,

d, (mm)

Safety distance

addition, C (mm)

Cycle

initiation

≤ 14 0

>14 20 80

>20

40 240 Not

permitted>40



Focus

Safety Light Grids andSafety Light Curtains

Approvals:

Type 2 or 4 according to EN61496

Flexible assembly

Time reset

Fixed / floating blanking

in the same safety circuit with

category 4 according to

Application:

Optical protection in an

opening or around a risk area

Features:

A light grid/light curtain with many

possibilities

The Focus units are light grids/curtains with safety func tions intended for applications where it is of great importance to protect persons from a dangerous machine, robotor other automated systems where it is possible to accessto a dangerous area. Focus creates a protection field with infrared beams. Ifany beam is interrupted the safety mechanism is triggered and the dangerous machine is stopped. Focus fulfills (Focus 2 series) and type 4 (Focus 4 series) according to are included in the light curtain profiles. External connec Synchronization between transmitter and receiver is achieved optically. No electrical connection between the units is formation on the status and alignment of the light curtain via

Muting and Override included in all Focus

Focus light grids/curtains and is enabled directly when an or more segments or the whole light curtain can be bypassed during in and out passage of material.

tion which makes it possible to bypass the light grid/curtain

i.e. activate the outputs if a machine start is necessary evenif one or more light beams are interrupted. This is the casewhen the muting function is chosen and the A and B inputsare activated. If for example during the muting operation aloading pallet has stopped inside the safety field after a voltage loss, the override function is used to enable the palletto be driven clear.

Floating blanking or fixed blanking

It is also possible to obtain the Focus light grids/curtainswith either ”floating blanking or fixed blanking”. Floatingblanking makes it possible to ’disconnect’ a defined number of beams from the safety field. The object is then free

to move in the safety field without the safety function beingtriggered. During ”fixed blanking” the object is not able tomove in the safety field. The other beams are active withnormal resolution.



Fx-14-zzz Fx-35-zzz Fx-K(L)4-zzz Fx-K(L)3-800 Fx-K(L)2-500 Fx-KL2-500D Fx-K1C-500/LD

14 35 300/400 400 500 500 500

150

300

450

600

750

900

1050

1200

1350

1500

1650

150

300

450

600

750

900

1050

1200

1350

1500

1650

900

1200800 500 500 500

0,2-6 0,2-15

0,5-50

4-50

0,2-25

0,5-50

4-50

0,2-25

0,5-50

4-50

0,2-25

0,5-50

0,2-25

0,2-6/0,5-12

15 - 45 14 - 26 14 14 14 14 14

¤1 ¤1 ¤1 ¤1 ¤1 ¤1 ¤1

¤2 ¤2

¤2

¤2

¤3 ¤3 ¤3 ¤3 ¤3 ¤3 ¤3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Focus light gridStandard:

four beams. Supervised output formuting lamp. Override.

KL2-500D: Light grids for tough environments with two

parallel beams of light for improved reliability.

Focus light curtainStandard:

Supervised output for muting lamp. Over

Option: Fixed or Floating blanking.

Muting-unit MF-T with four beams connecteddirectly to the bottom of a light grid with aM12-connection. The entire T-unit is thenconnected with an M12-connection on the

muting-unit.

Summary - Focus light curtain/grid, Type 2 (F2-) and 4 (F4-)

FMC-Focus Muting Connector with

M12 connectionStandard:

with indication, override and safety outputs.

Muting-unit for Focus

Standard:

The unit is connected directly to the light

Standard ¤¹ When ordering add ”L” ¤² When ordering add ”B” ¤ With Tina 10A/10B/10C or FMC-TinaNote!

Type (x) X=2 or 4

Resolution (mm)

Safety field

height (mm=zzz)

Other heights on request

Range (m)

type 2 K

type 4 K

type 4 KL

Reaction time (ms)

Manual reset

Automatic reset

Time reset

Muting inputs (bypassing)

Supervision of muting-lamp

Override

MF-T

MF-L

Floating Blanking

Fixed BlankingDyn. adaption to Vital



Focus consists of two units, a transmitter unit and a receiver unit. All the optical units are scanned regularly so thatall objects that are placed between the transmitter and thereceiver will be detected. If any light beam is interrupted, the dangerous machinemovement will be stopped by the outputs from the lightcurtain. The reaction time for the Focus varies from 14 ms

transmitter show the status of the light curtain/grid.

Reset - Focus

On every Focus there are inputs for reset and other

functions:

when muting is used.)

Reset possibilities

Automatic reset puts are closed directly. (Setting when delivered).

Manual reset light field is free and the reset button has been actuated.

LED information - Focus

The LED´s in the receiver indicate the following:

rupted

there is dirt on the light curtain´s front glass.Is flashing during normal operation when the OSSD

voltage.

The LEDs in the transmitter indicate the following:

voltage.

ing correctly.

Is flashing or is turned off during an error in thetransmitter.

Note!

Safety outputs OSSD 1 and OSSD2

load to be switched is alternating current or requires a hig and Tina 10A/10B converts the outputs to a dynamic signal

Time reset wards within 8 seconds a reset button outside the riskarea must be actuated.

Choice of reset

switches in the Focus receiver. On delivery the Focus is setfor automatic reset.

Function description

Technical data – FocusManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Supply voltage:

Power consumption: 10 W max (transmitter and receiver connected)

Wavelength on transmitter LED:

Profile dimensions:

Protection class:

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature: -

Outputs:

Max. load:

Response time:

Connection transmitter:

Connection receiver:

Indication: power supply

Enclosure: Aluminium painted yellow

Certified to standard:



Focus

Focus

www.jokabsafety.com 5:13

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

M12 connectionbetween Focusand MF-T

M12 to control cabinet

out/in from

risk area

Alternative 1

out from

risk area

Alternative 2

same profile as Focus.

directly to the Focus receiver unit.

Muting-lamp

In the Focus receiver unit it is also possible to directly con

Conditions for muting

muting input B for muting to be possible.

in the same profile type as the Focus light grid/curtain. Noadditional sensors are required because the muting units

Muting with MF-T and MF-L unitsMF-T (Diagram 1)

as shown. They are configured for installations where material is transported ”in” or ”out” or in both directions ”inand out”.

NOTE. All standard Focus light grids/curtains are delivered

MF-L (Diagram 2)

ted before exiting through the light grid/curtain. The lightgrid/curtain being bypassed just prior to the exit of the material.

NOTE. port ”out” of a working area. The standard Focus light grid/ version. They need to be ordered separately together with

MF-T Reflex (Alternative 3) terial into and/or out of hazardous areas. For other functions

MF-L Reflex (Alternative 4)

terial into and/or out of hazardous areas. For other functions

Muting (bypassing) - Focus

Facilitates alignment of light beams or light curtains, particularly when the solution involves one or more mirrors. The tape around the transmitter and receiver unit, which mustbe located so that the flat rear of the unit is up against thefront glass of the light curtain. When the laser aligner isswitched on the red laser spot must be visible, if appro priate via a mirror, at the corresponding unit.

ged by unscrewing the bottom end lid.

Laser aligner JSRL-3

Alternative 3(Alternative 4)



A1B1

d2 = 260 mm

D = 300 mm

Examples on how the muting sensors can be placed

A solution with Focus Muting unit MF-T with integrated muting sensors.

A solution with Focus Muting unit MF-L with integrated muting sensors

NOTE. the muting sensors A and B must be placed so sensor B.

D: indicates the minimum length of the material that isto actuate the muting sensors that must be maintainedduring the passage through the light grid/curtain.

This solution shall only be used for movement out from a risk area.

Risk area

Risk area



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Various FMC, FMI, FRM- versions and Tina units

Muting with FMC and FMI units

The FMC Focus Muting Connector, is a small, optimalunit which is used when the Focus light grid/curtain is re

quired to be bypassed for in and out passage to and from

The FMI Focus Muting Indicator, is a small unit with

connection.

(A+B), reset, power off and muting

instead of muting lamp.

muting lamp.

Tina 10A: adapter unit for connection of Vital

outside the enclosure.

relay outputs (and power feed).

nector with muting resistor.



Connection of Focus and muting components with FMC-1 and FMI-1

Ex 1. placed in (by) the control cabinet.

Ex 2. from the risk area.

Connection of Focus and muting components directly to the control cabinet

tor can see the protected area during reset, testing, andbypassing. It should not be possible to reach the buttonfrom within the risk area.

shall be placed so that it can be seen from all directionsfrom where it is possible to access the dangerous area

sor receivers should be assembled on the light curtain´stransmitter side to minimise the interference risk.

caused by damage on the transmitter cable and/or thereceiver cable. However, we recommend that the cablesbe protected so that physical damage to them can be

minimised.

M12-connection device with screw connectors

photocells

photocells

Test & resetbuttons

cables

lamp

Supplycable

cable



AS

B

d3

d4

A1B1S

A2B2

d2

D

D

d1d1 < 200mm

d2 > 250mmD=(d1x2)+d2+40

A1B1S

B2 A2

d2

D

D

d1d1 < 200mmd2 > 250mmD=(d1x2)+(d2x2)+40

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Muting with Mute R and Mute D

A solution with two sensors (here photocells) and one (or two) movement directions for material transport:

A solution with four sensors and one movement direction for material transport:

A solution with four sensors and two movement directions for material transport:

D: indicates the minimum length on the material that is to actuate the muting sensors that must be maintained during the passage through the light grid/curtain.

d1 must be as short as possible, and definitely less than 200 mmd2: indicates the distance between A1 and B1

d4 the least possibleS = dafety light curtain/light beam





1

2

4

1

4

2

l

l

www.jokabsafety.com 5:19

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Muting sensors – Mute D

Electronically adjustablebackground rejection

indicator

verse polarity protection ression

Features:

Technical dataManufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Output

Connection

Range adjustment Yes

Range (depending on material) 0.2... 0.8 m

Light source

Supply voltage

Allowable ripple S

Current consumption (without load)

Max. load current 200 mA

Residual voltage <1,6 V

Max. switching frequency 200 Hz

Protection class

Operating temperature

Weight

All technical data at 25° C and 24V.

Connector M12

4

PNP output

2

1 Function indicator

Light-on output:

Output energized when object is present.

Dark-on output:

Output energized when no object is present.



Bjorn is a very stable and flexible stand systemin which Focus safety light beams and mirrorsare mounted in the stand. The fixings for the mirrors in the stand can be turned to provide eithervertical or horizontal angles. The robust materialof the Bjorn protects Focus units from direct collisions, and thus prevents unnecessary materialdamage and halts in production.

Bjorn is available in stock as a standard versionfor dual safety light beams. Bjorn versions can

BjornA strong support for light gridsand mirrors

grids and mirror

Application:

Adjustable

Features:

Transmitter

Bjorn N2

Bjorn H2horizontal

Bjorn V2vertical



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Bjorn N222-041-45

Bjorn N322-041-46

Bjorn N4-122-041-47

Bjorn N4-222-041-48

Bjorn N522-041-49

Bjorn H222-041-40

Bjorn H322-041-42

Bjorn H4-122-041-43

Bjorn H4-222-041-44

Bjorn V222-041-41

Technical data - BjornManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


H = Horizontal reflectionV = Vertical reflectionN = Floor stand for Focus

Colour:

Material:

Dimensions: Foot

Weight:H2, V2 och N2

17 kg/st20 kg/st27 kg/st

Protection against water and dust

for Focus light curtains and lightbeams ≤



Focus-Wet

Wet is used for protection against water (or dust)where extreme washing conditions are encounte enables Focus light curtains and light beams tobe used for such applications as the food industrywhere the use of high pressure washing for cleaningmachinery often occurs. The draining and throughventilation capabilities mean that condensation

can be avoided.Wet, with Focus light curtains or light beams, is

During installation on a machine a Wet unit can angle bracket. The plastic tube is rotatable andthe outside is easy to clean.

dust for Focus light curtains and

light beams

Technical data – WetManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


Colour: Transparent plastic

Length including lid: light curtain/light beam + 66 mmMaterial:Tube

LidAngle bracket

Stainless steel

Max. ambient temperature:

Installation adjustment

Protection rating

environments

Application:

tube

through ventilation

Features:

gland



A switch at the cable connection of the lightcurtain receiver enables a choice of whether ablanking function and if so which is to be used.Once this choice has been made, programming

of the unit in the light field is made easy by using object in the protected field then changes, the lightcurtain can be reprogrammed, only 11 seconds been pressed.

cable to the light curtain receiver unit, using the cable.

The unit can be fitted during operation.

Blanking programmer BP1



HR7000E-01 Focus - Connection with pre-reset function

HR7000C-01 Focus - Connection without and with muting function



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HR7000F-01 Focus - Connection with muting to safety relay

HR7000G-01 Focus - Connection with MF-T/MF-L units



HR7000I-01 FMC

HR7000H-01 Focus - Connection with FMC/Tina Interface



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HR7000J-01 FMC-1 or FMC-1 Tina with muting sensors and reset unit

HR7000K-01 FMC-1 or FMC-1 Tina connected with Pre Reset



HR7000L-01 Tina 10A, 10B and 10C connection example

HR7000M FRM-1 - Changing OSSD outputs to relay contacts



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

HR7000P Cable connection example

HR7000O-01 Connection example FMC/FMI



HR7000Q Cable connection example

HR7000S Focus; Muting with the aid of Pluto, FMC and a transfer cable



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Focus - Certificates



* *

10 m

10 m

Spot Approvals:

Features:

Safety level Type 4 accordingto EN 61496

Versatile mounting

Bypassing possibility

other different safety devices inthe same safety circuit at cate

Safety Light Beam

pulsetransmission

not need to be the same as connected to the Vital.

Vital Safety module can accomodate upto 6 Spot systems.

A light beam for the highest safety level

The light beam is available in two versions Spot 10 for dis beams can be mounted at different heights and be angledaround a machine using our mirrors and brackets. to EN 61496. Several light beams, Eden sensors and emergency stops can be connected in series achieving the highsafety level for the safety circuit. A number of solutions forbypassing of light beams for material transport are available. the receiver which indicate ’contact’ between transmitterand receiver and safety status. The ’contact’ information isavailable via the light beam receiver connection cables.

FunctionThe Spot light beam is supervised by the Vital safety mo sent out from the control unit to the transmitter (Spot T). safety output contacts to permit dangerous machine mo be produced by light from other sources, interference orfaults in components in the transmitter or receiver. The lightbeam is dynamically supervised which means that if the

signal stops pulsating at the correct frequency it is immediately detected. By means of coding, the dynamic signalcan pass between up to 6 pairs of transmitters and recei vers, with only one pair needing to be electrically connected to a Vital.

Application:

entrance or around a risk area

*



1100

700

900

400

mm

T

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Mounting and alignment – Spot

Safety distanceThe basic principle is that dangerous machine movementsshould be stopped before a person reaches the dangerous When determining the correct safety distance the stoppingtime of the machine and the risk level must be taken into mation.

Accessories and MountingThe Spot light beam can be mounted using a variety ofbrackets, posts and mirrors. See ordering list for furtherinformation.

AlignmentWhen aligning the light beam, look towards the transmitter.In the lens will be seen a strong red light. When this lightis seen from the receiver (via mirrors if fitted) the light beam the receiver is aligned with the transmitter. By moving thetransmitter up/down and left/right the best alignment can

be found. When vertically mounting, (as shown in the diagram) thereceiver should be mounted above the transmitter as this willsimplify the alignment and minimise the risk of extraneous ments the received light can be adjusted by a screw on the can be made on the transmitter. To make the alignment even The laser has visible light (class IIa) and is easy to mount for

NOTE! do not look directly intothe laser. Observe all necessary precautions when usinglaser devices, failing to do so can result in eye damage.

Mounting heights for 2 or 3 light beams.

Different sizes of mirrors, mounting brackets and profilesare available. See component ordering list.

Note. Every mirror reduces the sensing distance of the beam

Laser aligner JSRL2 forlight beam Spot T/R.

JSM64

Pivot M18 bracket for Spot 10or MUTE R (FSTR1) for example



Connection of Spot T/R to Vital1



Safety level with Vital/Pluto(according to EN 61496) Type 4

Safety category together withVital/Pluto (according toEN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1) 4

Power supply

Current consumption Transmitter:Info. output

+10 mA max.

Light source

Optical power Spot10:

< 0,1 mW< 0,2 mW

Function indication

On:

Flashing:

Off:

Alignment ok, safety circuitclosedAlignment ok, earlier safetycircuit openBeam interrupted, safety circuitopen

Protection class

Range Spot 10

Installation

Spot 10:

Either via mounting holes in the

casing or with angle bracket

Operating temperature range o o

Cable connection

Casing Material

Spot 10:

Steel housing with polyacryl lensprotection. cryl lens protection.

Colour Spot 10:

Steel greyYellow/black

Weight

Spot 10:

2 x 21g2 x 100 g

Connections

Transmitter: Brown (1)White (2)

White (2)

Black (4)

Dynamic signal in

Dynamic signal outInfo output

0

Spot 10 T/R

61

Spot 35T/R

mm67



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Vital 1 with 2 light beams Spot

Vital 1 with 3 lightbeams Spot


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 202/395www.jokabsafety.com5:365:36

Technical Data Article number/Ordering

data

General dataScanning rate:Scanning angle:Operating voltage:Transmitter: Angle resolution:Weight:Housing:

2 kg

Personnel protection field

Scanning distance:Area:

Output:

input

70 mm at 4 m80 ms

Warning field

Scanning distance:Area:

Output:

input

80 ms

Contour measurement

Output: Suitable interface safety relay:

80 ms manual or automatic

Look Laser scanner

Easy to install

sparks/arcs

Easy to program

4 individual programmable

Application:

several risk areas

Features:

A laser scanner that has the ability to scanfour individual areas

individual areas. Each area can be programmed individually that need to operate along different paths. The safety level as personnel protection in robot working areas, conveyorequipment etc. The small design makes it easy to install.

welding arcs/sparks. The protection fields are quick and four individual programmable protection areas. Each areaconsists of one personnel protection field with maximum 4 additional sensors.

Approvals:



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Software - Look scannerFunction buttons Dialog box for selecting

which area pair to displayInactive safeguarded

Warning indication,an object is inside thesafeguarded area

An object is detectedinside the detection area,the machine stops

Active safeguadred area pair 1 Green: Safeguarded area

Connection example - Look scanner with RT9



Smart

www.jokabsafety.com

Stopping time andmachine diagnosis tool



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information materialJOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the usersresponsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national andinternational codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by variousinternational approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustratethe various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not quarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples ina particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the productbased on the examples given. 2008 v02.

Contents Page

Stopping time _______________________________________________________6:2

Stopping time and Machine Diagnosis Tool - Smart ______________________6:3

Smart Manager _____________________________________________________6:4

Smart and accessories _______________________________________________6:6


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 206/3956:2 www.jokabsafety.com

Why measure stopping time?

Stopping time

— to find out which safety arrangements can be used in a certain area

around a machine, and where they should be located.

Stopping timeThe safety distance (how far away from the risk area a safetycomponent must be placed) is based upon the machines stop-ping time. The basic idea is that a safety component shouldbe placed so far from the risk area that it is not possible toenter the area before the machine has stopped.

The stopping time for manually operated machines is espe-cially important when light beams and light curtains are usedas safety components. By reflex action the operator tries tograb or adjust if something has gone wrong in the machinetool, even if the machine has started. It is then imperative thatthe machine stops before the hand reaches the risk area.A short stopping distance is also of importance for gettinggood ergonomics.

Grabbing or adjusting is also common when using auto-matic machines. Usually this is done to prevent productiondown-time by quickly adjusting a work piece. The stoppingtime is also of great importance if someone trips and fallsinto the machine.

Stopping time, walking speed (1.6 m/s) and hand speed(2.0 m/s) is used for the calculation of safety distances.Sometimes a fixed minimum distance is also used. Seethe standard EN 999 for more details on the calculation ofsafety distances.

Stopping distanceFor safety contact strips it is extra important that the stop-ping distance is monitored. An incorrect stopping distancecould in many cases result in very high risks. The stoppingdistance is also needed during area limiting e.g. for robotswhen dividing the working area into sectors.

For door sensitive edges, it is important that the stopping dis-tance is shorter than the soft part of the sensitive edge.

Regulations and standardsIt is also important to measure the stopping time, to meet therequirements set by the machinery standards, directives andregulations. Here we can help, with our long experience in

the practical application of regulations and standards, fromthe viewpoints of both the authorities and production. In ad-dition we collaborate with the standardisation committeesresponsible for producing these standards. One example isthe revision of EN 999, which deals with the placing of safety

devices around a machine based on its stopping time. Whenit is complete, this standard will become EN ISO 13855. Thestandard is general for all types of machinery, although for

some, where there is a harmonised C standard, the require-ments for minimum distance and stopping time measurementwill apply. In the case for example of mechanical press toolsthere is also a requirement in EN 692 for how stoppingtime measurements are to be performed, and in the case ofhydraulic press tools this is in EN 693.

Annual checksWear in a machine is something that can affect braking andmotors, which means that the stopping time of a machinecan change with time. Certain other changes in a machine,such as changing the weight of a workpiece or alterations inpneumatic pressure, can also affect the stopping time. For

these and other reasons it is important to perform an annualcheck on the stopping time.

How the stopping time affects the choice of protective

equipment – an exampleThere was a case where we measured the stopping time ofthe rollers in a textile industry company. The company hadplanned to place light beams or a light curtain in front of therollers to prevent the operators from being caught in thematerial and dragged in. The stopping time measurementshowed that it took over one second for the rollers to stop.During this time the material was pulled in by almost twometres. In order to obtain sufficient protection distance, the

light beams would have needed to be positioned almostthree metres from the machinery, and a light curtain abouttwo metres away. The factory did not have so much space,nor was it realistic. The solution became instead verticalsliding safety barriers.

Where the safety distance is small, one can for example sit close

to the machine and work, as in the picture on the left. If the safety

distance is greater, it may be necessary to approach the machine

to intervene, and also perhaps use additional protection to prevent

starting when someone is within the protected distance.


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 207/395www.jokabsafety.comwww.jokabsafety.com 6:3

Smart

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Approvals:Stopping time and Machine

Diagnosis Tool

Features:

Smart shows graphs/values for:

Stopping time

Stopping distance

Speed

Position of stopping signal

Easy to use

Measurements with or with-

out electrical connection

Ideal for machine perform-ance diagnosis

Calculation of correct safetydistances

Smart is ideal for safety supervision and for

diagnosis of machine operation

Smart has many valuable features for machine diagnosis:• Graphic presentation of measurements• Easy to analyse stopping characteristics and movement• Gives parameters for safety design (e.g. stop time)• Calculates minimum allowed safety distance• Shows how the stop distance can be optimised• Electrical reaction time and mechanical/hydraulic breaking can be identified and analysed• Digital in/out signals and analogue inputs

Smart is perfect for periodic monitoring of safety parametersand other conditions for the maintenance and trouble-shoot-

ing of machines. Because Smart can compare old and newgraphs, it becomes easy to find out the reasons for machinemalfunctions. One can also supervise machines during opera-tion and compare how they perform over time.

Stopping units and sensors

Smart is a further development of our well established JSSM1Stopping Analyser. All the stopping units and sensors forthe JSSM1 can also be used with Smart. The amount ofconnection possibilities have also increased. Smart has 9digital I/O, one input for an incremental sensor (for positionand speed) and two analogue inputs. This makes it easy tomeasure sequences in conjunction with motion lapse andother analogue values.

Webbsupport - Smart

On our web site http://customer.jokabsafety.com wehave a special page for you as a Smart customer.Here you can keep up to date by downloading the latestversion of Smart Manager, manuals, drive routines orread the FAQs.



Smart Manager Smart is controlled in real time by a computer using the Smart Managerprogram. This performs measurements, and the measured data can besaved and analysed. The measurements are saved in an SQL database,

with the ability to export data to Microsoft Excel if necessary. The programcalculates the stopping time and protective distance, and can print out theresults, together with a graph of the event sequence. Smart Manager isavailable in several languages: English, Swedish, Danish, German, French,Czech and Polish. Translation into other languages can easily be arrangedas necessary. The program is free, and is available for downloading fromour web site when purchasing equipment to measure stopping times.

System requirements

Windows XP/2000/Me/NT100 MB free dsk spacePentium II 233 MHz128 MB RAM

Start menu

• Current values from sensors and the system

• Start conditions

• Stop signal conditions

• Shutdown conditions

• Measuring settings can be saved

Calculations

• Min., max. and average value and

standard deviation from a series of

measurements

• Protective distance can be calculated

Measured

result

Measuring

form

Stop signalgiven

Relay contactsdrop out

Machinestopped

Simple program structure

Shows the entire stop sequenceProvides a machine movement“fingerprint”

Compares measurements

Calculates stopping time

Saves measurements to adatabase

Exports measured data to Excel

Prints out a complete

measurement report

• Stop time data

• Zoom control

• Own cursors

Benefits:


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 209/395www.jokabsafety.comwww.jokabsafety.com 6:5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Printout

Printing out is one of the most important functions of the program. Here is shown all the vital information about the mea-surements that is needed for such items as annual checking or providing the basis for CE labelling of a machine. Sincethe entire measuring sequence is shown in graphical format, one can understand why the stopping time has a certainvalue and also, in some cases, see what needs to be done to minimise the stopping time. The graph also acts as a kind of“fingerprint" of the machine movements, which means that different measurements can be compared with each other tosee how the stopping sequence varies from time to time, or from year to year. In this way the effects of e.g. worn brakesor the effect on the machine control system can be seen. In order to get a complete basis from a measurement it is alsoimportant to state what assumptions have been made and what conditions applied when deciding when and how the stopsignal was given.

Among other things, the stop signal details the person measuring, the measuring equipment, the machinery, the calcula-tions and the protective distance. The printout also has a replaceable company logo and a field for extra information.

Conversion of analogue signals

Smart can measure and show graphs for two different analogue sensors at the sametime, with its inputs for 0/4-20 mA. Conversion of the measured current values can bedone automatically by setting minimum and maximum values and the units for the inputs.In this way, for example, the results from an analogue pressure sensor can be shown andcalculated as 0-400 bar instead of 4-20 mA, or an analogue load cell as 0-2 kN. This alsomeans that if it is desired for the system to be triggered at a certain force, that force canbe defined instead of needing to calculate the equivalent current value.

Saving

• Select measurement series

• State extra information, e.g.the conditions and specialcircumstances for the mea-

surements.

Archiving

• Search filter

• Saved measurements

• Exported measurements



Smart LoggerThe Smart Logger is the principal unit fordata collection. The logger has a USBconnection to the PC and 8 off M12 con-nections: one for the power supply to theI/O, one connection for an incrementalsensor, two connections for analoguesensors and four connections for other

I/O signals.The Logger encapsulation is watertight,with M12 connections to prevent theentry of particles and fluids in the work-shop environment. To prevent the SmartLogger from being damaged by incorrectcurrents and voltages from externalequipment, all inputs and outputs, andexternal units, are electrically isolatedfrom the processor in the Smart Loggerby means of opto-couplers.

Manufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-01 Smart Logger

Dimensions: 62 x 220 x 80 mm. (wxhxd)

Weight: 0.5 kg

Protection class: IP 67

Supply voltage: 24 VDC

Response speed: max 1 ms

Positional accuracy: +/- 0.1 mm

Digital I/O: 8 inputs, 4 outputs (NPN OC)

Analogue inputs: 2 off, 0/4-20 mA

Encoder: 1 connection for a pulse sensor

SM2 Button unitThe SM2 is used in conjunction with theSmart Logger for measuring with a manualstop impulse, without an electricalconnection to the machine. When an SM2is, for example, pressed against anemergency stop button to stop themachine, the SM2 sends a signal to theSmart Logger to start the measurement.An LED on the SM2 lights when thedesired stop position is reached. The SM2is connected to the Smart Logger by anM12 connection.


Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-02 SM2 Button unit

Dimensions: Size: 50 x 100 x 25 mm. (wxhxd)

Weight: 0.2 kg

Application area: Two-handed control unit, Emergencystop, etc.

Supply voltage: Fed from the Smart Logger

SM3 Relay unitThe SM3 is used in conjunction with theSmart Logger for automatic stoppingtime measurements at the set position, oralternatively a manual stop pulse. When astop signal comes from the Smart Loggera relay switches in the SM3.The SM3 then sends a signal to theSmart Logger to start measuring, andalso activates the relay outputs to stopthe machine. The relay in the SM3 isreset via the software when a newmeasurement is to be made. The SM3is connected to the Smart Logger by an

M12 connection.


Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-03 SM3 Relay unit

Dimensions: 85 x 72 x 49 mm. (wxhxd)

Weight: 0.2 kg

Application area: Electrical connection providing a stoppulse.


Relay outputs: 2 NO, 2 NC, 6A/250 VAC.

Encoder: 1 connection for a pulse sensor

SM11 Flag unitThe Smart Logger is used in conjunctionwith the SM11 for automatic measure-ments of the stopping time and stoppingdistance. The unit is located in a lightcurtain with the flag parallel to the beam.When the flag is activated, the lightbeam/light curtain is interrupted, and themachine stops. The SM11 is connectedto the Smart Logger by an M12 con-nection.


Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-11 SM11 Flag unit

Dimensions: 145 x 85 x 37 (wxhxd). Shaft ø3 x 45 mm

Weight: 0.6 kg

Application area: Ligh curtain, light beam


Batteries: 10 rechargeable 1.2 V NiMH batteries.Total 12 V

Power: Max 1200 mAh (approx. 200 operations).Temperature: 0 to +45°C.

Installation: On a table or a standard ¼” cameratripod

Charger: SM14

Smart and accessories



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

SM7 Rotation sensorThe SM7 is an incremental sensor forconnection to a Smart Logger. Thesensor detects rotational movement viaa wheel rolling against a shaft. The standsecures the sensor with the aid of justone knob. The stand itself is secured tothe machine by a powerful magnetic foot.The SM7 is connected to the Smart Log-

ger by an M12 connection.


Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-07 SM7 Rotation sensor

Dimensions: Sensor size: 46 x 40 x 59 (wxhxd)Stand size: Extended, approx. 400 x 50 x90 (wxhxd)

Weight: 1.7 kg including stand

Application area:: Rotating motion, e.g. lathes, rollers


Max speed: 5 m/s

Resolution: 0.1 mm

Wheel circumference: 125 mm

SM13 Battery pack SM13 is a battery pack for the SmartLogger, which makes the Smart acompletely mobile measuring tool. Withthe SM13 you don’t need to connect theLogger to a wall socket for power, andcan easily move it from one machine to

another when you are measuring. Sincethe SM13 battery pack is the samephysical size as the SM11 flag unit, itfits snugly into the SM9 carrying case.The charger for the SM13 is called theSM14 and provides a charging time ofabout 3 hours 15 minutes (2100 mAh).The SM14 also acts as afast charger forthe SM11.


Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-23 SM13 Battery pack

Dimensions: 145 x 85 x 37 mm (LxWxH)

Weight: 0.8 kg


Connector: Negative pole at the centre of the char-ging connector

Current rating: Maximum 0.9A

Power: 2100 mAh. With normal use lastsabout 10-12 hours. (Higher capacity onrequest.)

Batteries 20 rechargeable 1.2 V NiMH batteries ofsize AA(R06). Total 24 V

SM9 Carrying caseThe SM9 is a practical carrying case withpockets to suit the various Smart units.

Part of the protective foam insert in thelid of the case can be removed to makeroom for a laptop computer, so that allthe equipment required can be carried ina single case.


Article number/Ordering data: 70-300-09 SM9 Carrying case

Dimensions: 535 x 155 x 430 mm (LxWxH)

Weight: 3.5 kg

SM5 1250/2500 Linear sensorThe SM5 is an incremental pulse sensorfor connection to a Smart Logger. Thesensor is protected by a robust enclo-sure. The sensor and end of the cableare secured to the machine by powerfulmagnets. The SM5 is connected to theSmart Logger by an M12 connection.


Article number/Ordering data: SM5/1250: 70-300-04 Linear sensorSM5/2500: 70-300-05 Linear sensor

Dimensions: SM5/1250: 106 x 88 x 100 mm (wxhxd)SM5/2500: 114 x 125 x 116 mm (wxhxd)

Weight: SM5/1250: 1 kgSM5/2500: 1.4 kg

Application area: Linear movement, e.g. press tools


Max length: 1250 or 2500 mm

Max speed: 5 m/s

Resolution: 0.1 mm

Other accessoriesName Article number Description

SM6 70-300-06 AC/DC converter for Smart

SM14 70-300-24 Charger for flag unit SM11 andbattery pack SM13.

USB cable 70-300-15 USB cable for communication withcomputer

Encoder adapter 70-300-13 Adapter for old type JSSM sensor

Stop unit adapter 70-300-14 Adapter for old type JSSM stop units

Extension cables 20-056-20, 20-056-21, 20-056-22,20-056-23 and 20-056-24

Jokab Safety's extension cables with 5conductors ideal for all Smart accessories



Sensors and switches



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information material,JOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions, and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the usersresponsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national andinternational codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by variousinternational approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustratethe various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples ina particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the productbased on the examples given. 2008 v02.

Contents Page

Why should you use sensors/switches? _________________________________7:2

How safe is a switch/sensor? _________________________________________7:3

Non-contact safety sensor Eden _______________________________________7:4

Safety Interlock switch JSNY5 _________________________________________7:8

Magnetic Switch JSNY7 ____________________________________________ 7:10

Safety Interlock Switch JSNY8 _______________________________________ 7:12

Safety Interlock Switch JSNY9 _______________________________________ 7:14

Magnetic lock Magne ______________________________________________ 7:16

Process lock Dalton ________________________________________________ 7:20

Safety lock Knox___________________________________________________ 7:24



Why should you use sensors/switches?

Assurance that a machine stops when a door or a hatch isopened can be solved by using different types of switchesand sensors which are monitored with a safety relay or asafety PLC. Switches and sensors are available both asnon-contact (dynamic or magnetic) and various types ofinterlocking devices. Interlocking devices can be used whenit is required, via a signal, to lock a gate during processesthat cannot be stopped during certain operations. They arealso used with machines that have a long stopping time toprevent someone from entering before the machine hasstopped.

- to manage the safety in harsh

environments!

Non-contact dynamic sensors have a long lifetime becausethey are not physically mechanically operated. They alsoendure very harsh environments, e.g. cold, heat, high-pres-sure wash-down which is important in the food industryfor example. Because the sensors are small, they are veryeasy to position and can even be completely concealed indoors and hatches.

- to ensure that a position is reached!

- to supervise doors and hatches around

dangerous machines!

The sensor monitors that the robot is standing still in amonitored position when someone enters the robot´s work-ing area. The robot is then only stopped by the program. If

the robot leaves the position the power will be cut directly.This is used when the robot does not stop safely withoutrestarting problems.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

What requirements should one have on

sensors/switches?

The sensor/switch shall be reliable from both the safetyand production point of view.

movements and functions are safely stopped by thesensors/switches.

should be avoided.

Eden -

highest safety level and reliability

Our recommendation is to use the Eden sensor becauseit is the safest and most reliable solution. The Eden sensoris a non-contact switch and has a dynamic function. Alsoit is possible to connect up to 30 Eden sensors in series

and still achieve safety category 4, in accordance with EN954-1/EN ISO 13849-1.

How safe is a sensor/switch?In order to trust the safety function it is essential to be aware that a safetysensor/switch must be mounted and be used according to the specifications.The certification authorities only test the product according to the appropriatestandards and to the specifications from the manufacturer.

Mechanical switches

For mechanical switches, e.g. key operated, this means thata door or a hatch has to constructed to small tolerances inorder for the switch, the key or the mounting brackets to lastaccording to the life time specification from the supplier. Thescrews holding the parts have to be locked in such a way

that they cannot be loosened. In order to prevent materialfrom getting into the slot for the key the environment has tobe clean. If a door goes outside the design tolerances fromwear, the screws loosen or material comes into the slot, thismay lead to the interlocked switch not giving a stop signalwhen the door is opened. Even two mechanical switcheson a door could fail to an unsafe state if the door somehowgets outside the tolerances of the switches. To prevent ac-cidents the mechanical switch normally needs continuouschecks of both the switch and the installation.

Non-contact sensors/switches

For non contact sensors the risks associated with mechani-cal switches (see above) do not exist. If screws, bracketsor sensors get loose, it will lead to a stop signal. Thereforeonly one sensor with dual or dynamic function is needed in

order to reach the highest safety level. There are two typesof non-contact sensors - active and passive. The activesensor, Eden, is constantly communicating via a dynamicsignal between the two parts and any failure will directlylead to a stop signal. The passive type, a magnet switch, hastwo reed contacts which are activated by a coded magnet.

Both the passive and the active sensors are checked everytime a door is opened. From a safety point of view the ac-tive sensor, Eden, is to be preferred because it is checkedconstantly whereas the passive sensor is only checkedwhen a door opens.

From the reliability point of view a long detection distancewith large tolerances and a well defined on and off positionis needed. The active sensor, Eden, fulfils these demands. Amagnet switch has smaller tolerances and an intermediateposition where only one contact opens. A bad installationor vibrations can lead to an unintentional stop if one contactopens and closes again. The supervision of a two channelsystem is based on both contacts having to be operatedin order to permit a new start. In a dynamic safety circuitthere is only one pulsed signal and therefore no intermedi-ate position.

Reliability

Safety Interlockswitch

Magnetic switch

Eden -

sensor with

dynamic signal

Safety level



15 ± 213 ± 2

13 ± 2 mm

55

Approvals:

Eden Non-contact safety sensor

A non-contact safety sensor for the highest

safety levelEden - Adam and Eva is a non-contact safety sensor for use oninterlocked gates, hatches etc. A coded signal is transmitted fromthe control device Vital or from the safety PLC Pluto via Adamto Eva which modifies the signal and sends it back again. The

maximum sensing distance between Adam and Eva is currently15 mm ± 2 mm.

Up to 30 Edens can be connected in series to Vital and stillachieve the same safety level in the safety circuit. It is alsopossible to connect safety light beams and E-stops in the samesafety circuit. Adam is available with cable lengths up to 10 m and withM12 connectors. The LED on Adam provides indication of threedifferent conditions, contact/non-contact between Adam andEva and safety status. The same information is also availablevia the Adam connection cable. Eden E is available for harshenvironments, as are Adam E and Eva E. Rapid blinking serves

as an alignment aid. There are also coded versions, Eden C,Eden EC, Adam EC and Eva EC.

Features:

Safety category 4 according to

EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1

together with Vital or Pluto

Non-contact detection, large

sensing distance 0 - 15 mm

± 2 mm

Up to 30 sensors connected in

series to Vital at safety category 4

Versitile mounting, 360°

detection

Protection class IP 67/IP69.

Signal will penetrate through

non-metallic materials (wood,

plastic, etc)

Safety light beams, E-stops and

Eden can be connected in the

same safety circuit together with

Vital or Pluto meeting safety

category 4 (EN 954-1/

EN ISO 13849-1).

LED indication on sensor and

status information via the con-

nector cable

Small hysteresis (< 1mm)

Safety sensor for:

Doors and hatches

Position control

Sector detection

Slot detection

Flexible mounting and The ability to operate atlong distances.



DA2

DA1

DA1 x 2

80 mm

115

*

120

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Mounting – Eden

Eden to detect position

Metal stops the signal between Adam andEva. Additional Eden sensor(s) can bemounted to detect metal plate(s) in place.

Eden used to detect the position of thesaw guard.

Wood, plastic and other non-metallicmaterials let the signal pass betweenAdam and Eva.

Eden can be hidden in doors and hatches

Eden used for sector detection

Non-metallic door material between

Adam and Eva allows the signal through

Adam and Eva has contactonly if they are within 15 mmfrom each other.

Adam onwall.

Eva on robot.

Application examples - Eden

Metal

Wood, plasticetc

Notes:Four protection plates plates are supplied with Adam M12.To protect Adam and Eva protection plate (DA1) can beused on both sides.

Mounting Adam with integral cable.

Mounting with one protection plate (DA1) for AdamM12 using prewired moulded M12 connector.

Mounting with two protection plates (DA1) for AdamM12 using M12 connector with glanded cable.

Wrong mounting without protection plate maycause permanent damage to sensor.

DA2 mountingThe DA2 mounting spacer must be used in order tophysically protect Eden from damage. Four spacers areprovided with each Adam and Eva.DA1, protection plate 2,5 mm

* Safety screw





1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – EdenManufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Article number/Ordering data: 20-046-00 Eva20-046-06 Eva E20-051-00 Adam M1220-051-02 Adam 3 m20-051-04 Adam 10 m20-051-05 Adam 20 m20-051-06 Adam E 10 m20-051-07 Adam E 0.5 M12

20-051-08 Adam E 20 m20-051-14 Eden C 10 m20-051-16 Eden EC

Safety category with Vital orPluto (in accordance withEN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1) 4 4

Colour Yellow and black

Weight Eva: 26 gEva E/Eva EC: 36 gAdam M12: 30 gAdam 3 m: 220 g incl. cableAdam 10 m: 650 g incl. cableAdam E10 m: 660 g incl. cable

Adam EC 10 m: 660 g incl. cableAdam E 0,5 m + M12: 100 g incl.cable

Power supply 24VDC +15%-25%

Power consumption Adam: without info output 45 mAwith info output max 55 mA

Max cable length see Vital technical data

Ambient temperature

Eden/Eden C

Eden E/EC

-40°C … +70°C (operation)-25°C … +70°C (stock)-40°C … +70°C (operation)(Test ok +90°C ... +100°C)-25°C … +70°C (stock)

Protection class

EdenEden E/EC

IP67IP69K

Mounting Installation Eden/Eden CM4 screw, e.g. safety screw20-053-42. Max. torque 2 Nm.Screw to be locked with Loctiteor similar.

Installation EdenE/Eden ECM4 screw, e.g. safety screw20-053-42. Max. torque 2 Nm.Screw to be locked with Loctite

or similar.Detection distance max

Adam/Eva 15 ± 2 mmAdam C/Eva C 12 ± 2 mmAdam E/Eva E 12 ± 2 mmAdam /Eva EC 10 ± 2 mmHysteresis approx. 1 mm

Flash 2 mm before red position.Flash 2 mm before red position.Flash 2 mm before red position.Flash 2 mm before red position.

Metal may have influence on detection distance.This can be prevented by protection plates, DA1.

Minimum distance to metalwhen there is metal on one ormore sides.

Adam/Eva, Adam EC/Eva EC,Adam E/Eva EAdam C/Eva C

One More

0 mm 2,5 mm0 mm 0 mm5 mm 5 mm

Minimum distance betweenEden pairs 50 mm

Life >107 cycles

Material Macromelt (Based on polyamid)Eden E and Eden EC is alsocovered by PUR (polyurethan).

Chemical resistance

Macromelt:

PU (Eden E and Eden EC):

Cutting oils, vegetable andanimal oils, hydrogen peroxide,diluted acids and bases: goodAlcohol and strong acids: notrecommended

Cutting oils, vegetable andanimal oils,hydrogen peroxide,diluted acids and bases,alcohols: goodStrong oxidating acids: notrecommended

LED on AdamGreen:

Flashing:

Red:

Fast flashing:

Eva within range, safety circuitclosed (door closed)Eva within range, earlier safetycircuit open (door closed)Eva out of range, safety circuitopen (door open)Eva is within 2 mm from maximum

sensing distance (door closed)Cable 3 or 10 m, ø 5.7mm, black, PVC

5 x 0.34mm² + screen, UL 2464

Connector M12: 5-pin male contact

Connections

Brown (1)White (2)Blue (3)Black (4)Grey (5)

+24 VDCDynamic signal in0 VDCDynamic signal outInfo output, see below

24 VDC when LED is green or flashing(tolerance -2 VDC), 10 mA max

0 VDC when LED is red. (tolerance +2 VDC)

Warning: Incorrect connection may cause permanent damage toAdam devices.

Adam 3 mAdam 10 m

Adam C 10 m

Adam M12

M12

Eva

Adam E 0,5 M12,Adam E/EC 10m and Eva E/EC for extremesurroundings.

Eden E/EC Eden

Safety screw. For morescrew options see theproduct list.

Safety screwdriver bit



JSNY5 Safety Interlock switch

Features:

Approvals:

Gates

Hatches

2 NC + 1 NO (actuator in)

4 actuating positions

Actuator holding force 10 or30 N

Switch operational description

JSNY5 offers three contacts which gives both the two con-tacts needed for high safety level as well as a contact forthe indication of operating status.

The advanced design offers the choice of four operatingpositions from only two actuator entries by simply rotatingthe head through 180o.

However, when installed and in it's working condition onlyone entry can be used, ensuring no other element can tamperwith the switch function.

When mounting the switch from the front two elongatedholes are provided to aid alignment with two set screw holesfor accurate fixing. Top fixing is also possible.

Three cable entries allow for a variety of cabling optionsincluding through wiring.

Positive forced disconnected contacts

The design assures that the contacts will not fail or be heldin a normally closed position, due to failure of the springmechanism or the welding/sticking of the contacts.

Protection from unauthorised or incidental access

To avoid unauthorised operation the JSNY5 switch ismanufactured using multicoding to GS-ET 15. The switchcannot be defeated by screwdrivers, magnets or any other

mechanism.

Safety level

The positive forced disconnect contacts gives a high safetylevel. By combining the JSNY 5 with one of our suitable safety

After opening the snap-on cover, the head portion can be removed(version A), after turning the head through 180 0 (version B) itcan be replaced onto the body of the switch and be locked into position by closing the snap-on cover. This ensures 4 actuating positions are possible.

relays as for example from the RT-series, the safety PLC Plutoor Vital (Tina) the requirements for both hatch and gate switchsupervision can be fulfilled. To obtain the same level of safetyas Eden, two switches per gate are required.

Regulations and StandardsThe JSNY5 is designed and approved in accordance withappropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088 and GS-ET 15.

Application:





EMC

Switch operation description

The magnetic switch is designed to operate in dirty industrialenvironments and is certified to the highest level of safetyregulation when working together with a suitable JOKABSAFETY safety relay or Safety-PLC Pluto. The magneticswitch is small and resistant to both dirt and water, and hasno dust collecting cavities making it usefull in environmentswhere hygiene is paramount. The small size of the switchmakes it easy to position and hide on gates and hatches.

The magnetic switch has a long working life since nomechanical contact is made during operation.

Contacts

The magnetic switch has one closing and one openingcontact. Both contacts have to be monitored. The contactsmay be monitored by either the RT9 safety relay or othersuitable relays in the new RT-series, i.e. RT6, RT9 or SafetyPLC Pluto.

Protection from unauthorised or incidental access

To avoid unauthorised operation of the JSNY7 switch it isonly possible to actuate the JSNY7R with the coded magnet,JSNY7M. Other magnets, screwdrivers and tools have noaffect on the switch contacts.

Safety levelThe JSNY7 is approved to the highest level of safety regula-tions, category 4 according to EN954-1 together with safetyrelay in the RT-series. The magnetic switch is approved andcertified by DNV and BG.

Regulations and StandardsThe JSNY7 is designed and approved in accordance withappropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088 and GS-ET 15.

JSNY7 is resistant to both dirt and water.

Features

Approvals:

Application:

Small size

IP 67

Gates

Hatches

Position control

JSNY7 Magnetic Switch



0

5

14

mm

68

78

88

4,5

6 , 5

2 , 5

7 , 2

1 0 , 7

2 5

1 3

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12


Article number/ordering data: 20-023-00 JSNY7R-3 Magnetic switch3 m cable

20-023-01 JSNY7R-6 Magnetic switch6 m cable

20-023-02 JSNY7R-10 Magnetic switch10 m cable

20-024-00 JSNY7M Magnetic switch

Colour Black

Enclosure/Cover PA 6 (UL94-VO)

Supply voltage max 30 VDC

Switch current max 100 mA

Max switching frequency 1 Hz

Mechanical life 3 x 108 switch operations, depending on load

Operating temperature range -5oC to +70oC (moveable)-20oC to +70oC (fixed)

Connection Cable ø4.5, 4x0.25 mm2, 3 meter ; PVC(other lengths upon request)

Switching point Min. switch-on point 5 mmMax. switch-off point 14 mm

Weight Coded magnet: 32 gSensor with 3m cable: 133 g

Protection class IP67

Electrical connection description - JSNY7

Electrical connectionTwo-channel switching, high safety level.

NOTE!

Safety components drawn in re-leased position.

NOTE!

This solution with 3 magneticswitches only complies with cat-egory 3 as per EN 954-1/EN ISO13849-1.To reach highest level of safety onlyone magnetic switch should be con-nected to the safety relay.

Electrical Connection example

Three JSNY7 connected to RT6safetyrelay.

brownblack

bluegrey

Door 1

Door 2

Door 3



Description

The JSNY8 Safety Interlock Switch, in conjunction with themachine control system, enables gates/movable guards etc tobe locked in their protective positions, thus preventing accessto machinery until dangerous operations have ceased.Applications include:

machinery that requires a long braking operation.

The JSNY8 has 2 NC + 2 NC positive force disconnection

contacts. The first pair closes when the actuator key is pushed

into the head. The other pair closes when the locking mechanism

is in the locked position. The head can be set in four positions,

thus providing the safety device with four different operating

positions. These are selected by twisting the head as shown

in the diagram above. The leading edges of the actuator key

are reinforced and bevelled in order to guide it properly into thehole. The JSNY8 is encased in a robust metal housing (IP67)

providing a high level of protection to the internal operating

components.

Two versions

The JSNY8 is available in two basic versions, either with a springlock or a magnetic lock.

In the spring lock (JSNY8S) version, the locking mechanismmoves into the locked position directly when the door is closedand the actuator key is pushed into the lock. The actuator key canonly be released and the gate opened by supplying operationalvoltage to the solenoid (E1-E2).

The JSNY8S also has a emergency ’unlocking’ facility to en-able the actuator key to be released without the energisationof the solenoid (E1-E2).

In the magnetic lock (JSNY8M) version, the locking mecha-nism is only in the locked position when the solenoid (E1-E2)is supplied with operating voltage. Release of the actuator keyis only possible when the operating voltage is removed fromthe solenoid (E1-E2).

Optional features

The following optional features are available:

Tamper-proof

The JSNY8 is tamper-proof. The safety device cannot be ma-nipulated by screwdrivers, magnets or other tools.

Safety level

The JSNY8 has double forced disconnection contacts to theactuator key and the locking mechanism. The actuator key hasa triple coding design. To achieve maximum safety level in theconnection to the machine’s control system, it is recommendedthat the JSNY8 is monitored by an appropriate Jokab Safetysafety relay, Pluto safety-PLC or Vital. To obtain the same levelof safety as Eden, two switches per gate are required.

Regulations and Standards

The JSNY8 is designed and approved in accordance withappropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088, GS-ET 19 and EN 60947-5-1.

JSNY8Safety Interlock Switch

Approvals:

Features:

Application:

Gates

Hatches

Robust design

Universal installation

2 NC + 2 NC outputs

1000 N actuator holding force

JSNY8S JSNY8M



8 1

5

5 0

30

ø 5, 5

2 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Contact description JSNY8S/M - JSNY8S/M

JSNY8SKey actuator insertedNormally locked(E1-E2 unpowered)

JSNY8MKey actuator insertedNormally unlocked(E1-E2 unpowered)

Contact opened

Contact closed

Contacttravel Actuator withdrawn

Actuator inserted

Fmin

= 20 N


Article number/Ordering data: 20-030-00 JSNY8M 24DC20-030-01 JSNY8S 24DC20-030-05 JSNY8S 230AC20-030-15 JSNY8M 230AC

Colour Black

Enclosure Metal housing

Actuator key Steel & plastic (PA6)

Min. operating radius for hatch 400 mm (smaller radius on request)

Actuator holding force 1000 NWorking temperature -30°C to +60°C

Contactsactuator key insertedlocking mechanism, locked position

2 NC2 NC

Mechanical service life 1 million switch operations

Installation fixings 3 x M5

Cable entry 2x M20 x 1.5

Weight 550 g

Enclosure class IP67

Operating voltage 24V DC, 230 V AC

Rated insulation voltage 250V

Rated operating current 10A

Utilisation category AC 12 250V/10AAC 15 230V/4A

Short-circuit protection Fuse 10A slow-acting, 16A quick-acting

Power consumption 5.2 W

Note: Do not use switch as endstop!

8 1

5

5 0

30

ø 5. 5

2 0

JSNY8/9N2

Rmin: 150 mm

Flexible actuator.



JSNY9Safety Interlock switch

Features:

Approvals:

Application:

Gates

Hatches

Compact and robust

Universal installation

2 X (1NO+1NC)

Actuator holding

force 1500 N

Eight head configurations

LED status indication (optional)The control unit offers eight op-erating positions that provide theactuator with eight different inputoptions.

Description

The JSNY9 is used for locking a gate/hatch, to prevent accessto machinery, until hazardous operations have ceased.Applications include:

which requires a long braking operation.

The JSNY9 is equipped with a 2 x (1NO +1 NC) contactconfiguration, the first pair of contacts changeover when thekey is inserted. The second pair of contacts changeover whenthe locking mechanism is in the locked position.

The JSNY9 switch is encased in a robust plastic housing

and can be mounted either horizontally or vertically. Theadvanced design of the head provides eight possible keyinsertion options, this is achieved by mounting the headeither vertically or horizontally on the base unit, as shown inthe diagram. The location for the actuator key is reinforcedand bevelled to ensure a smooth operation.

Two versions

The JSNY9 switch is available in two basic versions, either witha spring lock or an electro-magnetic locking mechanism.

The JSNY9S (spring lock) switch operates immediatelywhen the gate/hatch is closed, i.e. when the key actuator is

inserted into the locking mechanism. The gate/hatch can beopened and the actuator key released only by supplying theoperational voltage to the solenoid connections (E1 E2). TheJSNY9S also has a manual emergency unlocking facility toenable authorised release of the actuator key.

In the JSNY9M (magnetic lock) version, the mechanismis only locked when the gate/hatch is closed i.e. the actua-

tor key inserted and the solenoid (E1 E2) supplied with theoperating voltage. The gate/hatch can only be opened whenthis operating voltage is removed.

Optional features

The following optional features are available:

locking mechanism and contacts.

Protection from unauthorised access

The JSNY9 is designed to protect against unauthorised

access; screwdrivers, magnets or similar tools cannotoperate the safety switch.

Safety level

In order to achieve a high safety level, the JSNY9 switch isequipped with dual sets of contacts operated with a codedactuator key . In order to meet the required installation safetylevel it is recommended that the JSNY9 safety switch ismonitored by an appropriate JOKAB SAFETY safety relay.To obtain the same level of safety as Eden, two switchesper gate are required.

Regulations and StandardsThe JSNY9 is designed and approved in accordance withappropriate directives and standards. Examples of such are98/37/EC, EN ISO 12100-1/-2, EN 60204-1, EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1, EN 1088, GS-ET 19, EN 60947-5-1.



JSNY8/9N2

Rmin: 150 mm

8 1

2 0 5

5 0 30

ø 5, 5

7,820

9

3

1 5

79,4 9

, 6

4 2 , 5

3 0

184

2 5

124

3 2

ø5,3

ø4,8

ø14

22,4

170135

19,5

3 2 -

3 6

5 1

2 1

5

1 5

3 7 , 5 4 5

3 x M 2 0

R m i n : 4 0 0

JSNY8/9N1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Contact description - JSNY9 S/M

NB.The safety switch must not beused as an end stop!

JSNY9SActuator insertedLocked position(E1-E2 unpowered)

JSNY9MActuator insertedUnlocked position(E1-E2 unpowered)


Article number/Ordering data: 20-036-01 JSNY9S 24VUC20-036-12 JSNY9SLA 24VUC with LED20-036-21 JSNY9M 24VUC20-036-32 JSNY9MLA 24VUC with LED

Colour Black

Enclosure/Cover Polyamid PA6

Actuator Steel & plastic (PA6)

Min. key operating radius 400 mm (smaller radius available on request)

Actuator holding force 1500 NOperating temperature - 25o C to + 70o C

Contacts(actuator in)Locking mechanism in locked position

1 NO + 1 NC1 NO + 1 NC (NC are direct opening action)

Mechanical life 1 million switch operations

Installation fixing 4 x M5

Cable entry 3 x M20 x 1.5

Weight approx. 300 g

Enclosure Class IP67

Operating voltage 24 V AC/DC

Isolation voltage 250 V

Thermal Current 2.5 A

Utilisation category AC 15 230V / 4A

Short-circuit protection Fuse 6 A slow acting

Power consumption 1.1 VA (56 VA during 0.2s)

JSNY9SLA/MLASee separate data sheetfor switches with LEDindication.

Contact open

Contact closed

Actuator travelActuator extracted

Actuator insertedF

min= 27 N ± 15%



Magne

Magne 1

Magne 2

Magnetic lock with indication

The Magne 1 is a magnetic lock which has been adapted for

use in industrial applications and other harsh environments.It can electrically lock and hold a door closed with up to1500 Newtons of force and when power is turned off nomagnetic material will stick on the magnet surface. Magne 1A can be used together with Eden door positionsensors providing protection from dangerous machinemovements. Magne 2 already has an Eden sensor built in.Use of M12 connectors makes it easy to connect severalMagne units and Eden sensors in series enabling controland monitoring by either a Pluto safety PLC or a Vital safetymodule. Via the connection cable it is also possible toobtain an indication signal informing if the Magne unit islocked or not.

Accessories:

screws for assembly on Jokab safety Quick-Guardfencing system (5-15mm door gap)

Safety’s Quick-Guard fencing system (5-15 mm door gap).

Features:

Application:

Electrical locking of doors and

hatches to production applica-tions that are sensitive to uninten-tional/unnecessary interruptions.

For safety supervision the Magne 2has an integrated Eden.

Robust constructionNo moving parts

Strong Magnetic holdingforce: 1500N

Can stand and operate inharsh environments

Locked/unlocked indication-Possible to connect in serieswith Eden sensors

No current peaks on activation

Magne 2 in combination witha handle profile provides acomplete door solution

Handle profile that hidesMagne completely whenthe door is closed.Article no.: 42-023-01

Approval:

Not ready at time of print

Magnetic lock

Magne 2A with installation kit(JSM D21B, JSM D24) and

handle (incl. screw) fitted on profile.Product numbers: 42-022-1042-023-05, 42-023-03 and42-023-10

Magne 2A with installation kit(JSM D23) for sliding door fitted

on profile.Product numbers: 42-022-10and 42-023-02

Magne 1A with installation kit(JSM D21B) and handle (incl. screw)

fitted on profile.Product numbers: 42-022-00,42-023-05 and 42-023-10



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

10 mm

Installation tolerance

Technical Data MagneManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Article number/ordering data: 42-022-00 Magne 1A including anchor plate42-022-10 Magne 2A including anchor plate and Eva42-022-01 Magne 1B incl. anchor plate42-022-12 Magne 2B incl. anchor plate and Eva42-023-05 JSM D21B Anchor plate installation kit42-023-01 Handle profile for Magne42-023-02 JSM D23 Sliding door fittings42-023-03 JSM D24 Installation kit for Eva42-023-04 Anchor plate with permanent magnet42-023-10 Handle for JSM D21B

Power supply: Magnet: 24 VDC + 15% -20%Eden: 17–27 VDC, ripple max 10 %

Power consumption: Magnet: 7 W (300 mA at 24VDC)Eden: 45–55 mA (see data for Eden)

Operating temp. range: -20°C to +50°C

Protection class: IP67

Weight: Magne 1: 610 gMagne 2: 700 gAnchor: 290 g

Holding force: 24 VDC: Min 1500 N0 VDC: 0 N (Magne 1A/2A)0 VDC: 30 N (Magne 1B/2B)

Contacts: Reed sensor (not safe)

Switch current max 100 mA

Mechanical life: >107 switch operations

Connector: M12 5-pole male connector (Magne 1)M12 8-pole male connector (Magne 2)

Connections: Magne 1:(1) Brown Locking, +24 VDC(2) White Sensor supply(3) Blue 0 VDC(4) Black NO-contact(5) Grey NC-contact

Magne 2:(1) White Dynamic signal input(2) Brown +24V DC(3) Green Locking +24V DC(4) Yellow Locking 0V DC(5) Grey Information closed (max. 10 mA)

(6) Pink Dynamic signal output(7) Blue 0V DC(8) Red Information locked (max. 100 mA)

Dimensions - anchor

Dimensions - cell rubber

Dimensions Magne 1

Dimensions Magne 2

Anchor plate for Magne 1B/2Bwith permanent magnet



Holding force / Hållkraft

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35

Volt

N e w t o n

Connection example - Magne 1 and 2

Holding force - Magne 1 and 2



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Connection example - Magne 2 in series

Connection example - Magne 1 in series



DaltonProcess lock

Advantages:

Use:

Doors and hatches

Small and robust

Integrated with Eden

Flexible installation

High enclosure classification

– IP 67

Withstands severe environments

Low current consumption

Status information with LED onthe lock housing and in the cableconnection.

Dalton – the intelligent process lock

Dalton is a locking unit that is intended for use in preventingunnecessary process stoppages, i.e. it is not a safety lock. Itcan be used either as a free-standing lock or integrated withEden as a safety sensor. In the unlocked state the door isheld closed by a ball catch and locked mechanically. If nec-essary, the holding force of the ball catch can be adjusted.The unit only permits locking if the ball catch is secured andwhen the Eva is in contact with the Adam (depending onthe variant). When an input is supplied with voltage, the ballcatch is locked.

Dalton is easily connected with an M12 connector. TheTina junction block can also be used for distribution ofboth the safety and locking functions. The Dalton status isindicated by LEDs and can also be read by a PLC via theinformation output.

Dalton with 5-poleor 8-pole connector

Dalton Eden with5-pole or 8-pole

connector to Dalton

Dalton M12 Eden M122 for severe environments

Assembly

Dalton can be assembled with its opening in two directions.In order to ensure that Dalton works without any problems,the ball latch must be resting, i.e. not pressed in by the locktongue when the door is closed Dalton's brackets are there-fore made to ensure the lock tongue and ball latch positionscan be adjusted.

Approval:

Not ready at the time of printing

Dalton M121 Dalton M122



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Tina 12A junction block

Tina 12A can be used to connect two Daltons with Edens with a cable to the apparatus enclosure.The summed information that indicates the states of both the Dalton and Eden also goes to the apparatus enclosure.

Transfer cables

A transfer cable can be used when the Dalton's 8-pole contact is to be connected to that of the Tina 4A, orthe Tina 8A's 5-pole M12 outlet. Note that the information from the Dalton and Adam cannot beused.

BW00314 - Example connection of Dalton to Vital 1

BW00196 - Dalton and Eden connected to Vital 1 or Pluto



Technical data - Dalton

Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB

Article number/

ordering data:Dalton M111Dalton M311

Dalton L001

Dalton M315

Dalton M113

20-038-00 8-pole male plug20-038-07 5-pole male plug,

locking pin 420-038-90 Only ball latch, no

electrical functions20-038-10 5-pole male plug,

locking pin 4, smallmounting plate forthe tongue

20-038-04 8-pole male plug,angle brackets forJokab enclosure

Dalton - Lock with securing plate for separately connectedEden

Dalton M112Dalton M312

Dalton L002

20-038-03 8-pole male plug20-038-08 5-pole male plug,

locking pin 420-038-91 Only ball latch, no

electrical functions,mounting plate alsofor Eden

Dalton - Lock with M12 connector for connection of separately

mounted Eden

Dalton M121 20-038-01 8-pole male plug

Dalton - Lock with integrated Eden

Dalton M122 20-038-02 8-pole male plug

Dalton M124 20-038-09 8-pole male plug,5-pole female plugfor Adam, anglebrackets for Jokabenclosure

AccessoriesDA 1

M12-CT0214

Tina 12A

20-053-00 Spacer 2.5 mm forAdam and Eva.

20-060-01 Transfer cable 0.2m M12 5-pole plug8-pole female plug

20-054-18 Distribution block fortwo Dalton Edenswith 8-pole cables

Locking function M - Locked when energisedL - Only ball latch

Colour Black

Operating voltage 24 VDC +25/–20%

Current consumption

UnlockedLockedLock inputInformation output

40 mA130 mA5 mAMax. 10 mA

Eden See the data for Adam M12

Enclosure classification IP67

Holding forceUnlockedLocked

25-100 Nm2000 Nm

Material

Ball catch, securing plateEnclosureLock tongue, securing plate

Anodised aluminiumAnodised aluminiumStainless steel

Resistance

Stainless steel Good resistance to most acids,except for hydrochloric andsulphuric acids.

Connections Connector to connect Dalton(varies depending on type)8-pole male plug, M125-pole male plug, M12Outlet for externally connectedAdam female plug M12, 5-pole

Colour markings (pins)FunctionDynamic input signal, Adam+24 VDCLock signalNot usedInformation AdamDynamic output signal, Adam0 VDCInformation Dalton

8-pole Colour 5-pole Colour

1 (White)2 (Brown) 1 (Brown)3 (Green) 4 (Black)4 (Yellow) 2 (White)

5 (Grey)6 (Pink)7 (Blue) 3 (Blue)8 (Red) 5 (Grey)

Warning

Dalton locks mechanically. If the lock is forced, the Dalton can bepermanently damaged.

LED indication=Red =Green =Paus Information function

1 Locked0 Closed but unlocked0 Open

Alarm:1Hz Lock has not entered theunlocked state

1Hz Eden or ball catch not inposition = open1Hz Open, locking not permitted

1Hz Lock has not entered thelocked state

1Hz Undervoltage - locking notpermitted1Hz Overvoltage1Hz Overtemperature (> 80°C)



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Dimensions drawing, Dalton M111,Dalton M311, Dalton L001(and Dalton M121)

Dimensions drawing, Dalton M122,

Dalton L002 and Dalton M112

Dimensions drawing, Dalton M113





Approval:

Under review

Application:

Locking doors to cells/lines

with long stop times.

When you need a robustlock

Advantages:

Double locking function as

specified in PL e/cat. 4 (ENISO 13849-1)

Withstands harshenvironments

Status information with LEDson lock housing and at cableconnection.

Controlled to locked andunlocked positions - remainlocked/unlocked in the eventof power failure.

Electronic connection only onthe door frame

KnoxSafety lock

Knox - Double safety lock as specified in PL e/cat. 4

Knox is a double lock that complies with the highest safety level (two lock cylinderswith monitored positions) that can be used both as a safety and process lock.The locking function is electronically controlled and is bi-stable, i.e. it retains itsposition (unlocked/locked) in the event of a power failure.

The handles operate as they would on a normal door apart from the exteriorhandle also having a reset function, and an interior handle that can be used foremergency opening. Its design and durability mean that it is ideal for harsh envi-ronments as the sensors in the lock are non-contact and the lock is manufacturedof stainless steel.

Operational modelocked and reset(emergency openingonly)

Reset,openable

Emergency openedOpen

Knox for secure locking



124

228

100 ±3

10 ±7,50

256

110

58

40

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – Knox

Make JOKAB SAFETY AB

Product number/

ordering data:Knox lock cylinder right hungKnox lock cylinder left hungKnox frame section

20-105-0020-105-0120-105-20

Accessories

Tina 12A 20-054-18 Distribution block for

two KnoxLock function S/M - unlocked and locked with

voltage.

Operating voltage 24 VDC +/- 15%

Power consumption

ElectronicsLock/lock inverseTotal maxInformation output

70 mA (in locked position)135 mA (when locking/unlock-ing)150 mAMax. 10 mA

Insulation class IP65

Holding strength

Unlocked

Locked

5000 N(10,000 N ultimate breakingstrength)5000 N(10,000 N ultimate breakingstrength)

Connection Male plug M12, 8-pole

Colour marking (pin)

FunctionDynamic input signal+24 VDCLock Lock inverseInformation Locked

Dynamic output signal0 VDCInformation reset

8-pole Colour

1 (White)2 (Brown)3 (Green)4 (Yellow)5 (Grey)

6 (Pink)7 (Blue)8 (Red)

WarningKnox locks mechanically. Forcing the lock may damage Knox perma-nently.

LED indicator – Knox

LED indicator=Red =Green =Paus

LED 1

LED 2

Function

Locked (and reset)Locked, no dynamic signal in

Unlocked

ResetNot reset

Alarm LED 2 Dirt indicator reset sensor

ResetNot reset



Connection example - Knox

Connection example - Knox and Pluto



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Connection example - Knox with other unlocking

Connection example - Knox with downtime monitor



Control devices



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information materialJOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the usersresponsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national andinternational codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by variousinternational approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustratethe various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarentee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples ina particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the productbased on the examples given. 2008 v02.

Contents Page

Why should control devices be used? __________________________________8:2

Three-position devices - JSHD4 _______________________________________8:4

Highest safety level ____________________________________________________ 8:5

Versions and possibilities ________________________________________________ 8:6

Technical data ________________________________________________________ 8:8 Connection examples __________________________________________________ 8:9

Unique world-wide two-hand device - Safeball ________________________ 8:10

Technical data ______________________________________________________ 8:11

Connection examples ________________________________________________ 8:13

_______________________________ 8:14

Two hand device - JSTD20 _________________________________________ 8:18

Technical data ______________________________________________________ 8:19 Connection examples ________________________________________________ 8:19

Safety foot-operated switch - Fox ____________________________________ 8:20

Technical data ______________________________________________________ 8:22

Connection examples ________________________________________________ 8:23



§

..for the machine operator to be able to directly startand stop dangerous machine movement.

Control devices

Three-position deviceThree-position devices, hold-to-run devices and enablingdevices are used during trouble-shooting, programming andtest running when no other safety components are possibleor suitable. The device is held in the hand and the operatorcan in an emergency situation either press harder or entirelyrelease the device to stop the machine.

In an emergency situation the operator can eitherpress harder or release the three-position deviceto stop the machine.

From Directive 98/37/EC, 1.2.5

If, for certain operations, the machinery must be ableto operate with its protection devices neutralized, themode selector must simultaneously: ...- permit movements only by controls requiring sus-tained action,

...

Ergonomic three-position device, JSHD4

with double three-position button that gives a stop signalwhen released or fully pressed in.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

§

§

Two-hand control deviceA two-hand control device is used when it must the guaran-teed that the operator's hands will be kept outside the riskarea. If there is a risk that someone else other than the opera-tor can reach into the machine without the operator seeingit, the safety device must be supplemented by somethingmore, e.g. a light beam. To be able to operate the machine with the two-hand de-

vice, all the buttons on the device have to be operated within the buttons also have to be returned to their initial positionbefore one can start again. If any button is released duringthe machine movement the machine will be stopped. Usingthe stopping time one can calculate the necessary safetydistance. A safety distance of less than 100 mm must notbe used. The highest safety level is assured by connecting thebuttons of the two-hand device to a safety relay. The safetyrelay checks for concurrence and that all the buttons havereturned to their initial position before a new start can be

made. The safety relay also gives a stop signal if any of thebuttons are released.

The two-hand device protects against "after-grasp";if the operator by reflex tries to enter or reach into amachine during the dangerous machine movement.

From Directive 98/37/EC, 1.3.8

Guards or protection devices designed to protect ex-

posed persons against the risks associated with moving parts contributing to the work (such as cuttingtools, moving parts of presses, cylinders, parts in the process of being machined, etc.) must be: ...- otherwise, movable guards complying with require-ments 1.4.1 and 1.4.2.2.B or protection devices suchas sensing devices (e.g. nonmaterial barriers, sensormats), remote-hold protection devices (e.g. two-handcontrols), or protection devices intended automati-cally to prevent all or part of the operator’s device fromencroaching on the danger zone in accordance with

requirements 1.4.1 and 1.4.3....

Two-channel all the way out to the hand

Safeball is an ergonomic two-hand control device withfour built-in buttons.

Foot operated switchesA foot operated switch is used when the operator has tohold the material during processing. The pedal must have asafety cover to prevent unintentional start. For seated workone must also have a foot support to facilitate the operator

holding his foot in the pedal´s off position. The highest safety level is secured by monitoring the pedalwith a safety relay.

From EN 693 Machine tools - Safety - Hydraulic presses

5.4.6.1 Push button, foot switch and start control devic-

es shall be adequately shrouded to prevent accidental operation. Foot switches shall permit access from onedirection only and by one foot only.

The foot operated switch is used when the opera-tor has to hold the material with both hands duringprocessing.

Safety foot operated

switch with three-positionfunction.


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 244/395www.jokabsafety.com8:4 ety.com

Why three-positions?

An operator who is under pressure must be able to give astop signal, whether in panic he/she pushes harder on thebutton or just lets go of it.Three-position devices, hold-in and acceptance devicescan be used for trouble shooting, programming and testrunning in situations where no other protection is availableor feasible.If the operator has to enter a risk area to trouble shoot or runa test, it is extremely important that he/she is able to stop themachinery without having to rely on someone else to stand

by a stop button that is further away. In addition, no-one elseshould be able to start the machinery from the outside afterit has been stopped by use of the three-position device.

Hold to run device or Acceptance device, what is the

difference?

Hold to run device: The start signal is given when the but-ton is pressed. The stop signal is given when the button isreleased or pushed fully in.

Acceptance device: The start signal for separate start-ing is given when the button is pressed. The stop signal isgiven when the button is released or pushed fully in. “Sepa-rate start” means, for example, that a program start signal

is sent to the robot via a separate button in the acceptancedevice.

The three-position device is designed to be ergo-

nomic

The device is ergonomic, both in respect of its shape, fit-ting to the hand, and the way the buttons are operated. Itis easy to operate the three-position device using just thefingers, and the middle position provides a secure resting -erational status, i.e. stop or ready signal. The two additionalbuttons can be used, for example, for start/stop, up/down

or forward/back. Internally the device is duplicated. Thethree-position function itself is built up of two completelyindependent three-position buttons which are felt by theuser to be one button.

Three-position devices in different versions

Three-positiondevice during trouble shooting,

programming and testing

Front and top buttons withselectable functions.

Duplicated three-positionbutton that provides astop signal when it is re-leased or pressed fully in.

RT9 safety relay that monitorsthe duplicated three-position buttons

and wiring.

Approvals:

Use:

Advantages:

Troubleshooting

Test runningProgramming

Ergonomic

Adaptable

the safest solution



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

How does a a three-position device work?

Safety level

A safe Enabling or Hold to Run device should functionas follows:1. The Stop signal in released (top) and bottom position

shall have the same safety level.2. Provide a ‘Start’ or ‘Ready’ signal in a distinct middle

position.3. After a ‘Stop’ in the bottom position, a ‘Start’ signal or

‘Ready’ signal is not permitted until the three positionpush-buttons have been totally released and againpressed to the middle position.This function is achieved mechanically within the threeposition push-buttons in the device.

4. A Short or Open circuit in the connection cablesshall not lead to a dangerous function e.g. ‘Start’ or‘Ready’ signal.

In order to meet the above conditions, the three-position

switch must be connected to a suitable safety relay witha two channel function, e.g. RT6, RT9 or JSBT4, whichcan monitor that both three-position buttons are workingand that there is no short or open circuit in the connec-tion cable or the switch.

Highest safety level

When the three-position button is released you will obtain a dualstop. It is essential that the machine stops when you put aside thethree-position device, for example during adjustment.

When the three position button is pushed all the way in you willobtain a dual stop. It is essential that the machine stops in an

emergency situation.

Three-position device fitted to amachine control unit.

Panel assembly of JSHD4H2 on a

programming unit for robots.

Middle position Bottom position

Released position

whether the button is pushed or released


with appropriate directives and standards. Examples ofthe applicable regulations and standards are: 98/37/EC,



Three-position deviceversions and possibilities

many standard versions. It is also possible to customizethe three-position device for specific applications. The three-position device can be customized by theselection of the following parts: Front button - for programme start, low speed, etc. Top button - for programme stop, grip devices, etc. Bottom plate - wide bottom plate for fixing

interlocking devices and Eden (non-contact sensor)or narrow bottom plate for more flexible handling.Cable, straight or spiral cable with connectors orassembled on the device

LEDs, alternative connections Designed to work with a PLC or a safety relay

Front button

Top button

Bottom plates

Cables

Connections



JSHD4H2

mm

1 8

6 0

8 0

2 2

63

1 7 3

1 6 0

62

40

mm

JSHD4H2A

mm 1 0 6

3 9

3 4

JSHD4

JSHD2C

1 2

2 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Three-position push button JSHD2C

The button is the main component in a safe three-position

solution. To achieve the highest safety level two buttons areused in a two-channel system.

Panel assembly JSHD4H2

A panel assembly suitable for building into programming unitsor similar control boxes. Provides simultanous activation ofboth of the three-position buttons.

External assembly JSHD4H2A

The external assembly is similar to the panel assembly unit,although it is a ‘handle’ design making it suitable for assemblyon the outside of a control box.

Upgrading kit JSHD4S2

This kit is used to upgrade `older robot´ control systemsand will, together with a suitable safety relay, achieve a safetwo-channel three-position function.

Dimensions

1. 4

1 7. 3

2 0 . 7

1 4 . 3

3 . 4

ø 2, 8

( 2 x )

1 6 1 0 . 3





1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Connection example - Three-position device JSHD4 to Pluto

Connection examples - Three-position device JSHD4 with various safety modules

S3

Time-limited entrance/exit

into the risk area within x sec. The time limit is set in the Pluto program.



Safeball™

Safeball™ consists of a spherical ball containing two embed-ded pushbutton switches, one on each side of the ball. Byusing this pushbutton configuration, the risk of unintentionalactivation is minimised and the device is simple and ergo-nomic to use.

Safeball™ can be utilised for either One hand (one Safe-ball™) or Two hand (two Safeballs™) applications. In eitherapplication, and in order to meet the required level of safety,

the Safeball™ switches are monitored by specified/certifiedJOKAB SAFETY Safety relays (see electrical connection).

In the case where Two hand control is used, both Safe-balls™ i.e. all four pushbuttons have to be activated within signal is given to the machine. In order to provide the highestlevel of safety the Safeball™ design provides the operatorwith a dual switching function and short-circuit supervisionin each hand.

Each Safeball™ is ergonomically designed and has bothits cover and actuator made of environmentally-friendlypolypropylene. The design allows for comfort of use for all

hand sizes and operation from numerous gripping positions.Mounting of the Safeball™ is also very flexible allowing thedevice to be mounted in the most ergonomic position forthe operator.

SAFEBALL™

Unique World Wide Two hand device When can a Two hand or One hand control be used ?

A Two hand control can be used when it is necessary toensure that the operator is outside and must be preventedfrom reaching into the hazardous area. If the operator de-cides, after the start signal has been given to the machine,to make an ‘after-grasp’ i.e. try to adjust the part that hasbeen placed into the machine, then a dual stop signal isgiven to the machine.

A one hand control device can be used when the operatorcannot reach the hazardous area with his/her free hand or

on less dangerous machines.

Highest Safety Level

(Inspecta) in Sweden foruse as a Two hand control device, when used with a JSBR4JOKAB SAFETY Safety relay or Pluto Safety-PLC, in accord-

A top cover is not needed as activation switchesare fitted on each side of the Safeball™.

One and two hand devices

A two hand device which iscomfortable and easy to use.

Approvals:

Safeball for:

Features:

Two hand device

One hand device

ErgonomicLow activation force

Flexible mounting

Several grip possibilities

Highest safety level

Two channel switching in eachhand

Presses

PunchesFixtures

Shearing machines



72

68

23

23

7 1

mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Two hand control device

The Two hand control device is implemented by usingtwo Safeballs™, each having two internal pushbuttons.The Safe-balls™ must be mounted a minimum distancebetween each other (see Mounting description).

By utilising two pushbuttons in each device a doublesafety function is provided in each hand.

The highest safety level is achieved by connecting allfour pushbuttons to the JOKAB SAFETY JSBR4 safetyrelay or Pluto Safety-PLC. The safety relay gives a dual andsupervised safety function and requires input activation checks that all four pushbuttons have returned to their

deactivated positions before a new start is allowed. TheJSBR4 safety relay also provides a stop signal if one ormore pushbuttons are released.

One hand control device

Safeball™ is also a very practical method of providing a onehand control device as it is very easy to find and activateby the machine operator. One hand devices should only beused when the operator cannot reach into the hazardousarea with his/her free hand or on less dangerous machines.Before fitting the necessary risk assessment must be madeto determine suitability of this type of control. To achievethe highest safety level for One hand control the Safeball™must be connected to a JOKAB SAFETY safety relay (SeeElectrical Connection).

VersionsSafeball is available in several versions to meet differentmounting requirements. JSTD1-A - The standard version with actuators made of

plastic and 2 m of cable. JSTD1-B - Similar to the standard version but without a

cable. Instead it has four wires, each 0.2 m long. JSTD1-C JSTD1-E

Technical data - SafeballManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Article number/Ordering data: cable

cable

cable

0,2 m cable

Material: Polypropylene

Colour: Yellow and black Size: Height: approx. 71 mm,

Weight: 0.2 kg with 2 m cable0.7 kg with 10 m cable0.1 kg with 4x0.2 m wires

Temperature:

Protection class: IP67. Not intended for use under water

Operating force: Approx. 2 N

Actuator travel: 1.3 +/- 0.6 mm

Max switching load:

Recommended load:

Min switching load:

Contact resistance: 100 mohm

Life, mechanical: > 1x106 operations at max. 1 Hz

Life, electrical: characteristics

Connection cable:

2

2 wires, approx. 0.2 m 2

Activation of apushbutton.

Function - Safeball

Approval number:01-MAL-CM-0101 (Two-hand device)01-MAL-CM-0100 (One-hand device)

Chemical resistance at 20°C.

Please contact us for more information.

Chemical Resistance

Alcohols good

Paraffin oil goodMilk goodSilicon oil goodAcetone good



S

1 2 0

120180

mm

Mounting - Safeball

Example of alternativemounting.

Alternative mounting methods

Mounting on a table.

Mounting with ball joint,which can be rotated andangled.

The Safeballs™ can be mounted in many different ways.They can be mounted on a table, a machine, on a supportor wherever suitable for ergonomic reasons. The Safeball™can be mounted in a fixed position or on a tilting and/orrotating support. This flexibility of mounting permits theSafeball™ to be fitted in the best ergonomic positionfor the ease of operation by the operator. The distancerequirement between two Safeballs™ or between a Safe-

ball™ and a wall or edge of a table depends on how theSafeball™ is mounted. Safeball™ can be mounted with

Note: When Safeballs™ are mounted in such a way thatthe distance between them can be adjusted to less thanthe specified minimum, the mounting screws must belocked to ensure any changes in the distance betweenthe two balls cannot be made.

Approved Two hand device

To be an approved Two hand device, both Safeballs™ must be mounted a minimum distance apart in order to preventoperation of both balls with one hand. Safeballs™ must be fitted a minimum distance from the edges of tables ora wall. It is essential that Safeballs™ are correctly installed in order to prevent unintended activation of the deviceswith part of the body in combination for example with a wall.

Mounting distance

Table mounting of two Safeballs™.In order to prevent cheating the dis-tances shown are the minimum al-lowed.

Note: S must never be less than 100 mm.

The safety distance is the distance between theSafeballs™ and the dangerous machine movement.

Where S= safety distance in mmK= hand speed, 1600 mm/sT= total stopping time for the dangerous movement

(including the response time of the safety relaysin seconds)

C= Constant= 0 mm for Safeball.

Safety distance

The Safety distance is the distance between the Safe-balls™ and the dangerous machine movement. Thesafety distance requirement can be calculated usingthe following formula for Safeball™ in accordance withthe approving authority and EN 999: S= KxT+C

Mounting distance -Safety distance - Safeball



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Electrical connection - Safeball

r e d

b l a c k

g r e y

b l u e

r e d

b l a c k

g r e y

b l u e

Two hand device

Safeballs™ are designed to be connected to a Jokab Safety JSBR4 Safety relay or Safety PLC to achieve the highest safetyrequirements for a Two hand device.

Example of two devices connected to a Jokab SafetyJSBR4 safety relay. Response time on receiving a stop

One hand device

When used as a One hand device the Safeball™ is designed to be connected to a Jokab Safety RT6, RT7 or RT9 Safety relay in orderto achieve the highest possible safety level for this type of control.

Example of a single Safeball™ connected to a Jokab Safety relay RT9.

.



With a JSTD25 two hand control station you have a prepared two hand unit that is easy to install, while utilising thegood ergonomics of the Safeball. There are several variants to meet differing needs. All versions meet EN 574, EN954-1 and EN 13849-1 and are supplied with the internal connections made, to simplify installation.

Replaces a traditional two hand device. Is available with

an emergency stop button and ball joint fixtures for theSafeballs. Three 22 mm openings are prepared on the topfor buttons or signal lamps. Hatch for wiring routeing in the

base, securing holes for mounting on the rear. The Safeballsare connected to terminal blocks, for the user to connect

the external wiring through one of the two inlet alternatives(underneath or at the rear).

JSTD25A stationwith 2 Safeballs.

JSTD25B stationwith 2 Safeballs and emergency stop button.

JSTD25E station

Two hand control station JSTD25 with Safeball

JSTD25D station

JSTD25 for fixed installation



23

2 3

3 2

ø43

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

JSTS31 Article no. 20-007-41

(JSTS30 without spacer ring).

Height

JSM C5 Article no. 20-007-09

Angled ball joint for installationof a Safeball on a table or a steelhousing.

JSTD25G Article no. 20-007-62 dimensions additional equipment and type of connectioncan, to a large extent, be customised before delivery. Canalso be equipped with doubled protection plates for use inparticularly severe conditions.

JSTD25P-1 portable. Two Safeballs mounted on the ends of an aluminiumprofile, shielded by over hand guards. With built-in Eva sen- device, where the response of the machine to operation

2 Safeballs.Two Safeballs mounted on the ends of an alu-minium profile, shielded by over hand guards. Replaces atraditional two hand device. Installed with the aid of groovesin the aluminium profile. Connection to an M12 connectorunderneath. Can be equipped with an external emergency Its low weight makes this particularly suitable for frequentrepositioning.

For mobile installation

For mobile installation with a built-in Eden sensor

JSTK40S

Article no. 20-007-67

JSTK80S

Article no. 20-007-68

can vary at different operating stations, since each stationcan be connected separately. Connection via an 8+1 Zylinconnector. Accessories are a connector, spiral cable withconnector and suspension shelf.

Accessories - JSTD25



Connection example - JSTD25/A/B/D/E

Connection example - JSTD25F

Connection example - JSTD25H



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

M12, 5-pole male

370

± 2

356

9 5

220±0.5

±1

±2

1 2 9

4

90.5 ±0.5

Connection example - JSTD25P-1

Dimension sketch - JSTD25



Two hand device

With or without emergencystop pushbutton

Highest level of safety

Conventional Two hand device steel housing. Two operating pushbuttons are protectedby over hand guards. Between these pushbuttons there isspace for a emergency pushbutton and two extra controlsor indication lamps. Below each of the operating pushbut-tons is one normally open and one normally closed contact.To start and run the machine both pushbuttons must be are released a stop signal is given to the machine, and allcontacts must return to their deactivated positions before anew start is allowed. The design is robust and can withstand harsh environmentsand long use. The pushbuttons and contact blocks are simpleto assemble for quick and easy installation. The device canbe mounted directly on the machine, on the Jokab Safetyfencing system or on the JSTS30 floor mount. For use withportable Two hand devices the JSTS31 floor mount, whichis provided with a spacer ring to fulfil the requirements of without an emergency stop pushbutton.

Highest level of safetyCorrect connection to a Jokab Safety JSBR4 safety relay orPluto Safety PLC ensures the highest level of safety with dualand supervised safety function and requires input activation

-gency pushbutton is installed it should be provided with twonormally closed contacts and be connected to a separatesafety relay, e.g. from the RT series or Pluto.

Why use a Two hand device?A two hand device can be used when it is necessary toensure that the operator is outside and must be prevented

from reaching into the hazardous area. If the operator de-cides, after the start signal has been given to the machine,to make an ’after grasp’ i.e. try to adjust the part that hasbeen placed inside the machine, then a dual stop signal isgiven to the machine. unintended activation by for instance a knee or elbow. A Two hand device only protects the operator using it. Largemachines operated by several operators can be equippedwith one control for each operator.

To calculate the correct safety distance, which depends

on the machine’s stopping time including the response timeof the relay, the use of the JOKAB SAFETY Smart Stoppinganalyser is recommended.

JSTD20 Approvals

JSTD20 for:

Features:

Presses

Punching machines

Cutting machines

Fixtures



4 9 0

1 4

5

mm

1 7 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

The Two hand device is intended for use with Jokab Safety’s JSBR4 safety relay (or Pluto Safety PLC ) to ensure thehighest level of safety. The JSBR4 ensures that all contacts have returned to their deactivated positions before a newstart is allowed. The safety relay also requires that all contacts are activated within 0.5 seconds. The JSBR4 gives astop signal if one or both of the pushbuttons are released.

Technical data - JSTD20Manufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Article number/

ordering number

20-007-20 JSTD20A20-007-21 JSTD20B20-007-22 JSTD20C

Weight JSTD20: 6.4 KgJSTS30: 20 KgJSTS31: 23 Kg

Colour Black housing, Black pushbuttons,Black floor stand.

Temperature -10°C…+70°C (Operating)

-20°C to +70°C (storage)

Material Housing: 3mm SteelGasket: RubberPushbuttons: Plastic

Operating pushbuttons

DiameterOperating forceOperating distanceMechanical life

60 mmApprox. 9N3.5±1mm106 operations

Emergency pushbutton

(JSTD20B only)DiameterOperating forceMechanical lifeContacts

40 mm40N3 x 105 operationsMechanically separated contact

blocksOperating pushbuttons 1 NO + 1 NC

Emergency pushbuttons 2 x NC

Isolation voltage 690V rms

Contact resistance 20 mohm

Rated current 10A

Utilisation categories AC 15 240V 3ADC 13 240V 0.27A

Cabling screw clamp terminals, 1 or 2 wireswith max. cross-section 2.5 mm2.

Contact material silver alloy on brass


Standards EN 418, EN 574, EN 954-1,EN ISO 13849, EN 60947-1,

EN 60947-5-1, EN 999

Connection example - JSTD20

JSTD20A Two hand device withoutemergency stopJSTD20B Two hand device withemergency stop



FoxSafety foot operated switch

Control device that frees thehands

Three-position pedal

High safety level

Robust

Approvals:

Foot operated switch for:

Features:

Presses

Rolls

Bending machines

Machine adjustment, etc.

Fox – a safety foot operated switch

which provides extra safety for the

operator

The Fox safety foot operated switch is used when the opera-tor has to have both hands free. Fox is very safe becauseof its unique three-position function, duplicated contactsand robust safety cover. Fox has been developed for indus-trial applications i.e. it has high mechanical durability. Fox isused for presses, bending machines, during adjustment ofmachinery, etc. Fox is available in single and double pedalversions (the double pedal is used for such tasks as steeringback and forth).

Three-position function, Fox 31/32

A safe three-position foot operated device means that:1. Stop signals are provided in the top and bottom posi-

tions.2. Start/ready signals for separate starting are provided in

a distinct middle position.3. After a stop in the bottom position a start or clear signal

cannot be given before the reset knob has been operated

and then the pedal pushed into its middle position.

Two-position function, Fox 21/22

A two-position foot operated device means that:1. A stop signal is provided in the top, or pedal released,

position.2. A start/ready signal for separate starting is given in the

bottom, or fully depressed, position

Safety cover protects against unintentional actuation

A robust metal safety cover prevents unintentional machinestart by a person or falling objects, thereby fulfilling thestandards which demand this. The robust aluminium safetycover can withstand harsh environments.

Safety level

A high safety level is secured by monitoring the pedal´sdouble contacts with one of our safety relays (see "Con-nection examples"). Furthermore the third 'emergency' po-sition of the Fox 31/32 pedal enhances safety.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Pedal function - Fox 31/32

1. The Pedal (A) is in its initial position. The contacts areopen and the machine is stopped.

2. The contacts are closed when the pedal (A) is presseddown until the distinct contact point (B) is reached, and themachine starts.

3. If the operator in an emergency situation presses the

pedal to the bottom, a stop signal is immediately sent to themachine (the contacts open). The switch is mechanicallylocked in this position and it has to be reset before a newstart can be made.

4. Reset: The contacts will only be disengaged after theknob (C) is reset and the pedal is returned to its initial posi-tion (A).

Fox 32

Double pedal with three- position execution and resetknobs.

Note. Also available as a double pedal, Fox 22

Versions - Fox

Fox 31

Pedal with three-positionexecution and reset knob.

(A) Pedal (B) Contact point

(C) Lockout Reset knob

Technical data - all versions of Fox


Ordering data/

Article number

Fox 21 20-160-21Fox 22 20-160-22Fox 31 20-160-01Fox 32 20-160-02

Colour Yellow and black

Rated insulating voltage Ui 690 V

Connection cable cross sectionssingle resp. multi-strand 1-4 mm²

Fine wire with core end bush(DIN 46228)

Terminal screws M4

Short circuit protection, fusible

cut-out (gL) Insulation requirements metup to 480V~

Switching capacity AC-15:

Degree of protection as perEN 60529, DIN VDE 0470/1

Mechanical life

(Number of operations)Position 2Position 3

1x106

3x10

MaterialSafety coverPedal

AluminumShockproof thermoplastic

Ambient operatingtemperature

Weight (approx.)with safety cover

Fox 31Fox 32

1.7 kg3 kg

Fox 21

Pedal with two-positionexecution.



1 x M 20

2 x M 20

Dimensions - Fox 31/21

Dimensions - Fox 32/22



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Connection example - Fox



Emergency stops



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book or any associated promotional and information materialJOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the usersresponsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national andinternational codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by variousinternational approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustratethe various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples ina particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the productbased on the examples given. 2008 v02.

Contents Page

Why do you need an Emergency stop? _________________________________9:2

Emergency stop for enclosure installation – INCA 1 _____________________9:4

Emergency stop with LED – Smile _____________________________________9:6

Emergency stop with LED – Smile Tina _______________________________ 9:10

Emergency stops in series with Tina (adapter unit) ____________________ 9:14

Emergency-stop Grab Wire Safety Switch JSNY10 _____________________ 9:16



So that anyone shall be able to stop a ma-

chine during a machine break-down or if

someone is in danger.

Why do you need anEmergency stop?

How do I recognise an E-stop?

All E-stops which comply with the relevant standards formarking are red with a yellow background. An emergencystop grab wire shall be red for high visibility. A sign thatindicates the location of the E-stop shall be green with awhite picture and possibly with text in the local country'slanguage.

How shall an E-stop stop the machine?

An E-stop shall stop the machine as quickly as possible. Toobtain a quick stop one either removes the power directlyor one lets a frequency converter 'run down' and afterwardsafter a little delay, remove the power. An E-stop shall notcreate other hazards. Therefore a risk analysis must be madefor the E-stop to be correctly connected.

From 98/37/EC

...This device must:- have clearly identifiable, clearly visible and quicklyaccessible controls,- stop the dangerous process as quickly as possi-ble, without creating additional hazards,- where necessary, trigger or permit the triggeringof certain safeguard movements....

98/37/EC The Machinery Directive

Clause 1.2.4 in Annex 4 gives requirements for the emer-gency stop function for new machines). See also clause1.2.2 Control devices. (see chapter “Standard and Regu-lations”)

Council Directive 89/655/EEC of 30 November

1989 concerning the minimum safety and health

requirements for the use of work equipment byworkers at work

Clause 2.4 gives the requirements for the emergency stopfunction for older machines. See also clause 2.1. (seechapter “Standard and Regulations”)

EN ISO 13850 Safety of machinery – Emergency

stop — Principles for design

A harmonized standard that gives technical specificationsfor the requirements in the Machinery Directive. Could alsobe used for older machinery.

EN 60204-1 Safety of Machinery - Electrical equip-

ment of machines – Part 1: General requirements.

Harmonized standard that gives requirements for the electri-cal equipment of machinery including the emergency stopactuator/function. Se clauses 9.2.2 and 9.2.5.4.2.

Requirements for E-stops are stated in the following standards and regulations



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



CERTIF IED BY

0V

1

2

4

3

5

(+) S13

A2

+24V

IQ 10 A pulse

0V

I1I0

A

(A2) S23

S34

S24

S14

0V

1

2

43

5

A A1

R

A2

T

+24V

IQ 10 A pulse

0V

I0

Pluto Vital INCA 1(S) Tina

INCA 1(S)Pluto

Emergency stop for enclosureinstallation

INCA 1

INCA 1 Tina

INCA 1 is an emergency stop device designed for installa-tion in a 22.5 mm slot in an apparatus enclosure. There aretwo versions, the "INCA 1 Tina" with electronic adaptationfor connection to a dynamic safety circuit and connectionto Vital and Pluto units, and "INCA 1" that contains onlycontacts, for connection to a safety relay. The electricalconnections are easily made in an apparatus enclosurewith a detachable terminal block, which also provides ex-cellent measuring points.

Application:

Emergency stop for fitting inhousing

As general stop (black print)

Advantages:

Terminal blocks

Several emergency stops inseries

Only 53 mm's constructiondepth

With LED info in print

Info output (Inca1 Tina)

Print IP65, connector IP20

Approval:

There is an LED in the emergency stop button, whichshows the current status:

protective device earlier in the circuit has been pressedin.

Yellow front ring and emergency stop signs for emergency stop.



Technical data - INCA 1/INCA 1 TinaManufacturer: Jokab Safety AB, Sweden

Article no./Ordering data: 30-054-01 INCA 130-054-00 INCA 1 Tina30-054-03 INCA 1S30-054-02 INCA 1S Tina30-054-04 Front ring Yellow

for INCA30-054-05 Emergency

stop sign S D F,22.5mm

30-054-06 Emergencystop sign E F D,22.5mm

Impact resistance(half sinusoidal) Max. 150m/s², pulse width 11 ms,

3-axis, as per EN IEC 60068-2-27

Vibration resistance(sinusoidal) Max. 50 m/s² at 10 Hz…500 Hz,

10 cycles, 3 axis, as per EN IEC60068-2-6

Climate resistanceDamp heat, cyclical

Damp heat, sustained

Dry heat

Cooling

Salt mist

96 hours, +25 °C / 97%, +55 °C/ 93 % relative humidity, as per ENIEC 60068-2-3056 days, +40 °C / 93 % relativehumidity, as per EN IEC 60068-2-78

96 hours, +70 °C, as per EN IEC60068-2-296 hours, -40 °C, as per EN IEC60068-2-196 hours, +35 °C in a chemicalsolution with NaCl as per EN IEC60068-2-11

Safety category: INCA 1: 4 with relay or PlutoINCA 1 Tina: 4 with Vital or Pluto

Colour: Yellow, red and black

Weight: Approx. 45 grams

Size: See drawing

Material: Polyamide PA66, Macromelt,Polybutylenterephthalate PBT

Temperature: -10°C to +55°C (operation), -30°Cto +70°C (storage)

Enclosure classification Print: IP 65, Connector: IP20

Installation: 22,5 mm

Emergency stop LEDs: INCA 1: circuit OKNot lit: emergency stop pressedpreviously.Red: This emergency stop has beenpressed.INCA 1 Tina:

circuit OKFlashing: Safety device OK, safetycircuit previously broken.

Red: This button is pressed in, andthe safety circuit is broken.

Operating voltage (LED): INCA 1: 24 VDCINCA 1 Tina: 24VDC +15% -25%

Current consumption (LED): INCA 1: 15 mAINCA 1 Tina: 47 mA

Emergency stop buttonOperating force: 22 ± 4 N

Operating movement: Approx. 4 mm to locked position

Contact material:

Minimum current: INCA 1: 10 mA 10 VDC/ 10 VACINCA 1 Tina: —

Maximum current: INCA 1: 2 A 24 VDC, 1 A 125 VACINCA 1 Tina: —

Mechanical life: > 50 000 operationsStandards: EN 60204, EN 60947-5-1 & -5

EN ISO 13850

Accessories 30-054-04 Yellow surround foremergency stop button



CERTIF IED BY

12

5

3

4

6

Emergency stop with LED

Features:

Application:

To stop a machine or aprocess


In order to fulfil the need for a small and easy to install E-stop,Smile has been developed. The size of the device makes it pos-sible to be installed wherever you want. With M12 connection/s orcable and centralised mounting holes Smile is very easy to install,especially on aluminium extrusions. Smile is available for E-stopsin both dynamic and static safety circuits i.e. for interfacing toVital/Pluto and Safety relays. Each version is available with eitherone or two M12 connections or cable. In the top of the Smile E-stop unit, LED’s show the actual status: if the LED is off an E-stop earlier in the circuit has been pressed.

Smile emergency stop has six different variants:

1. Smile 10EA has a 1 m cable connected through the base ofthe unit.

2. Smile 10EK has four 1 m short connecting leads through thebase of the unit. No LED.

3. Smile 11EA has a five-pole M12 connector on one end of theunit.

4. Smile 12EA has two five-pole M12 connectors, one on eachend of the unit.

5. Smile 11EAR has one 5-pole M12 connector at one end.6. Smile 12EAR has two 5-pole M12 connectors at each end.

Smile - small and cost effective E-stop

Smile

Approvals;

Several emergency stops in series


Robust

Print IP 65, housing IP67



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Connection examples – Smile

Smile 10EA can be connected to either Pluto or asafety relay. Single channel example with LED indication.Safety category 1. The connection cable exits fromunderneath the unit.

Smile 10EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safetyrelay. Two channel example with LED indication.Safety circuit category 4.

Smile 11EA can be connected to either Pluto or asafety relay. Single channel example with LED indica-tion. Safety category 1. Connection via M12 connector.

Smile 11EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safetyrelay. Two channel example with LED indication. Safetycircuit category 4. Connection via M12 connector.

Smile 12EA can be connected to either Pluto or a

safety relay. Single channel example with LED indica-tion. Safety category 1. Connection via M12 connector+ termination connector.

Smile 12EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safety

relay. Two channel example with LED indication. Safetycircuit category 4. Connection via M12 connector + termi-nation connector.

Smile 12EA can be connected to either Pluto or a safety relay. Two channel serial connection example with LEDindication. Safety circuit category 3. Connection via M12 connectors. Note that there is no termination connector forthe Smile 12EA (C), this unit being connected back to the Pluto/safety relay via a separate cable.

Pluto

safetyPLC Pluto safety

PLC

Safety

relayE.g. RT6,RT9

Safetyrelay

E.g. RT6,RT9

Smile 10EA Smile 10EA

0V

1

2

4

3

5

A(+) S13

S14

S34

A2

+24V

0V

I0

0V

1

2

4

3

5

(+) S13

S14

S24

A2

S34

+24V

S23IQ 10 A-pulse

0V

I0

I1

A

(A2)

Pluto

safety

PLCPluto

safety

PLC

Safety

relay

E.g. RT6,RT9

Safety

relay

E.g. RT6,RT9


0V

1

2

4

3

5

A(+) S13

S14

S34

A2

+24V

0V

I0

0V

1

2

4

3

5

A

(+) S13

S14

S24

A2

S34

+24V

S23IQ 10 A-pulse

0V

I0

I1

(A2)

Smile 12EA Smile 12EA Smile 12EA

Pluto

safety

PLC

Safety

relay

E.g. RT6,RT9

Pluto

safety

PLC

Pluto

safety

PLC

Safety

relay

E.g. RT6,RT9

Safety

relay

E.g. RT6,RT9


0V

(+) S13

S14

S24

A2

S34+24V

S23IQ 10 A-pulse

0V

I0

I1

1

2

4

3

5

1

2

4

3

5

A

0V

(+) S13

S14

S34

A2

+24V

0V

I0

1

2

4

3

5

1

2

4

3

5

A

(A2)

JST2JST2

1

2

4

3

5

1

2

4

3

5

0V

1

2

4

3

5

1

2

4

3

5

1

2

4

3

5

1

2

4

3

5

(+) S13

S14

S24

A2

S34

+24V

S23IQ 10 A-pulse

0V

I0

I1

A B

(A2)

C



Connection examples – Smile

Smile 12EA and 11EA can be connected to either Pluto or safety relay. Two channel example with LED indication.Safety circuit category 3. Connection via M12 connectors. Note that there is no termination connector as the Smile11EA (C) completes the circuit without the need for a termination connector (JST2) or return cable.

The table shows the LED indication status of the E-Stopbuttons from the example shown in above example.

E-Stop Button status LED Indication

Smile 10EA/11EA/12EA are like any other emergency stops when 0V to the LED indication is not connected. This meansthat any suitable Safety PLC or safety relay can be used. If the LED indication is used, the voltage between Pin 1(+) and Pin3 (-) should be between 19.2 – 28.8 VDC. The following examples show connections to Safety PLC and Safety relay.

The cable is connected to Smile 10EA via the lid at the back.

1. Input 12. Input 23. 0 VDC (to be connected only if LED indication is required)4. Output 25. Output 1

1. Input 1

2. Input 23. 0 VDC (to be connected only if LEDindication is required)

4. Output 25. Output 1

1. Output 12. Output 23. 0 VDC4. Input 2, feedback 5. Input 1, feedback

1. Input 1

2. Input 23. 0 VDC (to be connected only if LEDindication is required)

4. Output 2, feedback 5. Output 1, feedback

Brown Input 1White Input 2Black Output 2

The leads are connected to Smile 10EK via the lid at the back.No LED connection.

Pluto

safety

PLC

Safety

relay

E.g. RT6,RT9

Smile 12EA Smile 12EA Smile 11EA

1

2

4

3

5

1

2

4

3

5

A1

2

4

3

5

0V

S14

S24

1

2

4

3

5

1

2

4

3

5

CB(+) S13

A2

S34

+24V

S23IQ 10 A-pulse

0V

I0

I1

(A2)

Two channel Safety relay connection

SafetyRelay

Smile 11EA

1

2

4

3

5

Output 1

Input 1

Input 2

Output 2

Single channel PLC connection

PLC

Smile 11EA

1

2

4

3

5

Output 1

Input 1

Brown

White

Blue

Black

Brown

White

Blue

Black

Smile 12EA (R)

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

Brown

White

Blue

Black

Smile 10EA

1

2

3

4

5

Brown

White

Blue

Black

Smile 11EA (R)

1

2

3

4

5

Brown

White

Black

Smile 10EK

A B C A B CR R R ↔ R R D ↔ RdR D R ↔ Rd BR D D ↔ Rd BD R R ↔ Rd B BD R D ↔ Rd B B

D D R ↔

Rd B BD D D ↔ Rd B B Terminationdevice JST2



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – SmileManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Article number/ordering data: 30-051-04 Smile 10EA with 1 m cable30-051-06 Smile 10EK with short connectingleads (No LED connection)30-051-00 Smile 11EA with M12 male connector30-051-02 Smile 12EA with male and female M12connectors30-051-01 Smile 11EAR30-051-03 Smile 12EAR30-051-09 Smile 11 SA30-051-10 Smile 12 SA30-051-11 Smile 11 SAR30-051-12 Smile 12 SAR30-051-13 JST2 termination for Smile 12.Note. There are versions for dynamic technology(with Tina).

Impact resistance (half sinusoidal) max. 150 m/s2, pulse width 11 ms, 3-axis, as perEN IEC 60068-2-27

Vibration resistance (sinusoidal) max. 50 m/s2 at 10 Hz, 10 cycles, 3-axis, as perEN IEC 60068-2-6

Climate resistanceDamp heat, cyclical


Dry heat

CoolingSalt mist

96 hours, +25 °C / 97%, +55 °C / 93 % relativehumidity, as per EN IEC 60068-2-3056 days, +40 °C / 93 % relative humidity, as perEN IEC 60068-2-7896 hours, +70 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-2

96 hours, -40 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-196 hours, +35 °C in a chemical solution with NaClas per EN IEC 60068-2-11

Safety category: Safety circuit up to Cat. 4 acc. To EN 954-1/ENISO 13849-1, together with appropriate control unit.



Size: Length: 84 mm + M12 contact(s) (12.5 mm each)Width: 40 mmHeight: 52 mm

Material: Polyamide PA66, Macromelt, Polybutylentere-

Ambient temperature: -10°C to +55°C (operation), -30°C to +70°C (stock)


Mounting: Two M5 recessed hexagon head screws, L ≥25 mm.

Hole cc: 44 mm

LED on E-Stop: Off: Safety circuit broken (When an E-Stop isdepressed allfollowing units in the circuit lose the LED function).Red: Safety device actuator depressed and Safetycircuit broken.

Input voltage (LED): 17-27 VDC ripple ±10% (LED supply voltage)

Current consumption (LED): 15 mA

E-Stop buttonActuating force: 22±4 N

Actuator travel: Approx. 4 mm to latch

Material, contacts: Silver alloy gold plated

Life, mechanical: > 50 000 operations

Standards: EN ISO 13850, EN 60204, EN 60947-5-1 & -5Min current: 10 mA 10 VDC/10 VAC

Max current: 2 A 24 VDC, 1 A 125 VAC

Sign for emergency stop



Smile TinaCERTIF IED BY

12

5

3

4

Emergency stop with LED

Features:

Application:

To stop a machine or aprocess


In order to fulfil the need for a small and easy to install E-stop,Smile has been developed. The size of the device makes it pos-sible to be installed wherever you want. With M12 connections orcable and centralised mounting holes Smile is very easy to install,especially on aluminium extrusions. Smile is available for E-stopsin both dynamic and static safety circuits i.e. for interfacing to Vitalsystem/Pluto safety PLC and Safety relays. Each version is avail-able with either one or two M12 connections or cable. Two M12connectors are used to enable the connection of E-stops in series,which is often used with dynamic safety circuits fulfilling safetycategory 4. In the top of the Smile Tina E-stop unit, LEDs show theactual status according to the dynamic system:

The Smile Tina emergency stop is available in four versions:

1. Smile 10EA Tina has a 1 m cable connected via the base ofthe unit.

2. Smile 11EA Tina has a five-pole M12 connector on the end ofthe unit for connecting the Jokab Safety cable.

3. Smile 12EA Tina has two five-pole M12 connectors, one oneach end of the unit for connecting the Jokab Safety cable.

4. Smile 12EAR Tina has two five-pole M12 connectors, one ateach end, for the connection of Jokab Safety cabling.

5. Smile 11EAR Tina has one 5-pole M12 connector at one end

for connection of cable from Jokab Safety.

Smile Tina - small and cost effective E-stop

Approvals:

Several emergency stops inseries

Light grids, emergency stop

and Eden in the same safetyloop together with Vital orPluto gives safety category4 as per EN 954-1/EN ISO13849-1


Robust

Info-signal from each emer-gency stop

Print IP 65, housing IP67



Pluto Vital

Smile 10EA Tina

Smile 11EA Tina

Smile 11EA Tina

Smile 11EA Tina

Pluto Vital

Smile 11EA Tina

Smile 11EA Tina

Smile 11EA Tina

Pluto Vital Tina 4A

Eden = Adam & Eva

A

B

C

T

R

IQ10

I0

T

R

IQ10

I0

3

2

1

4

T

R

IQ10

I0

C

B

A

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Connection examples – Smile Tina

Smile 10EA Tina can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit cat-egory 4 with LED indication/information. The connection cable exits from underneath theunit.

Smile 11EA Tina can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit category4 with LED indication/information. Connection via M12 connectors. The circuit below showsthree Smile 11EA Tina units connected in series via connection terminals in the electricalcabinet.

Smile 11EA Tina can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit category4 with LED indication/information. Connection via M12 connectors. The circuit below showsthree Smile 11EA Tina units and one Eden connected in series via a Tina 4A connectionblock.

Electrical cabinet

C

o n n e c t i o n t e r m i n a t i o n



Pluto Vital

Smile 12EA Tina Smile 12EA Tina

Eden = Adam & Eva

Tina 10A

Focus

M12-3A M12-3A

M12-3B

T

R

IQ10

I0

Pluto Vital

Smile 12EA Tina Smile 12EA TinaSmile 12EA Tina

A B C

T

R

IQ10

I0

Connection examples – Smile Tina

The connection cable is connected to the Smile 10EA Tina unit via the back panel.

1. Input voltage,17-27 VDC ripple+/- 10%2. Dynamic input signal3. 0 VDC4. Dynamic output signal5. Information output

1. Input voltage,17-27 VDC ripple+/- 10%2. Dynamic input signal3. 0 VDC4. Dynamic output signal5. Information output

1. Input voltage,17-27 VDCripple+/- 10%2. Dynamic input signal3. 0 VDC4. Not used5. Not used

1. Output voltage to next unit2. Dynamic output signal (To nextSmile or to Pluto or Vital system)

3. 0 VDC4. Not used5. Information output

Smile 12EA can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital system. Safety circuit category 4 withLED indication/information. Connection via M12 connectors. The last Smile 12 EA Tina unit feedsthe dynamic signal back to the Pluto/Vital.

The table shows the LED indication status of the E-Stop buttons in the previ-ous connection examples, where three Smile 10 EA, Smile 11EA or 12EATina units are connected in series.

button

button

light

E-Stop Button status LED Indication

The table shows the information output signal status from each of the Smile11EA Tina units in the previous connection examples.In the example showing connection with an Eden sensor, the Eden statusinformation signal acts in the same way as the Smile Tina 11EA units.The status information signal can be connected to e.g. PLC input.Note. The information signal must not be used as a safety signal. The sig-nal should only be used to indicate the status of connected devices.

E-Stop Button status Information output signal

Smile 12EA can be connected to either a Pluto or Vital sys-tem. Safety circuit category 4 with LED indication/information.Connection via M12 connectors. The circuit shows two Smile12EA Tina’s, one Eden sensor and one Focus Light Curtainconnected in series.

A B C A B CR R R ↔ R R D ↔ RdR D R ↔ Rd FR D D ↔ Rd RdD R R ↔ Rd F FD R D ↔ Rd F RdD D R ↔ Rd Rd FD D D ↔ Rd Rd Rd

A B C A B CR R R ↔ H H HR R D ↔ H H LR R R ↔ H L HR R D ↔ H L LD R R ↔ L H HD R D ↔ L H L

D D R ↔

L L HD D D ↔ L L L

Brown

White

Blue

Black

Smile 11EA Tina

1

2

+

3 -

4

5

Brown

White

Blue

Black

Brown

White

Blue

Black

Smile 12EA Tina

1

2

+

3 -

4

5

+

-

1

2

3

4

5

BrownWhite

Blue

Black

12

+

3 -

4

5

Smile 10EA Tina



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data – Smile TinaManufacturer: JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Article number/ordering data: 30-050-04 Smile 10EA Tina with 1 m connection cable30-050-00 Smile 11EA Tina with M12 male connector30-050-02 Smile 12EA Tina with male and female

M12 connectors30-050-01 Smile 11EAR Tina30-050-03 Smile 12EAR Tina30-050-05 Smile 11 SA Tina30-050-06 Smile 12 SA Tina30-050-07 Smile 11 SAR Tina30-050-08 Smile 12 SAR TinaNote. There are versions for use with relay technology(without Tina).

Impact resistance (half sinusoidal) max. 150 m/s2, pulse width 11 ms, 3-axis, as perEN IEC 60068-2-27

Vibration resistance (sinusoidal) max. 50 m/s2 at 10 Hz, 10 cycles, 3-axis, as perEN IEC 60068-2-6

Climate resistance

Damp heat, cyclical


Dry heatCoolingSalt mist

96 hours, +25 °C / 97%, +55 °C / 93 % relativehumidity, as per EN IEC 60068-2-3056 days, +40 °C / 93 % relative humidity, as perEN IEC 60068-2-7896 hours, +70 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-296 hours, -40 °C, as per EN IEC 60068-2-196 hours, +35 °C in a chemical solution with NaClas per EN IEC 60068-2-11

Safety category: Safety circuit Cat. 4 acc. to EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1, together with appropriate Vital orPluto control unit.



Size: Length: 84 mm + M12 contact(s) (12.5mm each)Width: 40 mm Height: 52 mm

Material: Polyamid PA66, Macromelt, Polybutylenterephtha-

Ambient temperature: -10°C to +55°C (operation) -30°C to +70°C (stock)


Mounting Two M5 hexagon socket screws, L ≥25 mm.Hole centres: 44 mm

LED on E-Stop Flashing: Safety device OK, Break in safety circuitRed: Breaks in safety device and safety circuit

Time delay: 1:1.5 (Two Smile units are equal to three Edens intime delay)

Input voltage: 17-27 VDC ripple ±10%

Current consumption: 47 mA (57mA with max. current from information output)

Current from information output: 10 mA max

E-Stop button Actuating force: 22±4 N

Actuator travel: Approx. 4 mm to latch

Material, contacts: Silver alloy gold plated

Life, mechanical: > 50 000 operations

Standards: EN ISO 13850:2006, EN ISO 13850,EN 60204 and EN 60947-5-1 & -5

Sign for emergency stop



Emergency stops in series

Features:

Approvals:

Application:

To stop a machineor a process

Several E-stops in series toCategory 4

Light beam, E-stop and Edenin the same safety circuit to-gether with Vital/Pluto enablessafety category 4 according toEN 954-1

Indication at every E-stop

Robust construction

Information signal from eachE-stop

IP 67

with Tina

Our E-stops have built-in Tina 2A or Tina 3A units whichmakes it easy to connect up to 30 E-stops in a safety circuitin accordance with safety category 4, EN 954-1. The safetycircuit, which is dynamic, is monitored either by the Plutosafety PLC or the Vital safety module.

LEDs which indicate status

On every E-stop with Tina units there are LEDs whichshow the status of each individual E-stop. The E-stopstatus information signal is also available via the Tina unitconnection cable.

Our E-stops are available in three versions

tion to the dynamic circuit of Pluto or Vital

-tion to the dynamic circuit of Pluto or Vital.

tacts for cable connection (traditional E-stop)

Several E-stops in series in accordance with Category 4

Standards and regulations

The E-stop is designed to fulfil the applicable standardsand regulations. An example of such standards is EN 418/EN ISO 13850 (E-stop norm).



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data - E-stopsArticle number/ordering data

30 001-10 JSKL1-NS/2A E-stop with Tina2A30 001-11 JSKL1-NS/3A E-stop with Tina3A30 003-02 JSKL1-NS E-stop with 2NC

LED´s on Tina 2A, 3A Flashing: E-stop OK, break in safety circuitRed: Break in E-stop and safety circuit

For additional information concerning Tina units,see the section describing Tina.

Mechanical life 10

5

operationsMax. operating frequency 10 operations/min

Operating force 50 N

Degree of protection according to

IEC/EN 60529 IP67

Climatic proofing Constant in accordance with IEC 60068-2-3;Cyclical in accordance with IEC 60068-2-30

Ambient operating temperature –10°C - 70°C

Mechanical shock resistancein accordance with IEC 60068-2-27

Shock duration 11 ms, half-sinusoidal

Contacts:Rated insulation Voltage, UiMax. short-circuit protective device

500V

Fuse, gG/gL 10A

Electrical connection - E-stops

Dimensions - E-stops

Tina 3A



Duplicated safety in both directions

The JSNY10 can provide an easy to reach emergencystop along machines, transportation lines and processes.

The device is easier to install than several individualemergency-stop buttons.

The JSNY10 can be utilised in several different ways tosuit various applications e.g the wire could be positionedat waist height along a transportation line, the emergencystop being activated if somebody walks into or falls ontothe line or the wire could be positioned at head heightmaking it easy to grab by anyone requiring to initiate anEmergency Stop.

The JSNY10 has four contacts. When the switchis installed and the correct wire tension is set, all fourcontacts are closed. If the wire is pulled, two of the

contacts open; if the wire breaks the other two contactsopen. In both cases a dual channel machine stop signalwill be given.

In order to reset the JSNY10 the integral mushroom-head slam button has to be activated.

Forced Disconnected Contacts

The contacts of the JSNY10 are forced disconnected.Forced disconnection means that the contacts are

mechanically pulled apart thus ensuring protectionagainst contact welding/sticking.

Safety level

The forced disconnected contacts provide a high level ofsafety. By combining the JSNY10 with a suitable JokabSafety safety relay a high level of safety in respect of theconnection of the machine control system is guaranteed.JSNY10 can be combined with Tina units for connectionto a safety circuit with several safety components inaccordance with Safety Category 4.

Regulations and Standards

The JSNY10 is designed and approved in accordance torelevant standards. Examples of relevant standards areEN ISO 13850, EN60947-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0113,EN ISO 12100-1, -2 and VDE 0660 T200.

Emergency-stop Grab Wire easilyaccessible during normal workoperation along a machine

Emergency stop Grab WireSafety Switch

JSNY10Features:

Approvals:

Application:

Machines

Transportation lines

Easily accessible

Forced contacts

Double switching in both

directions of travel

IP 65



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Technical data - JSNY10Supplier JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Ordering data see Component ordering list

Colour Black with yellow label

Housing Material Cast aluminium

Lid Material Aluminium

Operating temperature -30°C to +80°C

Switching contacts 4 NC (2 forced)

Protection class IP 65, EN 60529

Mechanical life 1 million switching cycles

Max. switching frequency 20/min

Reset method mushroom-head slam button

Max. wire length 25 m

Mounting 4 x M5

Terminals Screw terminal, 8 x M4

Cable access 2 x M20 x 1.5

Weight 700g

Max. voltage 400 VAC

Thermal current 16 A

Utilisation category AC 15, DC 13

Short-circuit protection 16 A delay fuse, 20 A quick fuse

Wire supports should be attached at a height of at least 20-25mm above the surface where the switch is to be installed.Turnbuckles may be used to 'tune' the pull-wire system to the correct tension. A medium operating temperature should be maintained

during installation. The wire should be pulled heavily several times, then the tension of the wire should be readjusted to compensate

for the elongation of the wire resulting from thimble distortion.

Reset button Wire clamp

max. 300 mm

Wire turnbuckle Eye bolt

max. 50 m (2 switches)

2 to max. 5 m

Mounting - JSNY10

Component ordering list - JSNY10

JSNY10 (20-034-00) SwitchJSNY10-K (20-034-07) Mounting kit 25 m:

Plastic coated steel cable wire 1 pce Wire turnbuckle

4 pcs thimble 4 pcs wire clamp 5 pcs eye bolts with nuts

JSNY10-W3 (20-034-05) Wire plastic coated red 3 mm/4 mm (core/sleeve) per Meter

JSNY10-S6 (20-034-02) Eye bolt M6x50

JSNY10-M6 (41-060-03) Nut M6 (to eyebolt)

JSNY10-V6 (20-034-06) Wire turnbuckle M5x50

JSNY10-L3 (20-034-04) Wire clamp, duplex

JSNY10-T4 (20-034-03) Wire thimble

JSNY10-R5 (20-034-13) Swivel for wire

95.678.5

(74)

7.535 33

5 12 5

ø 2 5

ø 1 5

ø 3 5

ø 5 . 4

7 2

8 2

ø 5

2 0 . 5

8 . 5

4 5 , 5 6 9

M20 x1.5 (2x)

min. 20-mm



0 mm

2 mm

6 mm

8 mm

80N

200N 1 3 - 1 4

4 5 - 4 6

3 3 - 3 4

2 5 - 2 6

www.jokabsafety.com9:18

Contact Adjustment JSNY10

When the wire is installed with the correct tension all contacts are closed. Adjust the turnbuckle to get correct tension,the scribed line on the axis of the JSNY10 should be just visible at the top of the socket.

When an emergency stop condition occurs, switches 25-26 and 45-46 open, when the wire breaks contacts 13-14and 33-34 open.

Mounted wire with correct tension

Emergency stop

Wire breakage

Electrical Connection JSNY10

Electrical connection of JSNY10,highest level of safety.

Note! The connection shows the JSNY10 ina correctly tensioned condition.

axis

socketscribed

line

c l o

s e d

o p e

n

Tolerance of force: +/- 15%





Contact rails, Bumpersand Safety Mats



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Contact rails and bumpersContact rails are used as protection against squeezingaccidents, i.e. on moving machine parts and automaticdoors and hatches. The strips come in customisedlengths and various cross sections. Bumpers are used as safety buffers to protect against

remote control transport vehicles and other dangerousmoving objects that require long stopping distances.

§Standard: EN 1760-2 Safety of machinery -Pressure sensitive protective devices - Part2: General principles for the design and

testing of pressure sensitive edges andpressure sensitive bars

Safety matsSafety mats are used for protection around hazard-ous machinery. They are well suited for monitoring anarea used for loading and unloading of material to amachine.

Standard: EN 1760-1 Safety of machinery- Pressure sensitive protective devices- Part 1: General principles for the designand testing of pressure sensitive mats andpressure sensitive floors

§

When shall I use contact rails, bumpers and safety mats?

While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information materialJOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the usersresponsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national andinternational codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by variousinternational approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustratethe various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarantee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples ina particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the productbased on the examples given. 2008 v02.

Contents Page

When shall I use contact rails, bumpers

and safety mats? __________________________________________________ 10:1

Contacts rails and bumpers _________________________________________ 10:2

Safety mats _______________________________________________________ 10:8



Safety

Safety contact rails and bumpers as safety

devices for potentially dangerous machines

Fields of Application

ber protect the inner contact strip in the best way possibleagainst damage and also allow for a contact angle excee-ding ±45˚. Normally supplied in lengths up to 25 m.

Bumpers

Bumpers are employed on automatic production lines tominimise danger to both people and machines. The largefoam rubber cushions enable long practical braking andrun-through distances, thus enabling designers to optimise

protection for both personnel and machines.The safety contact strips are mounted inside aluminium

profiles which are, in turn, protected by the large foam cush-ions that are glued to the carrier profile and then sprayedwith a thin film of polyurethane which makes the bumperwaterproof and helps to minimise wear and tear. The bumpers are delivered mounted to the carrier profilein ordered lengths (0,2 m – 3 m).

Safety contact rails

Contact edges are used as protection against crushing inju-ries, for example, moving machine parts, automatic doors.

Contact edges with cast-in contact strips

Our new contact edges consist of a rubber profile with acast-in contact strip. They are made up simply using con-nection plugs that are glued to the ends together with aterminal cap. The rubber profile is fitted on an aluminium

profile.Available in EPDM design. Supplied in lengths up to 25 m.

Contact edges with contact strips SKS 18

The contact edge consists of a rubber profile with a safetycontact strip inside. The contact edge is fitted on an alumi-nium profile.The special design of rubber profiles of EPDM or NBR rub-

contact rails

Approvals:

Protection against squeezing

accidents on moving machineparts and automatic doors.

Utilization:

Features:

Can be connected to asafety relay, Vital or Pluto

Supplied in customizedlengths

IP 65

Simple assembly on site

Lengths up to 25 m.

Contact!

& bumpers



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Safety contact rails GP - General

The safety contact strip, SKS 18, the actual contactor, is lo-cated inside the safety contact rail. The safety contact stripconsist of a homogeneous highly insulating outer EPDM mate-rial and has two internal conducting contact surfaces. The con-ducting elastomer contains two copper wires that provide low-resistance detection even in lengths exceeding 100 metres. Because of the contact points, the safety contact rail hasapproximate 20 mm of inactive length at each end.

To provide protection against damage and to enable itsproper use, the safety contact strip is inserted into the switch-ing chamber of the rubber contactor profile. The rubber pro-files (EDPM or NBR) are then permanently sealed with a spe-cial elastic adhesive and end caps to make them watertight.

The safety contact rail is then pressed into the aluminiumprofile.

Safety contact strip SKS 18 for contact edge GP

Rubber profiles

Safety contact strip SKS 18

Conductivecontact surface

Highly insulatedouter material

Copper wire

Safety contact rail,

construction

Aluminium supportprofile, C-profile

SKS 18

Rubber profile

(1) 10-metre lengths of GPedges on request

(2) Measured with ( Ø 80 mmtest specimen),10 mm/s

(3) Measuring speed 10 mm/s(4) Not including DIN 31006-2

(GS - BE - 17)

Technical dataOuter material EPDM, electrical insulation >30

MohmInner material EPDM, electrical elastomer with

reinforce copper wire

Conductivity 60 ohm / 100 meters

Contact resistance approx. 50 ohm

Max. electrical load 24 V / 100 mA

Max. applied pressure 6.5 N/cm2

Dimensions 18 x 6 mm

NOTE! Contact us for otherprofile sizes.

Construction - contact edge GE

Inside the contact edge there is a cast-in contact strip thatconsists of two conductive alternating surfaces on the in-

side and a highly-effective insulating shell. There are towconductive wires in the contact surfaces that allow for lowohm measurements even when the contact edge has an ex-tended length. The cast-in contact strip is protected againstdamage by the surrounding chamber. The cast end plugsensure a permanent contact from the conductive surfacesin the contact strip. A special flexible adhesive is used tomake the connector ring watertight.

Tekniska dataType GP 25-25

25

25

GP 25-40

40

25

GE 25-25

25

2 5

GE 25-45

25

4 5

Fixing Profile AL 25-14 AL 25-14 Al 25-14 Al 25-14

Material EPDM/NBR EPDM/NBR EPDM EPDM

Length max (m) (1) 6(10) 6(10) 25 25

Weight (g/m) 370 480 510 770

Weight incl. C-Profile(g/m)

690 800 820 1080

Activation force (N) (2) 34/37 39/52 64,1 69,1

Actuating distance (mm) (3) 8.0/7.5 9.4/9.7 4,7 6,73

Braking distance (mm) (3) 10.2/9.5 7.2/5.9 6,48 20,73

Max. Actuating ( º ) (4) 2x 45º 2x 60º 2x20˚ 2x20˚

Terminal resistor

Rubber profilewith integratedcontact strip

Terminalcap

Connection plug

Aluminium profile



Common properties

Physical and chemical material properties

Note! The information given is based on data obtained fromthe respective material suppliers. Although all efforts have beenmade, unforeseen factors can have a considerable effect on thegenerally applied indications during practical use therefore thisinformation must be used as a general guide only. If there is any

doubt as to the suitability of the materials used for any specificapplication/environment, we will, upon request, supply rubbersamples for your own evaluation or, if given written specificationsof your proposed environmental conditions, test the suitability ofmaterials for your specific application.

EPDM Good resistance to ozone and weather,especially against chemicals

NBR Good resistance to oil and petrolASTM American Society for Testing MaterialKw Aromatic hydrocarbon

Ester Organic solventKetone Oxidized solventAliphatic i.e. petrolAromatic i.e. benzol

Properties EPDM NBR Resistance EPDM NBR 1 = no effect for lasting contact

Tensile strength 3 2 Water (distilled) 1-2 1 2 = slight effect non-lasting contact

Tensile elongation 3 2 Acids (diluted) 1 3 3 = moderate effect moderate contact

Durability 3 2 Bases (diluted) 2 2 4 = appreciable effect limited contact

Tear resistance 3 3 Non-oxidised acids 2 3 5 = strong effect short-term contact

Cold flexibility 2 3 Oxidised acids 4 5 6 = extreme effect avoid contact

Heat resistance 2 2 ASTM oil No. 3 6 1Oxidation resistance 1 3 Vegetable oil 5 1

UV-resistance 1 3 Ester solvent 2 5

Weather/ ozoneresistance 1 3 Ketone solvent 3 5

Flame resistance 6 6 Aliphatic hydrocarb. 5 1

Gas permeability 4 2 Aromatic hydrocarb. 6 2-3

Halogenic hydro-carb.

6 5

1= excellent - 6 = poor Alcohols 1 5

Technical specificationsManufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden


GP

76-025-25 Contact rail GP25/25 EPDM.Ordered by length

76-125-25 Contact rail GP25/25 NBR.Ordered by length

76-025-40 Contact rail GP25/40 EPDM.

Ordered by length76-125-40 Contact rail GP25/40 NBR.

Ordered by length

76-009-01 Ready-made, 2+2 m cable76-009-05 Ready-made, 5+5 m cable76-009-08 Ready-made, 7+7 m cable76-009-10 Ready-made, 10+10 m cable

Please contact us for more alternatives.

GE

76-005-02 Contact edge GE25-25 EPDM permetre.

76-005-04 Contact edge GE25-45 EPDM permetre.

76-005-44 Connection plug with 2.5 m cable.

76-005-45 Connection plug with 5m cable76-005-46 Connection plug with 10m cable76-005-47 Connection plug with resistor 8.2ΓQ76-005-61 Terminal cap for GE25-4576-005-62 Terminal cap for GE25-25

Mechanical load max 1 500 N

Actuating angle (DIN)1 2x 20º

Mechanical life1 105

Max. operate temp. range2 -20Cº to +55ºC

Max. temperature range -25ºC to +70ºC

Protection classification IP 65

Max. Electrical load 24V 100mA

Resistance 0.6 Ohm/m

Conductors GP: 2x 0.38 mm2 GE: 2x 0.34 mm2

Conductors insulation material GP: PVC GE: PUR matt blackt

(1) According to DIN 31006-2 (GS - BE - 17)(2) Not including DIN 31006-2 (GS - BE - 17)



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Mounting and electrical connection – Safety contact rails

The selected contact profile should be mounted usinga suitable aluminium C profile (as shown opposite).

Mounting

Stage 1 – GP and GE

Pan or round-head screws should not be used to mountthe aluminium C profile. If such screws are used this canresult in the connecting wire in the aluminium profile be-ing damaged.

Stage 2 – GP and GE

In order to feed the connecting wire through the profile,an 8 mm hole must be drilled in a suitable position. Care-fully remove the burr from the hole edges and insert thesupplied rubber collar. The connecting wires can also beplaced in the aluminium profile.

Stage 3 – GP

In order to make fitting of the safety contact rail easier,the aluminium profile and the safety contact rail shouldbe sprayed with a water based soap solution. One side ofthe rubber profile must then first be inserted into the pro-

file and then the whole profile pressed in. Once the soapsolution has evaporated, the contact strip will be firmlyfitted into the profile. In order to prevent subsequent slip-ping of the safety contact rail, talcum powder, oils or simi-larly permanent lubricating agents must not be used.

Note! Pulling or pushing the safe-ty contact rail into the aluminiumprofile can cause damage to thecontact rail and should be avoid-ed at all costs. Any other proposed methods offixing should only be attempted af-ter consultation with Jokab Safety.Other methods of fixing, unlessapproved by Jokab Safety may in-validate the warranty and may leadto incorrect device operation.

Stage 3 – GE

Safety contact edges with a t-base have to be pushedinto the aluminium profile.


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 290/395www.jokabsafety.com10:6 www.jokabsafety.com

10:6

Technical dataArticle number/

ordering data:76-200-0176-200-0276-200-0376-200-0476-200-0576-200-0676-200-07

76-200-0876-200-0976-200-1076-200-1176-200-1276-200-1376-200-1476-200-1576-200-1676-200-00

Bumper ASB53/100 black100/200 black150/300 black200/400 black53/100 black/yellow100/200 black/yellow150/300 black/yellow

200/400 black/yellow60/100 NBR black (63/100)100/200 NBR black 150/300 NBR black200/400 NBR black200/200 black150/150 NBR black100/200 NBR black/yellow150/250 NBR black/yellowBumper base price

Dimensions in accordance with the illustra-tion, or special dimensions

Actuating distance approx. 20% of height

Braking distance at least 50% of heightActuating force [N] 150 N at 80 mm around the test

specimen

Life greater than 105

Protection class IP 65

Ambient temperature -20º to +60º

Chemical resistanceOil, grease10% acid10% alkaline (caustic) solutions

goodresistantresistant

Connection cable 2 x 2 m; 2 x 0,34 mm2 PUcovered

Foam rubber core

Polyurethane cover

Aluminium profileSafety contact stripSKS 18

Carrier aluminium profile

Force

Contact atapprox. 20%

Max.compressionto approx. 70%

Deformation(%)

Useablebraking distanceapprox. 50%

The safety bumper principle

The contact function of the JOKAB SAFETY bumper con-sists of the safety contact strip SKS 18 being actuated bya special mechanical construction. This construction, whichis protected by a large foam cushion, is inserted and gluedto the carrier profile. The foam rubber is covered with apolyurethane skin. The safety bumper is also covered withcross-bound polyurethane, which can be provided in arange of colours. By utilising this construction the bumper

gives a stop signal when impacted from all directions withsoft sides. The Safety Bumper must be connected to a suitable twoinput channel Safety Relay. e.g. Jokab Safety type RT6 orRT7 which provides all necessary monitoring of the bump-ers activation and detection of cable faults. The twin cable connection makes it possible to connectseveral bumpers in series. For further information and examples of electrical con-nection see Connection examples.


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 291/395www.jokabsafety.com 10:7www.jokabsafety.com 10:7

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Standard shapes

Customer-specifiedspecial shapeShape A Shape B

Cable exits at the ends of the bumper or according to customer requirements.

Dimensions

Bumpers are available in four different standard dimensions. Other dimensions can be supplied on request.Note that in the case of customised orders, the ratio of 2:1 for X:Y must not be exceeded. Bumpers canbe supplied in lengths of up to 3000 mm. The minimum cross-section is 53 x 100 mm.

Cross-section width

C r o s s - s e c t i o n h e i g h t



Safety

Certified accordingto EN 1760-1.

A Safety mat used as personal

protection within dangerous areas.

The ASK Safety Mat is used as personal protection withinthe dangerous areas around presses, robots, productionlines, machines etc.

When connected to a suitable monitoring system step-ping on the Safety Mat will immediately be detected caus-ing dangerous machine movements to be stopped. This ismade possible by the detection of electrical contacts clos-ing within the sandwich construction of the Mat. As a load-bearing component the Mat is made with a bottom plateof either synthetic material or metal. The Safety Mat is pro-vided with a ribbed surface, which is fixed by adhesive tothe surface of the Safety Mat.

The safety mat and its connection cabling can be supervi-sed by a suitable Jokab Safety safety relay, which providesa category 3 safety level for the cabling, while the mat is incategory 1.

Mat constructionThe basic Mat construction consists of a ground plate ofeither PVC, Aluminium or Stainless Steel which providesprotection against uneven ground etc. The Mat is made upof a sandwich construction, the pressure contact switchconsisting of two conducting sheets separated from eachother by a webbed isolating layer. The internal switching sur-face is cast into a durable polyurethane to protect againstmoisture, and this is then covered with a top layer of ribbedor chequered rubber mat or a thin aluminium plate. Attachment to the floor is by means of a ramped edgetrim or a z-profile made of aluminium. The ramp profile has

a channel for connection cables. Custom Mats can be made, i.e. special shape, resist-ant against harsh industrial environments (mineral oil, acid,bleach etc.) or with a non-slip surface or M12-contacts.

Ribbed Surface

Polyurethane- Upper Surface

Contact Surface 1Isolating LayerContact Surface 2

Contact!

Mats

Approvals:

Safety Mats for:

Features:

Can be connected to a safetyrelay, Vital or Pluto

Very durable

IP 67

Personal protection within the dan-

gerous areas around presses, ro-bots, production lines, machinesetc.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Edge Trim - Safety Mats

Technical Data - Safety MatsManufacturer JOKAB SAFETY AB, Sweden

Article number/

ordering data:76-301-00Production cost cast mat in PUwith RF finish ASK-1U4.4-RF

76-301-02Production cost cast mat in PUwith RF finish and cast-in rampedge trim ASK-1T4.4-RF

ASK-1U4.4-RF. No ramp edgetrim:76-310-05 1000 x 750 mm76-310-06 1000 x 1000 mm76-310-07 1000 x 1500 mm

ASK-1T4.4-RF. Cast-in rampedge trim:76-310-101000 x 750 mm76-310-11 1000 x 1000 mm76-310-12 1000 x 1500 mm

The above have a PU surfacelayer. Mats are available in anysize and in other materials.

Connection cabling including 1off M8 male and 1 off M8 female:76-900-32 2.5 m76-900-33 5 m

Edge trim RS 14Eliminates vertical edges and attaches theSafety Mat to the floor. Also provides protec-tion and channel for connection cables.Profile BS14

Best for use on the side nearest the machine.Permits a shorter distance from, for example, awall.Corner trimCan be used between two RS 14 profiles as analternative to mitre cutting of profiles.

Max. area Entire mat = 2500 x 1400 mm10 m2 (divided mat)

Height 10mm without ribbed surfacemax 14.5 mm with ribbedsurface

Inactive Area Nominally 10mm from Mat edge

Switching Force 150N (Round body 80mm)

Max. Pressure 2000 N over ø 80 mm

Material Yellow polyurethane, black rub-ber coating

Protection Class IP 67

Ambient Air Temperature -20°C to + 60°C

Chemical Resistance

Oil, grease10% acid10% alkaline (caustic) solutions

goodresistantresistant

Cable 2 x 5 m, 2 x 0,34 mm2,PU sheathed

Mechanical Life > 1,5x106 load shifting

Base unit Corner connection

Angle fixing profile

Fixing profile

Surface protection

Connection cable

Channel for connection cable

ASK-1U4.4-RF

Connection cable

ASK-1T4.4-RF

Completely moulded mat

with moulded

edge profiles in PU.

Secured area + 70 mm

Non-secured area

N o n - s e c u r e d a r e a

N o n - s e c

u r e d a r e a +

7 0 m m



Mounting - Safety Mats

The ground on which the mats are to be laid must be level, clean and dry. The matsshould not be glued to the ground.

Place mat in required position with groundplate downwards.If more than one mat is to be installed be sure to place the mats edge to edge (withoutspace).

If the mats are delivered without the ribbed surface premounted, the selected surfaceshould be placed in position over the mats and fixed by means of a suitable adhesive.

In the case of safety mats with cast-in rubber edge trim, the mat is secured to the floorby screws straight through the edge trim. In the case of safety mats with an aluminiumedge trim, see below.Place the selected edge trim to the mat. Edge trims are usually mitred (at 45 degrees)to provide complete protection around the corners of the mat.

Mark the cable routes on the edge trim and cut out slots to allow cable access into thecable channel as indicated. Connect the cables as shown under Electrical Connection.

Mark the locations of the securing screws along the scribed line on the edge trim. It isrecommended that fixing screws should be located at 60 cm spacing.

Secure the edge trim to the ground with 6 mm plugs and suitable screws. Plug the holesabove the screws in the edge trim with the cover plugs provided.

NOTE!

Safety mats must not be rolled/twisted or modified in any way. It is also essential thatmats are not cut into any shape or shortened following delivery.

Surface layer - Safety mats

Safety mats are normally supplied with a ribbed polyurethane non-slip sur-face layer that withstands tough conditions very well (oil, acid or causticsubstances) and has anti-slip properties. If required, other patterns can besupplied, or for special requirements even other materials, such as NBRrubber or chequer plating in aluminium or stainless steel. Safety mats canalso be supplied without a surface layer, to have a full coverage rubber sheetglued on during installation. Please contact us for more information aboutthese alternatives.

Safety distance - safety mat as per EN 999

If a safety mat is used as entry protection, the smallestpermitted safety distance between the hazardous areaand the outer edge of the mat (seen from the hazard) iscalculated using the formula from EN 999.

S = (K * T) + C

where

S = smallest permitted safety distance in mmK = body speed (velocity of propagation 1600 mm/s)C = additional distance in mm based on the intrusion ofthe body into the risk zone before the protection deviceis actuated (1200 mm)

i.e. S = (1600 * T) + 1200


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 295/395www.jokabsafety.com 10:11www.jokabsafety.com 10:11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Note! If alternative units are used rather than the recommended Jokab safety relays, it is essential that the user checks their suit-ability with Jokab Safety before use. Failure to do so may result in incorrect operation and/or damage to the safety bumpers andinvalidate warranty.

Electrical connection - Safety contact rails, bumpers and safety mats

Contact edge, bumper or safety mat must be connectedto a suitable monitoring unit (e.g. Jokab Safety safety re-lays RT6, RT7A/B, RT9, RT10, Vital with Tina 6A or Plutosafety-PLC).

The monitoring unit monitors the functionality of the con-tact protection and detects any breaks or short-circuits inthe lines. Several crush protection units can be connected

in series while still retaining the same level of safety.

When pressure is applied, the active surface of the con-tact area in the contact protection is closed and the sa-fety output on the monitoring unit trips. A stop signal willbe sent to the machine's safety circuits preventing anydangerous movements.

HK7601A – Connection contact protection for safety relay RT6


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/en-safety-handbook-08v2 296/395www.jokabsafety.com10:1210:12 www.jokabsafety.com

HK3310A – Connection contact protection for safety module Vital 1

HK0001A – Connection contact protection for safety PLC Pluto





Fencing systemQuick-Guard® and Safety Roller Door



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Contents Page

While every effort has been taken to ensure the accuracy of information contained in this book and any associated promotional and information materialJOKAB SAFETY cannot accept responsibility for errors or omissions and reserves the right to make any improvements without notice. It is the usersresponsibility to ensure that this equipment is correctly designed, specified, installed, cared for and operated to meet all applicable local, national andinternational codes/regulations. Technical data in our book is correct to the level of accuracy of Jokab Safety´s test procedures as verified by variousinternational approved bodies. Other information (such as application examples, wiring diagrams, operation or use) is intended solely to illustratethe various uses of our products. JOKAB SAFETY does not guarentee or imply that the product when used in accordance with such examples ina particular environment will fulfil any particular safety requirement and does not assume any responsibility or liability for actual use of the productbased on the examples given. 2008 v02.

A flexible and stable fencing system which is easy to install _____________ 11:2

Quick-Guard ® is supplied in three posibilities _________________________ 11:4

Quick-Guard ® E - design directly on site ______________________________ 11:5

Quick-Guard ® E - can be ordered in sections__________________________ 11:6

Quick-Guard ® standard and SafeCAD® _______________________________ 11:8

Quick-Guard ® Assembly, standard version ____________________________ 11:9

Assembly using NL2 and NL3 Net-locks on welded mesh ______________ 11:10

Dimensions of aluminium profile lengths and panels __________________ 11:11

Components

__________________________________________________________ 11:12

___________________________________________________________________ 11:15

__________________________________________________________ 11:18

________________________________________________________ 11:27

____________________________________________________ 11:30

_______________________________________________________________ 11:31 ________________________________________________ 11:32

Safety Roller Door ________________________________________________ 11:34



Adaption and Modification

Quick-Guard is a very flexible fencing system consisting ofa minimum of different components, e.g. aluminium profiles,patented brackets, net-locks, mesh, solid or noise reduc-tion panels. Using these components there are almost nolimitations as to what can be built. Quick-Guard fencingcosts little to assemble and modify.

Assembly

brackets pre-mounted with fixing screws and nuts. No holesneed to be drilled in the profiles and all cutting is straight.This makes assembly and modification very easy.

Two versions of Quick-Guard

The Quick-Guard fencing system is available in two versions,Quick-Guard (Standard) and Quick-Guard E which also canbe combined. The fencing systems are also easy to adjustwhen production equipment is modified and/or moved.

Proposal and ordering

drawings can also be used for installation purposes.

Our policy - To create systems that are

environmentally friendly and provide ergonomic

working conditions

Quick-Guard is environmentally friendly. All componentsin the Fencing System can easily be disassembled andreused. All materials in the Fencing System are 100%recyclable. Quick-Guard can also provide a pleasingergonomic working environment.

A flexible and stable fencing system which is easy to install

Advantages

Brackets are supplied pre-mounted

with screws and nuts

Easy to adjust, assemble and modify

Designed for various types of mesh,

solid and noise reduction panels

Short delivery time

SafeCAD, a special program for

drawing Quick-Guard in 3D, from which

2D and other 3D views can be created.

Cutting lists can also be created from

this program.

Quick-Guard E with fewcomponents and easy to angle at up

to 45°.

Quick-Guard Standard with black andtransparent Polycarbonate in-fill panelsas used for medical applications.

Quick-Guard Standard assembled withmesh.

Quick-Guard® - fencing system

Patented screw-lock system and netlocks keep themesh in place when subjected to heavy loading.



0 200 500 900 0 350

2500

1600

2500

2000

mm mm1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

The Jokab Safety patented guide and locking methodmakes it simple to assemble and dismantle the fencing

system. The nut has several advantages, it can easily belocated into the profile and automatically positions itselfwhen the screw is turned 90 degrees clockwise. Whenin this position the bracket being fixed can be adjustedas required and locked by turning the screw further clock-wise. To remove the bracket the fixing screw is turnedanti-clockwise until the nut is in line with the profile slot.

What does the standard say?

Patented assembly function

The European safety distance standard EN ISO 13857provides information on acceptable safety distances inhazardous areas. These figures give examples of the safety distances re-quired for two different fencing heights, where the risk isconsidered to be low if somebody reaches into the ha-zardous area. If there is a risk of direct injury and/or per-sonal can be dragged into the hazardous area the safetydistances must be increased. For accepted heights anddistances please refer to EN ISO 13857 and other rele-vant standards/regulations. When mesh is used there mustbe a minimum distance of 200 mm (for persons older than14 years) for a mesh size of 40x40 mm. For shorter distan-ces and for noise reduction, polycarbonate sheet shouldbe considered. When the fence shall protect for examplea robot cell, the fence should be placed with a minimumdistance of 500 mm between the guard fence and the mo-ving machine part which reaches the furthest (according has to be space between the fence and moving parts to

prevent the operator from being squeezed between them. Jokab Safety will be pleased to advise on guarding de-sign and safety distances required.

Safety distance for1600 mmguarding with

standard mesh.

Safety distance for 2000mm guarding with solidscreens (e.g. polycarbo-

nate sheet).

Quick-Guard is a fencing system which is designed tomanage the requirements from a safety perspective. It ma-nages to stop machine parts and material that, during amalfunction, can be thrown against the fence. We have

made collision tests with a large industrial robot, ABB Irb6600, which was driven into the fence at a pace of 3 m/s.Both our Standard and Express fencing system withstoodthis. Thanks to our patented net-lock, both net and polycar-bonate panels remained firmly attached to the aluminumprofile. A video showing these tests is available on ourwebsite. In our tension-tests of up to 500 kg, both net and

polycarbonate panels also remained firmly in the aluminumprofiles. The fence was deformed during the collision but itsprung back, with some deformation as a result.

Quick-Guard Fencing System, what does it manage?

anti-clockwise. Then tighten the screw clockwise in theusual way. The nut will then automatically mechanicallylock the fixture into the profile.

In our pulling tests of upto 500 kg, both mesh and polycarbonate panels remai-ned firmly attached to the

the profile.

Fittings that donot have a cast-in tab can be provided with a centringwasher.

Lockingperpendicular

to profile slot

turning limitations

patented



Quick-Guard® is supplied in three ways

1. To be designed on site

2. Cut to size according

to drawing

3. Pre-mounted or assembled on site

You only order sections consisting of a few components.Then the fencing system is built on site. A manual mesh

clipping tool, for easy cutting of the mesh, is providedwith the delivery if needed.

how you want the fencing system to look. We input this

From this drawing, cutting and component lists and aquotation are generated automatically.

We can deliver full/partially pre-assembled fencing systems or wecan assemble them on site.



1. 2.

3. 4.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

first slackening the screw anti-clockwise. Then tighten thescrew clockwise in the usual way, the nut will then auto-matically locate into the correct position and mechanically turned correctly.

1. Insert spacer screw into the post profiles.

NL2 netlocks.4. Fix top u-profile in place either before or after inserting

the mesh.

Quick-Guard E is easy to assemble

and to angle 45° .

U-profile

Net-lock NL2

Assemble the next section. The distance between theposts can be adjusted some mm after the mesh is lockedin with the Net-locks. The mesh can be angled up to 45°

Lock the top of the mesh using NL3 netlocks; this waythe mesh is secured, stabilised and electrically grounded.Grounding is needed when electrical devices or cables areassembled on the mesh.

Spacer screw

Quick-Guard® E - design directly on site

Quick-Guard E is installed quickly and cost effectivelybecause it only consists of patented net-locks, weldedmesh, panels of polycarbonate, u-profiles and fence posts(profiles with floor-brackets). All parts for Quick-Guardand pre-assembled doors are delivered immediately fromstock. The few components of the fencing system make it

easy for you to custom build and install the fencing systemyourselves. The strength of the fencing system originates from thefact that the welded mesh and/or panels of polycarbonateare ‘locked’ into the profile. The outer wire of the meshis locked by uniquely designed ‘netlocks’ into the profilemaking the fixing virtually as strong as being welded. Thepolycarbonate panels are locked in with specially designedinfill-locks which, according to our tests, have been asstrong as the mesh netlock system. If you want more stablefencing posts, you can choose a sturdier profile measuring44 x 88 mm instead of the standard 44 x 44 mm profile.

It is always easy to combine Quick-Guard E with Quick-Guard standard to achieve a complete system. It is also easyto adjust and modify the guarding system when productionequipment is modified and/or moved.

Assembly of Quick-Guard E



One can easily assemble the Express sections. It is also possible to angle these sections (45°). The mesh can easilybe cut to the desired size with a simple clipping tool.

Quick-Guard Express can be ordered in different sections consisting of a few components. By adding the dif-ferent sections, one can easily build a guard fencing system. We have also developed a software program inExcel for you to be able to quickly calculate which components you will need and to visualize a fencing systembuilt with sections.

Quick-Guard® E - can be ordered in sections

JSM E11-N/PC20H8

Express 11 = c-c 1100 mm15 = c-c 1500 mm

20 = Height 2000 mm22 = Height 2200 mm

H, X, Y, Z, G, S andX = Section type

Designation explanation.

IMAGE DESIGNATION ART.NO. DESCRIPTION

Section X

40-106-0240-101-0340-102-0340-104-0140-105-0140-101-5340-102-5340-106-1040-101-0940-102-08

one post. The height can be varied between2000 mm or 2200 mm. The section is suppliedunassembled.

Included parts: Floorbracket, netlocks/panellocks, support screws, edge protection, Alumi-num profile and welded steel mesh/panel sheet.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

IMAGE DESIGNATION ART.NO. DESCRIPTION

Section Y

40-106-8040-103-2140-103-41

-et to finalize the additional sections. The heightcan be varied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm.The section is supplied unassembled.

Included parts: Floorbracket, support screw, and

Aluminum profile.

Section Z

40-106-0440-101-0440-102-0440-104-0240-105-02

40-106-5440-101-5440-102-5440-106-0840-101-1040-102-09

fence posts and floor brackets. The height canbe varied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm. Thesection is supplied unassembled.

Included parts: Netlocks/panel locks, edge pro-tection and welded steel mesh/panel sheet.

Section G

supplied pre-mounted.

40-101-0540-102-0540-104-0340-105-0340-106-5540-101-5540-102-55

with outer profile 44x88 mm. The height canbe varied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm. Thesection is supplied unassembled. The size of thedoor can easily be adjusted on site.

Included parts: L-brackets, floorbrackets, net-locks/panel locks, handle, hinges, door stop,crossbar, aluminum profiles and welded steelmesh/panel sheet.

Section S

40-101-0640-102 -06

40-104-0440-105-0440-101-5740-102-56

40-101-1140-102-10

outer profile 44x88 mm. The height can be var-

ied between 2000 mm or 2200 mm. The sectionis supplied unassembled. The size of the doorcan easily be adjusted on location.

Included parts: L-brackets, T-brackets, floorbrack-ets, netlocks/panel locks, handle, suspensionwheels, guiding components, door stop, cross-bar, endcaps, aluminum profiles and weldedsteelmesh/panel sheet.



Quote

SafeCAD®

Example of component and cutting list print-outs from SafeCad.

Quick-Guard® Standard and SafeCAD®

Quick-Guard consists of a minimum of different components,such as aluminum profiles, patented assembly parts, net-locks, mesh, solid or noise reduction panels. Furthermorethe cost for assembly and modification of the system islow. Thanks to our patented screw-lock system, we cansupply all brackets pre-mounted with fixing screws andnuts. No holes need to be drilled in the profiles and all cuts

are made straight. Assembly and modification is thereforevery easy.

To be able to quickly and easily custom design practicalsafety solutions, we have developed a computer programme,

. A sim-ple sketch of the guarding system that is required is usedas the program input. The positions of doors and hatches,choice of mesh, polycarbonate, aluminum/steel sheet ornoise reduction panels are typed in. The program automati- cutting lists. These drawings are also used as the basis for

assembly/ installation. It is always easy to combine Quick-Guard E with Quick-Guard to achieve a complete system. It is also easy to adjustand modify when the production equipment is modifiedand/or moved.

Brackets are deliveredPre-assembled withscrews and nuts.



1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Assembly of the Quick-Guard system is very easy. All components are very light in weight and ergonomic in design. Thisenables, in most cases, one man to be able to assemble both simple and complex structures with ease using very fewdifferent types of fixing components. All fixtures can be mounted easily from “outside” by using the specially designed”locking nut” which can be located anywhere in the extrusion channel. The fixture components, by means of integrallocating keys, ensure that correct angles are achieved and enable the number of bolts/nuts to be reduced to half thenumber that would otherwise be required.

Insert infill panel and fix middle horizontal profile. Thedistance between the profiles is the width of the infillminus 20 mm.

Insert top infill panel. Fix top profile with fittings on thetop on both sides.

clockwise. Then tighten the screw clockwise in the usualway. The nut will then automatically locate into the correctposition and mechanically lock the fixture into the profile.

Attach lower horizontal extrusion between vertical posts.Use a a spacing block to ensure the correct distance fromthe floor.

Fix the poles to the floor.Secure infill sheet with plastic strip or Net-lock fixings.Easy, fast and quick. See more under Assembly of netlocks.

Quick-Guard® Assembly, standard version



90 mm

90 mm

Assembly using NL2 and NL3 Net-locks on welded mesh

When assembling the Net-lock NL3 it is first put into

the profile with the tabs on each side of the mesh wire.The screw is then tightened. When cutting the weldedmesh the wire ends should be at least 15 mm to fitinto the profile. NL3 must be used to lock the meshinto the slot.

NL2 Net-lock NL3 Net-lock

The Net-lock locksthe mesh againstthe profile.

When assembling the Net-lock NL2 it is first put intothe profile as the drawing shows. Then the Net-lock isturned 90°. When cutting the welded mesh the wireends should not be longer than two (2) mm.

The outer meshwire is locked intothe profile.

The outer mesh wire islocked into the profile.

max 2 mm

max 2 mmmin 15 mm

Number of Net-locks Quick-Guard

standard version

On Quick-Guard standard version NL3 is recommendedas it can handle mesh with and without an outer wire.

Number of Net-locks Quick-Guard E

On Quick-Guard E both Net-lock NL2 and NL3 can beused. For mesh edges without outer wire NL3 must beused instead of NL2.

NOTE! On both Quick-Guard Standard and Quick-Guard E at least two NL3 should be used in order tomechanically lock the mesh and to electrically ground the mesh. NL3 should only be used on doors.

Note!

Onweldedmeshwith-out an outer wire NL3must be used.

about 400 mm

approx. 350 mm

Number of Net-locks

WrongRight

Temporarily mount at least two middle profiles before dril-ling and fixing posts to the floor. This method is used wheninfill mesh or panels are to be fitted at a later date.

Note! Never attempt to fix the posts to the floor withoutfirst connecting at least two middle profiles to ensure theposts are parallel to each other and vertical.

Fixing posts to the floor when mesh is required to be fitted at a later date.

NL2 or NL3

NL2 or NL3

NL2 or NL3

NL2 or NL3

NL3 is used in orderto mechanically lockthe mesh and toelectrically groundthe mesh.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Material Width Height Sound-absorbing panel 25mm X-37 mm Y-37 mmSound-absorbing 50 mm X-37 mm Y-37 mm (mitred 2 x 45 degrees) 2 pcs. L=Y (mitred 2 x 45 degrees)

Dimensions for aluminum profile lengths and panels.



ALUMINUM PROFILESA wide range of aluminium profiles are available and include, fencing profile, guide rails, and cable ducting. The cableducting is available in three sizes, and can be delivered with or without mounting holes. The cable ducting is easy to the entire groove cross section utilisable as ‘installation conduit’ for cables. The Aluminium profiles have integral "V"grooves to aid in centring any drilling that may be necessary.

Fencing Profile

Article numbers: 40-037-70 (cut to length) 40-037-74 (L=6000)

44

20,25

11

1 6 , 5

32

1 1 , 5

3 , 3

Ø 5,6 (2x)

Article numbers: 40-037-35 (cut to sizes) 40-037-98 (L=1400) 40-037-37 (L=2000) 40-037-38 (L=2000) 40-037-39 (L=2400) 40-037-40 (L=2500) 40-037-41 (L=6000)

Order Unit: 10 pcs/box

44

1 1 , 5

v

v

v

v 1 1

2 0 , 2 5

3 , 3

Article numbers: 40-037-42 (cut to sizes) 40-037-43 (L=2000) 40-037-44 (L=2200) 40-037-45 (L=6000)

aluminium Order Unit: 5 pcs/box

88

44

4 4 1

1

2 0 , 2

5

1 1 , 5

v

v v

v

v

v

v v

3 , 3

Article numbers: 40-037-75 (cut to length) 40-037-79 (L=6000)

Natural anodized aluminium

v

v

75,4

55,8

44

8 8

2 0 , 2

5

1 1

1 1 , 5

3 , 3

88

v v

v v

v v

v v

Ø 8 (4x)

Ø 5,6 (4x)

Technical data

Angular moment Flexural resistance

Typ Vikt (kg/m) lx (mm4x104) l

y (mm4x104) W

x (mm3x103) W

y (mm3x103)

1.040 1.1 7.6 1.19 3.43

1.504 12.4 12.4 5.64 5.64

2.379 79.6 21.6 18.1 9.8

3.632 143.0 143.0 32.5 32.5



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Fencing U-Profile

Article numbers: 40-037-28 (cut to sizes, max 2.0 m) 40-037-27 (L=1076)

40-037-46 (L=1476) 40-037-47 (L=2000) Weight: 0.230 kg/m

10,4

2 3

H-profile

40-037-51 (L=1076) 40-037-52 (L=1476) 40-037-53 (L=2020) Weight: 0.452 kg/m

10,4

4 4

3

6,7

Guide Rails

Article number: 40-037-26 Holes: c-c = 275 mm, ø = 6 mmStandard Length: 4.0 mWeight: 0.530 kg/m

33

3 4

Article number: 40-037-49

40-037-08

(Length 2.0 m, incl. screws) 40-037-48

(Length 6.0 m, incl. screws) Holes: c-c = 450 mm, ø = 8.5 mmStandard Length: 2.0; 6.0 mWeight: 1.585 kg/m

56

7 9

v

1 7

Cable Ducting

Standard Length: 2.0 m ø= 5 mm Order Unit: 10 pcs/box

Weight:

44

2 5

v

v

v

v





1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

FITTINGSJokab Safety’s fencing system is put together with various types of fitting. Uprights are anchored to the floor withfloor angle fittings. With a small angle fitting it is possible to hang an electrical enclosure and strengthen the corners centres of 47 mm, which means that the gap between uprights will always be less than 20 mm. According to ENISO 13857, the minimum permitted protection distance is 120 mm for a gap narrower than 20 mm.

Floor/Angle fitting

Article numbers: 40-030-14 Washer 9 x 18 x 1,5 (x 2) Quantity: 10 pcs/box

Article number: 40-030-06 Washer 9 x 18 1,5 (x 2) Order Unit: 10 pcs/box

Article numbers: 40-030-11 Washers 9 x 18 x 1,5 (x 4) Quantity: 10 pcs/box


Article number: 40-030-10 Order Unit: 10 pcs/box



Small Angle fitting, e.g. Electrical cabinet fitting

Two counter sunk holes

One counter sunk hole B-K)

Order unit: 10 pcs/box

L-bracket

Article number: 40-030-07 Order Unit: 10 pcs/box

105

1 0 5

41

6

T-bracket



169

1 0 5

41

6

I-bracket, joint



85

4 1

6

44

Distance screw

Article number: 40-033-31 Order unit: 100 pcs/box



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Angle bracket


Hole: c-c =47 mmOrder unit: 2 pcs/box

Note! making fence angles.

1 0 2

4775

3



DOOR COMPONENTSTo mount conventional doors a hinge is available which permits an opening angle of 180°. For mounting a slidingdoor, guide rails and suspension wheels are utilised. Other sliding elements make it possible to build different types ofhatches. Guide rollers, for wide and heavy doors, door closers, fittings for sensors/switches etc are also available.

Conventional Door Sliding Door

Double HatchHatch

Sliding HatchFolding Hatch



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Hinge kit

HingeArticle number: 40-033-15

Fixing Holes : c-c = 62 mmOrder Unit: 2 pcs/box

Note! fitting because its gap can exceed 20 mm.

1 0 2

62

95

3

Spring hingeArticle numbers: 42-020-47 Zinc-plated steel

NOTE! The door gap will be 28 mm when installed. 1

1 5

28

76

22

Handle

HandleArticle number: 40-033-01

26

44

1 5 0

HandleArticle number: 42-020-50Handle: Thermoplastic, black Fittings: Aluminum

Suitable sliding door on the inside of the fence.

40

26

1 5 0

22

570

119





1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Article number: 40-033-42 Brackets: Aluminium

5

4040

20

10

7 0

5 0


60

5

6 8

5 8

8 0

25 3 5

2 2

5

70

Upper Door bolt

Article number: 40-033-21 Brackets: Zinc-plated steelRod: Stainless steel

80 60

4 0

90

30

3 5

1 1 5

6 5

40

4 0

35

5

1 1 3 0

10

5



Lower Door bolt


40

1 3 0

810

5 5

8 3

2 8 0

2 5

18

Lower Door bolt


1 0 0

6

9 9 5

4 0

25

30

4

10

2 5

18

40

3 9 0

1 8 0



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Cam lock

Cam lock


Key to cam lock


22

6032

20

35

6

7 0

Sliding bolt for Eden

Article numbers: 20-302-10

Supplied without an Eden

For installation on hinged doors.

180

40

14

130

110

60

72

110

Magne 1A mount


For installation on hinged doors



Door stop


40

6 0

25

3


vibration damper

For mounting on vertical profiles.

60

60

6 0

5

Article number: 40-033-27 vibration damper

For mounting on horizontal profiles.

4 0

60

75

5

Suspension wheels


Sliding elements

Sliding element, (rectangular)


19

8 4 0



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Sliding element, (round)


19

8

4 0

Sliding element, (guide)


4 0

8

19

9,6

Guide Components for Sliding Door

Guide Bracket for Sliding Door


For mounting on vertical profiles.

5

30

6 5

50

Guide Bracket for Sliding Door


For mounting on horizontal profiles.

605

50

4 0

Bracket for Guide Pin

40

1 2 0

5



Guide roller

Guide roller for conventional door with

locking mechanism

angle bracket

9 7

Guide roller for sliding door

angle bracket

9 5

Diagonal bar for door

Article numbers: 40-033-28Length: 1160 mm

Article numbers: 42-021-73Length: 400 mm 4

0 0 / 1 1 6

0

5

20



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

SWITCH FITTINGS

Eden fittings

Fittings for Eden, adapted for sliding and

conventional doors

Article number 40-033-36

Note!

Two fittings are needed for a complete Eden.

4

40

1 0 0

Eden Fitting for sliding door (flush with fence)

Article number 42-020-40

Note! for a complete unit.

60

4

6 7

5 1

8 0

Fittings for JSNY5 Interlock Switches

Conventional opening door Interlock

Switch Fittings. Article number: 40-033-09

50

2 0

5 5

50

12

4

Conventional opening door Interlock Switch

Fittings.


70

505

4 0

50 5

4 0



Sliding Door Interlock Switch Fittings


127

45

6 0

40

5 6 0

5 65

Fittings for Magnet Switches JSNY7

Hinged door Magnet Switch Fittings


Note! Two fittings are needed for a complete JSNY7. 9 0

3

35

Sliding Door Magnet Switch Fittings


58

4040

9 0

9 0

Fittings for Interlock Switches JSNY8 and JSNY9

Sliding Door Interlock Switch

for JSNY8 Fittings.


5

4

1 3 8

90

40

5 0



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Conventional opening door Interlock

Switch Fittings for JSNY9 and JSNY8


35 42

6 0

4

55

1 5 4

9 4

5

40

Sliding door Interlock Switch Fittings

for JSNY9


40

40

40

6 0

5

596

60

1 3

4



TERMINAL CAPS AND STRIPSTerminal caps are available to cover profile ends, thus eliminating sharp edges. Strips are also available, both narrowand wide, to cover the side of the fencing profile.

Terminal Caps

Terminal Cap for JSM A44A

4444

5

Terminal Cap for JSM A4488A

44

88

5

Terminal Cap for JSM A25


44

2 5

5

Terminal Cap for JSM A60


44

6 0

5

Cover Strip

Narrow Cover Strip, for JSM A44A, JSM A44A,

JSM A4488A and JSM A8888

Order Unit: 2 m

2 , 5

16

Wide Cover Strip, for JSM A44A, JSM A44A,

JSM A4488A and JSM A8888


Order Unit: 25 m/coil

40

2 ,

5



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Accessories

Accessories

All fittings and door components are delivered complete with screws, washers and nuts pre-mounted. For cable

Designation Article number Description Dimension Material Order Unit

JSM S5B ducting Steel

JSM S6A cross-slotted Z (pozidrive) Steel

JSM S8A

JSM S8C fitting and small angle Steel

JSM S8D 100 pcs/box Steel

JSM S8E

JSM M4B Steel

JSM M5B

Steel

JSM M6B Steel

JSM M8B

Steel

JSM X2 41-900-43 E 50pcs/box Steel

JSM X3 41-910-00 Window cleaning fluid (Antistatic) forpolycarbonate sheets. Actuator head 0.5 L. per can

JSM X1 UV-resistant

JSM X4 L=300 each

JSM B4C Ø4,2 100 pcs/box steel






Surfaces

Surfaces

The choice of net and surfaces depends, among other things, on the protection distance. In the case of netting,a minimum distance of 200 mm (for anyone aged 14 or older) with a mesh size of 40x40 mm in accordance with -lable in different materials. For protection of welding cells, polycarbonate welding transparencies are used.

Article no. Name Material Dimensions Type

Stitch: 40x40 mmThread: 3,5 mm

Net locking for welded and woven wire mesh netting, with or without outer wires


Quantity: 100 pcs/box

Article numbers: 40-031-06 Quantity: 100 pcs/box

Net locking for welded netting with outer wire

Other colours or woven wire mesh netting supplied on request.

Welded net

Plastic panel name: JSM Y_

Shockproof panelling

Other materials can be supplied on request.

Article no. Name Material Dimensions Type



1 1

10

10

6

1 2

1

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

20

5

12

3

Surfaces

Panel fixings

Quantity: 50 pcs/package

Steelplate

Soundabsorbing


Panel lockings

Article no. Name Length

Article no. Name Material Thickness Dimensions Kg/m2

outside – painted or galvanised smooth sheet metal inside - galvanised preformed sheet metal core – steel wool

Article no. Name Material Thickness Dimensions

8-12

Other materials are available on request.

Cut to size – max dimension 2000 x 1200

NOTE!

For metal panel fixings Article numbers: 40-038-06 Standard package: 10m/roll

Sheet securing glass Article numbers: 41-930-06 Standard package: 50m/roll



Applications:

Allowing access to risk areas

-ticles, e.g chips and weldingsplash

Features:

Highest safety level accordingto EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1

Withstands harsh environments

Quick operation

High reliability

Noise absorbing

Roller door for short safety distances

and narrow spaces

distance to the machine. The noise absorbing roller door iscompact and it can therefore be placed in narrow spaces.

It is easy and quick to access the machine or gain access It demands a minimum of maintenance and offers reliableoperation. To be able to start the machine/plant the door hasto be completely closed. The closed position is monitoredby the Eden non-contact sensor from Jokab Safety. Assoon as the door begins to open the Eden sends a signal Safety. The roller door fulfills safety category 4 together Protects against welding splash

The roller door protects against ejected particles, such

as chips and welding splash. The roller door fabric is alsoresistant towards a great number of chemicals, whichpermits it to be installed in harsh environments.

Roller DoorSafety Approvals:

Simple assembly it consists of few components and it is supplied partly

pre-assembled. It can be integrated into the Quick-Guardfencing system from Jokab Safety as well as in other typesof fencing systems. It can also be installed on the machineor other permanent construction.

Customized roller doorThis door design is easy to customize. The largest possibleopening width is 4000 mm and the largest possible openingheight is 3000 mm. The maximum size of the door fabricis 10 m2. If a larger door fabric is desired, contact JokabSafety. The door is supplied as standard with a light-greydoor fabric. Other colours can also be supplied. The rollerdoor can be supplied with a viewing window in full width

and at an optional height. The viewing window can alsobe made in a special material that protects against weld-ing splash. The door cloth can also be made completelytransparent with yellow vertical reinforcing strips.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Highest protection in accordance with EN 954-1/

EN ISO 13849-1

The monitoring of the door´s position by two Eden sensors according to EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1. These units are

Functions

The door protects against access to moving parts in themachine/plant. The production process can begin whenthe door is fully closed. The closed position is monitoredby an Eden sensor on both sides of the door. Because thedoor is monitored by Eden sensors at both sides of the doorit is impossible to lift one side of the door and reach intothe risk area without the machine/plant stopping. When

the door has moved a maximum of 10 mm upwards a stopsignal is sent to the protected machine/plant. The Eden failsafe outputs for stopping the machine/plant in the riskarea and to control the door. The door also protects from particles ejected by the pro-duction process, e.g. chips and welding splash. It has agood sound absorbing ability. Because the door operatesquickly, at 0.8-1.0 m/s, the operator has a good access

Minimum safety distance

For the roller door to be able to provide good protection ithas to be installed a sufficient distance away from movingmachine parts.

Useful standards

EN ISO 13857 Safety of machinery - Safety distances toprevent hazard zones being reached by upper and lower

limbs.

EN 999 Safety of machinery - The positioning of protec-tive equipment in respect of approach speeds of parts ofthe human body

Note. The roller door has good protection against weldingsplash and smaller ejected particles from the the produc-tion area. The roller door is not intended to act as collisionprotection. The installer of the roller door has the respon-

sibility of ensuring that sufficient safety distance againstmoving machine parts is provided.

Safety distances & standards

Function

Fully transparent Standard door fabric With viewing window

to the machine area. The door is equipped with a safetycontact strip in the bottom preventing it from causing per-

sonal injury on any person. When the safety contact stripis affected the door is is compressed, the door movementreverses to move upwards. The opening and closing of thedoor can be controlled via the buttons or via the signalsfrom the control system of the machine.

Prevents an unintentional start

When the door is located in front of the machine/plant, wherethe operator can enter the area with his entire body, safeinterlocking of the door´s downward movement is needed.This is to prevent the machine from being started from theoutside when somebody is inside the roller door. One way to solve this is to use a horizontal light curtain

which covers the area which the operator can occupywithin the risk area. Another solution is to place double lightbeams in the opening, combined with a reset facility. Yetanother solution is to use time-reset. A time-reset button isplaced inside the risk area and a button is placed outsidethe risk area. First, the button in the risk area should bepressed and thereafter (within a certain amount of time,e.g. 5 seconds) the button outside should be pressed.After this the door can be manoeuvred downwards.



2 6 0 0

2 0 0 0

2350

175

2000

175

100

6 0 0

100

aperture

Technical data – Safety Roller Door


Colour Frame - yellow, door cloth - greyOther colours available on request.

Ordering data window, completely transparentor viewing window with weldsplash protection.

Maximum size, door cloth 10 m²If a larger size is needed,contact Jokab Safety AB.

Maximum width 4000 mm

Maximum height 3000 mm

Driving unit Three phase motor 200-415

Speed, roller door 0.8 – 1.0 m/s up/down

Max. number of cycles/minute 3 (during continous operation24 hours a day)

Door fabric material - can also be supplied with protec-tion against welding flash light.(Removes 99% of the UV-trans-mision from the welding process)

Door fabric colour Grey (RAL 7038), can be suppliedwith recessed window (only in fullwidth). Other colours are possible. (with yellow vertical reinforcing strips)

Material frames Aluminum extrusion

Material covering plates with RAL 1023

Material upper wall mounting 5 mm sheet metal covered withzinc

Sound absorption approx. 10dB

Ambient temperature When operating in temperatures box should be replaced with anoil suitable to withstand coldtemperatures.

Safety level EN 954-1/EN ISO 13849-1

Durability towards chemicals Ammoniac, sodium hydrate,

phosphoric acid, tartaric acid,oxalic acid, hydrochloric acid,citric acid, acetic acid, oil, deter-gent, calcium chloride (contactJokab Safety for more specifica-tions)

Control monitoring unit forroller door

Outputs 4 safe outputs for connection tomachine/plant.

Monitoring of position of theroller door

2 Eden sensorsone on each side of the door.

Contact strip the door fabric.The door motion is reversed ifthe contact strip is compressed.

Screw holes



Component ordering listSafety PLC Pluto for dynamic and static inputs ___________________________________ 12:2

Accessories Pluto _______________________________________________________________________________ 12:2

Safety module Vital, for dynamic inputs _____________________________________________ 12:3

Safety sensor Eden ___________________________________________________________________________ 12:3

Light beam Spot 10, Spot 35 ______________________________________________________________ 12:5

Tina units for the connection of safety components to "Vital" circuits:

Focus light grids/light curtains, switches/sensors, emergency stops,

contact edges, bumpers and mats ______________________________________________________ 12:6

Connectors and cables _____________________________________________________________________ 12:8

Safety Relays ___________________________________________________________________________________ 12:10

Scanner Look ___________________________________________________________________________________ 12:13

Light curtains Focus–category 4 _______________________________________________________ 12:14

Light curtains Focus–category 2 _______________________________________________________ 12:15

Mirrors for light curtains ____________________________________________________________________ 12:17

Light grids Focus–category 4 ___________________________________________________________ 12:17

Light grids Focus–category 2 ___________________________________________________________ 12:18

Spot 10, Spot 35 and Laser Aligner ___________________________________________________ 12:18

Bypass and reset accessories __________________________________________________________ 12:19

Mechanical accessories for light curtains, light grids, light beams and

bypassing _________________________________________________________________________________________ 12:21

Stopping time measurement and Machine diagnosis ________________________ 12:24

Sensors and switches ______________________________________________________________________ 12:25

Mechanical switches ________________________________________________________________________ 12:27

Control devices - one and two hand-control devices–Safeball ___________ 12:29

Control devices - 2 and 3-position pedals–Fox _________________________________ 12:30

Control devices - 3-position devices and pushbuttons _______________________ 12:30

Emergency stops Inca, Smile ___________________________________________________________ 12:33

Contact edges _________________________________________________________________________________ 12:36

Bumpers __________________________________________________________________________________________ 12:36

Safety Mats _____________________________________________________________________________________ 12:37

Fencing System QuickGuard, SafeCAD, Roller Door _________________________ 12:37


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



DESIGNATION PRODUCT ART.NR DESCRIPTION PRIS

KR.

Safety PLC Pluto for dynamic and static inputs

Pluto A20 20-070-03 Safety PLC with 8 failsafe inputs + 8 non-failsafe outputs/failsafe inputs + 2 individually failsafe relay outputs + 2individually failsafe transistor outputs. For use with Plutosafety bus.

1234567

Pluto S20 20-070-05 As A20 but without Pluto safety bus and without currentmonitoring on Q16 + Q17.

Pluto B20 20-070-06 As A20 but without current monitoring on Q16 + Q17.

Pluto B16 20-070-07 As B20 but without safety outputs Q0 – Q3.

Pluto B46-6 20-070-15 Safety PLC with 24 failsafe inputs + 16 non-failsafeoutputs/failsafe inputs + 4 individually failsafe relay outputs+ 2 individually failsafe transistor outputs. For use with Plutosafety bus. For use with a Pluto safety databus.

Pluto S46-6 20-070-16 Similar to B46-6 but without a databus.

Pluto AS-i 20-070-10 Safety PLC with AS-i databusWith 4 failsafe inputs + 4 non-failsafe outputs/failsafe inputs+ 2 individual failsafe relay outputs + 2 individual failsafetransistor outputs. With connection for Pluto safety databus.

Accessories Pluto

Gate-P1Gateway PlutoProfibus

20-070-70 Gateway for 2-way communication between the Pluto busand Profibus.

Gate-C1Gateway Pluto

CANopen

20-070-71 Gateway for 2-way communication between the Pluto busand CANopen.

Gate-D1Gateway PlutoDeviceNet

20-070-72 Gateway for 2-way communication between the Pluto busand Devicenet.

Gate-E1Gateway PlutoEthernet

20-070-73 Gateway for 2-way communication between Pluto databusand Ethernet.

IDFIX-R 20-070-20 Identifier–assigns Pluto a specific address.IDFIX-RW 20-070-21 Identifier–assigns Pluto an address. This version is

programmable.

IDFIX DATA 20-070-23 Identifier–to give Pluto AS-i a specific address.

R-120 20-070-22 Terminating resistance for Pluto databus.

HMI-display 20-070-25 HMI display 4 x 20 LCD Graphic. UNIOP (Exor).

20-070-28 HMI-software Designer 6.

20-070-29 HMI programming cable.

12:2 www.jokabsafety.com

http://www.jokabsafety.com/default.asp?initid=1906&menutree=729.758.1109&toplinkname=English&menuheading=English&mainpage=templates/jokabpop.asp?sida=952










Pluto Manager 20-070-40 Programming tool for Pluto equipped with safety functionblocks. Can be downloaded from www.jokabsafety.com.

Pluto

programmingcable

20-070-56 For connecting PC to Pluto for programming and on-line

monitoring.

Bus cable 20-070-30 CAN-Bus cable yellow 2 x 0.50 mm2.

20-070-31 CAN-Bus cable purple 2 x 0.50 mm2 halogen free.

Absoluteencoder20-070-36

Absolute value encoder model RSA 597(single-turn).

20-070-37 Absolute value encoder model RSA 698(multi-turn).

20-070-38 Cable for absolute value sensor Unitronic LiYCY 12 x 0.25.

20-070-39 Connector for absolute encoder RSA 597.

20-070-57 Pluto communication cable for HMI-display.

Safety module Vital, for dynamic inputs

Vital 1 20-052-00 Safety module, 22.5 x 85 x 120 mm, 24 VDC.

Safety sensor Eden

Eva 20-046-00 Eva is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Edensensor system. IP67. 4 off DA2 spacer rings are included.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

http://www.jokabsafety.com/

http://www.jokabsafety.com/



Eva E 20-046-06 Eva E is encapsulated in polyurethane for harsh environments.Eva E is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Eden Esensor system. IP69K.

Adam M12 20-051-00 Adam M12 is a safety sensor unit with a fixed M12 maleconnector. IP67. 4 off DA1 spacer rings and 4 off DA2 spacerrings are included in the package.

Adam 3 m 20-051-02 Adam 3 m is a safety sensor unit with 3 m of cable(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67.4 off DA2 spacer rings are included in the package.

Adam 10 m 20-051-04 Adam 10 m is a safety sensor unit with 10 m of cable(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67.4 off DA2 spacer rings are included in the package.

Adam 20 m 20-051-05 Adam 20 m is a safety sensor unit with 20 m of cable(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67. The package includes 4 offDA2 spacer rings.

Adam E 10 m 20-051-06 Adam E 10 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated in

polyurethane for harsh environments with 10 m of cable(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen)IP 69K.

Adam E0.5 m M12

20-051-07 Adam E 0.5 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated in extrapolyurethane for harsh environments with 0.5 m cable5 x 0.34 mm2+ screen and M12 male connector IP69K.Connector IP67.

Adam E 20 m 20-051-08 Adam E 20 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated inpolyurethane for harsh environments with 20 m cable(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen) IP69K. Connector IP67.

Eden C 10 m 20-051-14 Adam C with 10 m cable and Eva C in coded version.




20-051-16 Adam EC 10 m and Eva EC is a coded safety sensor unitcovered with extra polyurethane for harsh environments with10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2+ screen. IP69K. Connector IP67.

DA 1 20-053-00 Protection plate, thickness 2.5 mm, polycarbonate. For AdamM12 and associated Eva. Not suitable for Adam E and Eva E.

DA 2 20-053-01 Mounting spacer 4.5 x 8 x 4 mm, in black polyamide, for usewith Adam and Eva units.

20-053-10 Mounting screw M4, length 18 mm.

20-053-20 Mounting screw, M4, length 16 mm, external mounting forAdam and Eva.

20-053-30 Mounting screw, M4, length 25 mm, external mounting forAdam E and Eva.

20-053-32 Mounting screw M4, in nylon, length 25 mm, for recessed orexternal mounting of Adam/Eva (Adam E/Eva E).

20-053-42 Safety screw SM4 x 20, mounting of Adam and Eva.

20-053-43 Safety screw SM4 x 25, mounting of Adam E and Eva E.

20-053-44 Safety nut M4.

20-053-50 Safety screwdriver bit SBITS.

20-053-62 SM4 x 20 Safety screw + 1 screwdriver bit.


Light beam Spot 10, Spot 35

Spot 10T/R 20-009-06 Safety light beam for up to 10 m distance.M18 steel casing with M12 connector.Accessories, see “Mechanical accessories for light curtains/

light beams and bypassing”.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



Spot 35T/R 20-009-05 Safety light beam for up to 35 m distance.Plastic enclosure withM12 connector.Accessories, see “Mechanical accessories for light curtains/light beams and bypassing”.

JSRL2 20-008-01 Laser Aligner for use with Spot 35 T/R light beam.

Tina units for the connection of safety components to "Vital" circuits: Focuslight grids/light curtains, switches/sensors, emergency stops, contact edges,bumpers and mats

Tina 1A 20-054-00 Blind M12 male connection plug for Tina 4A and Tina 8A.Must be fitted into unused Tina 4A and Tina 8A sensorpositions.

Tina 2A 20-054-01 Tina 2A with M20 fitting for connection of emergency stopsand other safety devices having a suitable combination ofvoltage-free contacts.

Tina 2B 20-054-11 Tina 2B with cable for internal assembly in emergency stopsand other safety sensors with voltage-free contacts.

Tina 3A 20-054-02 Tina 3A with M12 connection and M20 fitting for use withE-stops and other safety sensors with volt free contacts.Tina 3A, 6A and 7A are similar units but with differenthousings.

Tina 3Aps 20-054-14

As Tina 3A but with + 24V and 0V available.Tina 4A 20-054-03 Connection block with four M12 female sensor connection

inputs.Cable diameter range: 7–12 mm.

Tina 5A 20-054-04 Bypass unit for dynamic units with supervision of the bypasslamp.




Tina 6A 20-054-06 Tina 6A with M12 male and female connectors for safety mat/strip/bumper connection. Tina 3A, 6A and 7A have the sameelectrical function in different enclosures.

Tina 7A 20-054-07 Tina 7A, for installation on DIN rails in apparatus enclosures.Electrical connection via detachable terminal blocks.

Tina 7A is used for emergency stops in the same apparatusenclosure, or for external edge contact strips, safety matsor bump strips. Tina 3A, 6A and 7A have the same electricalfunction in different enclosures.

Tina 8A 20-054-05 Connection block with eight M12 female sensor connectioninputs.Cable diameter range 7–12 mm.

Tina 8BProfiBus

20-054-10 Connection block with eight M12 female sensor connectioninputs. The M12 connection on the end connects the inputand output of the dynamic signal, information and supplyvoltage (24VDC). The information signals from the sensorsare transferred to ProfiBus which has M12 connector inputsand outputs. For more technical description, contact thenearest Jokab Safety distributor.

Tina 10A 20-054-12 Tina 10A adapts the OSSD outputs (PNP) from Focus toVital/Pluto.

Tina 10B 20-054-13 Tina 10A adapts the two OSSD outputs (PNP) from Focus toVital/Pluto. Tina 10B has an extra M12 connector (3) for reset,a reset lamp and power off.

(Suitable for FMI-1C. 22-043-02).

Tina 10 C 20-054-16 Similar to Tina 10B but output 3 to be connected to a lightbeam/light curtain transmitter.

Tina 11A 20-054-17 Junction block with 2 off M12 female outputs for dynamicsensors, such as Tina, Eden or Spot.

Tina 12A 20-054-18 Distribution block for two Dalton process locks with Eden.

Tina Duo 1 20-051-30 Expansion and local reset unit for Vital and Pluto sensors.With connector for external reset button.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

http://www.jokabsafety.com/default.asp?initid=1906&menutree=&toplinkname=English&menuheading=English&mainpage=templates/03.asp?sida=1629

http://www.jokabsafety.com/default.asp?initid=1906&menutree=&toplinkname=English&menuheading=English&mainpage=templates/03.asp?sida=1629





M12-C112 20-056-20 1 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight female + maleconnectors.Screen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.

M12-C312 20-056-21 3 m cable 5 x 0,.34 mm2 + screen with straight female + maleconnectorsScreen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.

M12-C612 20-056-22 6 m cable 5 x 0,34 mm2 + screen with straight female

+ M12 maleScreen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.

M12-C1012 20-056-23 10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight female+ male connectorsScreen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.

M12-C2012 20-056-24 20 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight female+ male connectorsScreen connected to pin 3 (OVDC) on male connector.

M12-C63 20-056-30 6 m cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 + screen with straight M12 femaleconnector.



M12-C134 20-056-50 1 m cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 with straight M12 female+male.

M12-C334 20-056-51 3 m cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 with straight M12 female+male.

M12-CT0122 20-060-00 Transfer cable 10 cm 5 x 0.34 mm2.

5-pole male plug/5-pole male plug.

M12-CT0214 20-060-01 Transfer cable 20 cm M12 5-pole female plug, 8-pole maleplug.

M12-CT0232 20-060-02 Transfer cable 20 cm M12 5-pole male plug, 8-pole femaleplug.

M12-CT134F 20-060-03 Transfer cable 1 m M12 8-pole male plug, 8-polefemale plug.

C5 20-057-00 Cable 5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen, specify length.

C8 20-057-10 Cable 8 x 0.34 mm2 + screen, specify length.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



C9 20-057-15 Cable 7 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + screen,specify length. For Tina 4A.

C13 20-057-20 Cable 11 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + screen,

specify length. For Tina 8A.

M12-C01 20-055-10 Straight M12 female connector with 6-pole screw connectionfor cable. Cable external diameter 2.5–6.5 mm, 5-pole.

M12-C02 20-055-11 Straight M12 male connector with cable screw connection.Cable diameter range 2.5–6.5 mm. 5-pole.

M12-C03 20-055-16 Straight M12 female connector with cable screwconnection. Cable diameter range 2.5–6.5 mm. 8-pole.

M12-C04 20-055-17 Straight M12 male connector with cable screwconnection. Cable diameter range 2.5–6.5 mm. 8-pole.

20-055-21 M12, protection cap for male connector.

JS SP-1 22-070-00 M12, protection cap for female connector.

Safety Relays

JSBR3 10-001-00 JSBR3 24DC Safety relay.

10-001-02 JSBR3 24AC Safety relay.




JSBR4 10-002-00 JSBR4 24DC Safety relay.








JSBT3 10-003-00 JSBT3 24DC Safety relay.

10-003-02 JSBT3 24AC Safety relay.




JSBT4 10-004-00 JSBT4 24DC Safety relay.





10-004-14 JSBT4 115AC Safety relay 1 s.

10-004-20 JSBT4 24DC 1,5s Safety relay.

JSBT5 10-005-01 JSBT5 24AC/DC Safety relay.

10-005-07 JSBT5 24AC/DC Safety relay.

10-005-11 JSBT5 24AC/DC Safety relay.

JSE1 10-007-00 JSE1 24DC Safety relay.

JSG1 10-008-00 JSG1 24DC Safety relay.

JSHT1A 10-011-00 JSHT1A 24DC Timer module.

10-011-02 JSHT1A 24AC Timer module.



10-011-05

JSHT1A 230AC Timer module.

JSHT1B 10-011-10 JSHT1B 24DC Timer module.

JSHT2A 10-012-00 JSHT2A 24DC Timer module.


10-012-03 JSHT2A 48 AC Timer module.10-012-04 JSHT2A 115 AC Timer module.

10-012-05 JSHT2A 230 AC Timer module.

JSHT2B 10-012-10 JSHT2B 24DC Timer module.

10-012-12 JSHT2B 24AC Timer module.

10-012-13 JSHT2B 48 AC Timer module.




1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



JSHT2C 10-012-20 JSHT2C 24DC Timer module.

JSN1A 10-014-06 JSN1A mains module 230/115AC/2.

JSR1T 10-015-00 JSR1T 0 Expansion relay 6A 24 DC.

10-015-05 JSR1T 1,5 Expansion relay 6A 24DC.

10-015-06 JSR1T 8 Expansion relay 6A 24 DC.

10-015-10 JSR1T 0,5 Expansion relay 6A 24 D.

10-015-20 JSR1T 10s Expansion relay 6A 24DC.




10-015-60 JSR1T 5 Expansion relay 6A 24DC.

JSR3T 10-017-01 JSR3T Expansion relay 24 AC/DC.

JSS1 10-018-00 JSS1 Safety relay 24 DC.

JSBRT11 10-025-00 JSBRT11 24DC Safety relay.

10-025-02 JSBRT11 24AC Safety relay.




RT6 10-026-00 RT6 24DC Safety relay.

10-026-02 RT6 24AC Safety relay.

10-026-03 RT6 48AC Safety relay.

10-026-04 RT6 115AC Safety relay.10-026-05 RT6 230AC Safety relay.

JSR2A 10-027-01 JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 24AC/DC.

10-027-03 JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 48 AC.

10-027-04 JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 115AC.

10-027-05 JSR2A Expansion relay 10A 230AC.




RT7 B 10-028-10 RT7B 24DC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.

10-028-12 RT7B 24AC Safety relay with max. 3 s delay.




RT7 A 10-028-20 RT7A 24DC Safety relay with max. 1,5 s delay.

10-028-22 RT7A 24AC Safety relay with max. 1,5 s delay.




RT9 10-029-00 RT9 24DC Safety relay.

E1T 10-030-00 E1T 0s Expansion relay 24DC.

10-030-10 E1T 0,5s Expansion relay 24DC.

10-030-20 E1T 1 s Expansion relay 24DC.

10-030-30 E1T 1,5s Expansion relay 24DC.

10-030-40 E1T 2s Expansion relay 24DC.

10-030-50 E1T 3s Expansion relay 24DC.

BT50 10-033-00 BT50 Safety relay.

10-033-10 BT50T Safety relay.

BT51 10-033-20 BT51 Safety relay.

10-033-30 BT51T Safety relay.

RT10 10-029-50 RT10 Safety relay 24 VDC. For mats/edges with two-wirefunction.

Scanner Look

50033346 Adjustable mounting disc.

LOOK JS4-4 50034195 LOOK JS4-4 Scanner.

50035814 LOOK Mounting plate.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



Light curtains Focus–category 4

150 mm

F4-14-150 22-010-00 F4-14-150 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.

22-010-03 F4-14-150 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.

22-010-06 F4-14-150 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.

300 mm


22-010-13

F4-14-300 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.22-010-16 F4-14-300 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.

450 mm




600 mm




750 mm




900 mm




1050 mm




1200 mm




1350 mm

F4-14-1350 22-110-30 F4-14-1350 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.22-110-33 F4-14-1350 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.


1500 mm




1650 mm


22-010-83 F4-14-1650 B Focus Transmit ter + Receiver.


150 mm




300 mm




450 mm




600 mm







750 mm




900 mm




1050 mm




1200 mm




1350 mm




1500 mm

F4-35-1500 22-011-70 F4-35-1500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.22-011-73 F4-35-1500 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.


1650 mm




Light curtains Focus–category 2

150 mm




300 mm




450 mm




600 mm




750 mm




900 mm




1050 mm




1200 mm


22-030-63F2-14-1200 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



1350 mm




1500 mm

F2-14-1500 22-030-70 F2-14-1500 Focus Transmit ter + Receiver.



1650 mm




150 mm




300 mm




450 mmF2-35-450

22-031-20

F2-35-450 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.22-031-23 F2-35-450 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.


600 mm




750 mm




900 mm


22-031-53 F2-35-900 B Focus Transmitter + Receiver.22-031-56 F2-35-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.

1050 mm




1200 mm




1350 mm




1500 mm




1650 mm







Mirrors for light curtains

MF-150 22-041-01 MF-150 mirror height 150 mm.










22-041-20 Bracket for MF-mirrors.

Light grids Focus–category 4

900 mm

F4-K4-900 22-012-00 F4-K4-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.

22-012-06 F4-K4-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.

1200 mm



800 mm



500 mm

F4-K2-500 22-015-00 F4-K2-500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.22-015-06 F4-K2-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.

900 mm

F4-KL4-900 22-016-00 F4-KL4-900 Focus Transmitter + Receiver.

22-016-06 F4-KL4-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.

1200 mm


22-017-06 F4-KL4-1200 Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.

800 mm



500 mm



500 mm

F4-KL2-500D 22-111-20 F4-KL2-500D Focus Transmitter + Receiver.

500 mm

F4-K1C-500 22-020-00 F4-K1C-500 Focus Transmitter/Receiver + Mirror.

22-020-06

F4-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver/Mirror Lprogram.

22-020-09 FTR4-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L program.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



500 mm

F4-K1C-500 LD 22-020-10 F4-K1C-500 LD Focus Transmitter + Receiver/Mirror Lprogram.

Light grids Focus–category 2

900 mm


22-032-06

F2-K4-900 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.

1200 mm



800 mm



500 mm



500 mm

F2-K1C-500 22-036-00 F2-K1C-500 Focus Transmitter + Receiver+Mirror.

22-036-06 F2-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver/Mirror L.

22-036-09 FTR2-K1C-500 L Focus Transmitter + Receiver L-program.

Spot 10, Spot 35 and Laser Aligner

Spot 10T/R 20-009-06 Safety light beam for up to 10 m distance.M18 steel casing with M12 connector.

Spot 35T/R 20-009-05 Safety light beam for up to 35 m distance.

Plastic housing. M12 connection.

JSRL2 20-008-01 Laser Aligner for use with Spot 35 T/R light beam.

JSRL3 20-008-02 Laser Aligner for use with Focus products.




Bypass and reset accessories

LH1 40-007-10 Bypass indication lamp (including ML1 light bulb).

ML1 40-007-15 Light bulb 24V 5W.

ML2 40-007-20 LED indicator lamp, long life, 24V AC/DC <45 mA.

MF-T 22-040-20 MF-T Muting unit with transmitter and receiver and4 integrated photo-cells.

MF-L 22-040-30 MF-L Muting unit with transmitter and receiver and2 integrated photo-cells.

MUTE R(FSTR1)

22-044-00 Retro-reflecting photo-cell M18/M12Range with FZR1: 0.15-2.5 m

FZR2: 0.15-5.1 m.

FZR1 22-044-01 Reflector Ø 80 mm incl. screw MC6S M5 x 14 + Locking nutM5.

FZR2 22-044-02 Reflector 100 x 100 mm incl. screw MC6S M5 x 14+ Locking nut M5.

JSOGP800/MUTE D

22-044-10 Diffuse-reflecting photo-cell, Range 200-800 mm,M12-connection.

FMC-1 22-042-00 FMC-1 Focus muting connection unit with 4 connectors.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



FMC-2 22-042-10 FMC-2 Focus muting connection unit with 6 connectors.

FMI-1A 22-043-00 FMI-1A muting lamp unit with M12 connector in Focus profile.

FMI-1B 22-043-01 FMI-1B muting lamp unit with reset + lamp and power “off”button, with M12 connector.

FMI-1C 22-043-02 FMI-1C unit with reset + lamp, power”off” button, and M12connector.

FMI-1D 22-043-03 FMI-1D unit with reset + lamp, power”off” button, mutingresistor and M12 connector.

FMI-1E 22-043-04 FMI-1E unit with reset + lamp and M12 connector.

FMC-1 Tina 22-045-00 FMC-1 Tina unit Focus connection to Vital. 4 connectorsfor muting.

FMC-2 Tina 22-046-00 FMC-2 Tina unit Focus connection to Vital.6 connectors for muting.

FRM-1A 22-048-00 FRM-1A Relay interface unit for Focus with 8-pinM12 connector.






22-090-02 M6 Stainless steel lock nut.

22-090-04 Washer for M6 bolt. Stainless steel.

22-090-05 2.2 x 19 mm screw for Focus.

22-090-06 Rubber seal for Focus end piece.

22-090-07 End piece without hole. For Focus profile.

22-090-08 End piece without hole. For Focus profile.

22-090-09 End piece with M12-5 male.

JSM 66 22-090-10 Bracket 2 mm RF A2.

22-090-11 JSM 66 Fixing complete, with 2 bolts.

22-090-12 JSM 66 Bracket, complete, including 2 bolts and screws.

22-090-13 Bracket 2.5 mm RF A2 painted black.

JSM 67 22-090-15 JSM 67 Plastic hinge.




JSM 68 22-090-18 Test tool 14/35.

JSM F1-K 40-043-00 JSM F1-K Mounting screw set for Aluminium profile.

JSM F2-K 40-044-00 JSM F2-K screws for JSM64.

JSM F3-K 40-045-00 JSM F3-K Mounting kit for components to, for example,JSM 44 Aluminium profile.

JSMA44 L 40-001-00 JSMA44-L Post 1100 mm with end cap.

40-001-02 JSMA44-L Post 1300 mm with end cap.

40-001-10 JSMA44-L Post 1300 mm including floor fittings.

40-001-11 JSMA44A-L Post 1100 mm including floor fittings and endcap.

40-001-12 Post 1300 mm + 1 m including floor fittings, end cap,brackets and mounting kit.

JSM 36-K2 40-030-10 Floor fixture with screws for mounting to post.Normally two are used per post.

JSM60-L 40-003-00 Fixing plate for JSM 9 or JSM 63. Includes screws for profile.

JSM62-L 40-004-00 Bracket for JSM 9 for horizontal angling around a machine.Includes screws for profile.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



JSM6 40-006-00 Mirror for 0-10 m. Dimensions: 100 x 40 x 25 mm. Screws forbracket included.

JSM7A 40-006-05 Mirror for 0-20 m, adjustable mirror plate. Dimensions:

115 x 80 x 30 mm. Screws for bracket included.

JSM8A 40-006-06 Mirror for 0-35 m, adjustable mirror plate. Dimensions:160 x 135 x 30 mm. Screws for bracket included.

JSM9 40-007-00 Bracket for mirror.

JSM63 40-007-01 JSM63 Bracket for Spot 35 T/R light beam. (TwoJSM 63 units accompany each light beam.) Will gradually bereplaced by JSM 66.

JSM64 40-007-02 Wired M18 bracket for, for example, Spot 10T/R or MUTE R(FSTR1).

Stopping time measurement and Machine diagnosis70-099-20 Calibration unit for Stopping time analyzer equipment.

Smart Logger 70-300-01 Safety and motion analyser tool. Analysis tool for movingmachinery systems.

SM2 70-300-02 Stop unit for Smart with pushbutton for interaction withemergency stops and other pushbuttons.

SM3 70-300-03 Stop unit for Smart with relay for electrical connection tomachinery system.

SM5/1250 70-300-04 Linear transducer for Smart with 1250 mm wire and wire

damper.

SM5/2500 70-300-05 Linear transducer for Smart with 2500 mm wire and wiredamper.

SM6 70-300-06 Mains power supply unit for Smart. 115-230 VAC/24 VDCwith detachable europlug.

SM7 70-300-07 Wheel transducer for Smart, with stand. SM9.

SM9 70-300-09 Case for Smart equipment, capable of holding all Smartequipment and also room for a laptop computer.

SM11 70-300-11 Stop unit for Smart with rotating flag for interaction with lightcurtains and other optical sensors.

SM13 70-300-23 Battery pack for Smart.

SM14 70-300-24 Battery charger for SM11 and SM13 with europlug. Alsosuitable for JSSM11.




Stop unitadapter

70-300-14 Stop unit adapter making JSSM1 stop units compatible withSmart.

USB cable 70-300-15 USB cable for connecting Smart Logger to a computer.

Small case forSmart upgrad-ing kit

70-300-40 Small case intended to hold the equipment needed toupgrade JSSM equipment to Smart.

Upgrading kitwith a smallcase

70-300-41 Smart upgrading kit with a small case. The kit consists ofa small case containing a Smart Logger, SM6, USB cable,Encoder adapter and Stop unit adapter.

Upgrading kitwith smallcase

70-300-42 Smart upgrading kit with an SM9. The kit consists of anSM9 case containing a Smart Logger, SM6, USB cable,Encoder adapter and Stop unit adapter.

Basic kit 70-300-43 SM9 case with Smart Logger, SM6 and USB cable.

Sensors and switches

Eva 20-046-00 Eva is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Edensensor system. IP67. 4 off DA2 spacer rings are included.

Eva E 20-046-06 Eva E is encapsulated in polyurethane for harsh environments.Eva E is the "target" for use with Adam sensors in the Eden Esensor system. IP69K.

Adam M12 20-051-00 Adam M12 is a safety sensor unit with a fixed M12 maleconnector. IP67. 4 off DA1 spacer rings and 4 off DA2 spacerrings are included in the package.

Adam 3 m 20-051-02 Adam 3 m is a safety sensor unit with 3 m of cable(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP674 off DA2 spacer rings are included in the package.

Adam 10 m 20-051-04 Adam 10 m is a safety sensor unit with 10 m of cable(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP674 off DA2 spacer rings are included in the package.

Adam 20 m 20-051-05 Adam 20 m is a safety sensor unit with 20 m of cable(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen). IP67. The package includes 4 offDA2 spacer rings.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



Adam E 10 m 20-051-06 Adam E 10 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated inpolyurethane for harsh environments with 10 m of cable(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen) IP69K.Connector IP67.

Adam E0.5 m M12

20-051-07 Adam E 0.5 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated inextra polyurethane for harsh environments with 0.5 m cable5 x 0.34 mm2+ screen and M12 male connector.IP69K. Connector IP67.

Adam E 20 m 20-051-08 Adam E 20 m is a safety sensor unit encapsulated inpolyurethane for harsh environments with 20 m cable(5 x 0.34 mm2 + screen) IP69K. Connector IP67.

Eden C 10 m 20-051-14 Adam C with 10 m cable and Eva C in coded version.

Eden EC 20-051-16 Adam EC 10 m and Eva EC is a coded safety sensor unitcovered with extra polyurethane for harsh environments with

10 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2

+ screen. IP69K.

DA 1 20-053-00 Spacer plate, 2.5 mm thick, in polycarbonate. For AdamM12 and associated Eva. Not suitable for Adam E and Eva E.

DA 2 20-053-01 Mounting spacer ring 4.5 x 8 x 4 mm, in black polyamide, foruse withAdam and Eva units.

20-053-10 M4 mounting screw, Length 18 mm, for recessed mounting ofAdam and Eva.

20-053-20 M4 mounting screw, Length 16 mm, for projecting mountingof Adam and Eva.

20-053-30 M4 mounting screw, Length 25 mm, for projecting

mounting of Adam E and Eva E.




20-053-32 M4 nylon mounting screw, Length 25 mm, for recessed orprojecting mounting of Adam and Eva (Adam E and Eva E).

20-053-42 SM4 x 20 safety screw, for mounting Adam and Eva.

20-053-43 SM4 x 25 safety screw, for mounting of Adam E and Eva E.

20-053-44 Safety nut M4.

20-053-50 Safety screwdriver bit SBITS.



Mechanical switches

JSNY5 20-022-00 JSNY5A Safety switch 2NC+ 1NO 10N.

20-022-01 JSNY5B Safety switch 2NC+ 1NO 30N.

JSNY7 20-023-00 JSNY7R-3 Magnetic switch 3 m cable.

20-023-01 JSNY7R-6 Magnetic switch 6 m cable.

20-023-02 JSNY7R-10 Magnetic switch10 m cable.

20-024-00 JSNY7 m Magnetic key.

JSNY4 20-029-00 JSNY4A Safety switch 2NC 10N.

20-029-01 JSNY4B Safety switch 2NC 30N.

JSNY8 20-030-00 JSNY8 m 24DC Safety switch.

20-030-01 JSNY8S 24DC Safety switch.

20-030-02 JSNY8 mN2 24DC Safety switch including flexible key.

20-030-03 JSNY8SN2 24VDC Safety switch including flexible key.

20-030-05 JSNY8S 230AC Safety switch.

20-030-15 JSNY8 m 230AC Safety switch.

JSPG11 20-031-00

JSPG11 cable gland PG11/6 mm.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



JSNYN_ 20-032-00 JSNYN1 Steel key (standard).

20-032-01 JSNYN2 Key, horizontal axis.

20-032-02 JSNYN3 Key, vertical axis.

20-032-03 JSNYN4 Key with 100N holding force.

JSNYN5 20-032-06 JSNYN5 Flexible key for JSNY5.

JSNY8/9N_ 20-032-04 JSNY8/9N1 standard key.

20-032-05 JSNY8/9N2 flexible key for JSNY8/9.

JSNYL1 20-033-00 JSNYL1 cover for JSNY5.

JSNY8EO 20-032-20 JSNY8EO Emergency opening button for JSNY8S.

JSNY9 20-036-01 JSNY9S 24VUC Safety switch.

20-036-02 JSNY9SN2 24VUC Safety switch including flexible key.

20-036-12 JSNY9SLA 24VUC Safety switch with LEDs.

20-036-21 JSNY9M 24VUC Safety switch.

20-036-22 JSNY9MN2 24VUC Safety switch including flexible key.

20-036-32 JSNY9MLA 24VUC Safety switch with LEDs.

JSNYL2 20-033-01 JSNYL2 cover for JSNY9.

JSNYL3 20-033-02 JSNYL3 cover for JSNY9 with LEDs.

20-033-03 Gasket for JSNYL2/L3.

20-304-01 Latch for JSNY9 including bolts.

Magne 1A 42-022-00 Magnetic lock.

Magne 2A 42-022-10 Magnetic lock with indication.

JSM D21 42-023-00 Magne installation kit.

JSMD2AGS 42-023-10 Handle/screw for JSM D21 Magne installation kit.

42-023-01 Handle profile that completely hides a Magne unit when thedoor is closed.

Dalton M111 20-038-00 0.5 m cable with M12 8-pole male plug.

Dalton M311 20-038-07 0.5 m cable with M12 5-pole male plug, locking pin 4.

Dalton L001 20-038-90 Only ball latch, no electrical functions.

Dalton M315 20-038-10 5-pole male plug, locking pin 4, small mounting plate for thetongue.

Dalton M113 20-038-04 8-pole male plug, angle brackets for Jokab enclosure.

Dalton M112 20-038-03 Lock with securing plate for separately connected Eden. 0.5 m cable with M12 8-pole male plug.

Dalton M312 20-038-08 Lock with securing plate for separately connected Eden. 0.5 m cable with M12 5-pole male plug, locking pin 4.

Dalton L002 20-038-91 Only ball latch, no electrical functions, mounting plate also forEden.




Dalton M121 20-038-01 Lock with M12 connector for connection of separatelymounted Eden.0.5 m cable with M12 8-pole male plug.

Dalton M122 20-038-02 Lock with integrated Eden.0.5 m cable with M12 8-pole male plug.

Dalton M124 20-038-09 8-pole male plug, 5-pole female plug for Adam, anglebrackets for Jokab enclosure.

DA 1 20-053-00 Spacer, 2.5 mm, for Adam and Eva.

M12-CT0214 20-060-01 Transfer cable 0.2 m M12 5-pole male plug, 8-pole femaleplug.

Tina 12A 20-054-18 Distribution block for two Dalton Edens with 8-pole cables.

Control devices - one and two hand-control devices–Safeball

JSTD20 20-007-20 JSTD20A Two-hand station without emergency stop pushbutton.

20-007-21 JSTD20B Two-hand station with emergency stop pushbutton.

20-007-22 JSTD20C Two-hand station housing only.

JSTD1_ 20-007-30 JSTD1-A Safeball with 2 m cable.

20-007-31 JSTD1-B Safeball with 0.2 m cable.

20-007-32 JSTD1-C Safeball with 10 m cable.

20-007-34 JSTD1-E Safeball 1NO+ 1NO with 0.2 m cable.

JSM C5 20-007-09 JSM C5 Ball & socket table mount for Safeball.

JSTS30 20-007-40 JSTS30 Floor stand.

JSTS31 20-007-41 JSTS31 Floor stand including spacer ring.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



JSTS32 20-007-42 JSTS32 Spacer ring for floor stand.

JSTD25A 20-007-50 JSTD25A Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs, no emergencystop push button.

JSTD25B 20-007-51 JSTD25B Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs and emergency

stop push button.

JSTD25C 20-007-52 JSTD25C Two-hand station without Safeball or emergencystop push button.

JSTD25D 20-007-53 JSTD25D Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs and JSM C5, noemergency stop push button.

JSTD25E 20-007-54 JSTD25E Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs, JSM C5, and

emergency stop push button.

JSTD25B-1 20-007-57 JSTD25B-1 Two-hand station, grey, with 2 Safeballs andemergency stop push button.

JSTD25F 20-007-60 JSTD25F Two-hand station with 2 Safeballs.

20-007-64 Protective plates for Safeball (kit) including fasteners.

JSTD25G 20-007-62 JSTD25G.

JSTD25P-1 20-007-65 JSTD25P-1 Two hand station, portable, with 2 Safeballs.

20-007-66 Connector for JSTD25P-1.

20-007-67 4 m long spiral cable for JSTD25P-1.

20-007-68 8 m long spiral cable for JSTD25P-1.

20-007-80 Universal shelf for JSTD25P-1.

Control devices - 2 and 3-position pedals–Fox

FOX 31 20-160-01 FOX 31 3-position footswitch, single, with reset button.

FOX 32 20-160-02 FOX 32 3-position footswitch, double, with reset button.

FOX 21 20-160-21

FOX 21 2-position footswitch, single.FOX 22 20-160-22 FOX 22 2-position footswitch, double.

Control devices - 3-position devices and pushbuttons

JSHD2C 20-001-10 JSHD2C type E 3-position pushbutton, 3 cables.

20-001-13 JSHD2C type K 3-position pushbutton, 2 cables.

JSHD4 20-002-00 JSHD4 3-position control device with 2 extra pushbuttons(top/front).




JSHD4D 20-002-01 JSHD4 3-position control device with extra pushbutton(front).

JSHD4E 20-002-03 JSHD4E 3-position control device with extra pushbutton(top).

JSHD4F 20-002-04 JSHD4F 3-position control device without extra pushbuttons.

JSHD4FN 20-002-18 JSHD4FN 3-position device with spiral cable andconnector.

JSHD4 mU 20-002-78 JSHD4 mU 3-position control device for Eden .

JSHD4FA 20-002-79 JSHD4FA 3-position control device for PLC, spiral cable.

JSHD4FU 20-002-81 JSHD4FU 3-position device without extra pushbuttons.

JSHD4P 20-002-94 JSHD4P 3-position control device with extra pushbuttons, noLEDs.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



JSHD4PB 20-002-95 JSHD4PB 3-position control device with extra pushbuttonsfor use together with Pluto PLC.

JSHD4PC 20-002-96 JSHD4PC 3-position control device with extra pushbuttons,black Eva plate, spiral cable.

JSHD4PD 20-002-97 JSHD4PD 3-position control device with 2 extra pushbuttons.

JSHD4H2A 20-002-02 JSHD4H2A 3-position control device for external panelmounting.

JSHD4S2 20-002-07 JSHD4S2 3-position control device, ABB upgrading kit.

JSHD4H2 20-002-31 JSHD4H2 3-position device for panel mounting.

JSHK_ 20-003-00 JSHK5 Cable 5 m for JSHD4.

20-003-01 JSHK10 Cable 10 m for JSHD4.




JSHK0 20-003-03 JSHK0 12-pole connector for JSHD4.

JSHK1 20-003-08 JSHK1-A Female chassis receptacle.

20-003-09 JSHK1-B Male chassis receptacle.

20-003-07 JSHK1-C Male chassis receptacle.

JSHK5-E 20-003-10 JSHK5-E Extension cable 5 m.




JSHK10-K 20-003-11 JSHK10-K cable for JSHD4K, 12-pole.

JSHK5-E1 20-003-12 JSHK5-E1 Connection cable 5 m.

20-003-13 15 m Highly flexible hold-to-run cable with JSHK connector,yellow cable.

JSHK_ 20-003-20 JSHK16S Spiral cable 1,6 m max. with connector.

20-003-21 JSHK20S Spiral cable 2,0 m max. with connector.






JSHK-T1 20-003-30 Cable drum, 12 m cable.

JSM 54A 20-205-28 JSM 54A Wall bracket for Adam.

JSM5A 40-005-03 JSM5A Wall bracket for 2 switches JSNY5.

JSM55 40-005-05 JSM55 Wall fixing for 3-position device.

Emergency stops Inca, Smile

INCA 1 Tina 30-054-00 Emergency stop button for panel mounting with Tina functionand dynamic function principle. LED indication in the button.

INCA 1 30-054-01 Emergency stop button for panel mounting withmechanical contacts. LED indication in the button.

INCA 1S Tina 30-054-02 Stop button for panel mounting with Tina function anddynamic function principle. LED indication in the button.Black print.

INCA 1S 30-054-03 Stop button for panel mounting with mechanicalcontacts. LED indication in the button. Black pr int.

INCA front ring 30-054-04 Yellow surround for emergency stop button.

Emergencystop sign

30-054-05 S D F, 22,5 mm

30-054-06 E F D, 22,5 mm

30-054-07 S D F, 32,5 mm

30-054-08 E F D, 32,5 mm


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



Smile 11EATina

30-050-00 Emergency stop for Vital, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector, red/green LED.

Smile 12EATina

30-050-02 Emergency stop for Vital, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector,1 xM12/5-pole female connector, red/green LED.

Smile 10EATina

30-050-04 Emergency stop for Vital, 1 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2, red/greenLED.

Smile 11 SATina30-050-05

Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, r/g LED.Black button.

Smile 12 SATina

30-050-06 Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-polefemale, r/g LED. Black button.

Smile 11 SARTina

30-050-07 Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, r/g LED.Black button. Enclosure reversed.

Smile 12 SARTina

30-050-08 Emergencystop to Vital, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-polefemale, r/g LED. Black button. Enclosure reversed.

Smile 11EA 30-051-00 Emergency stop 2 xNC, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector.

Smile 12EA 30-051-02 Emergency stop 2 xNC, 1 xM12/5-pole male connector,1 xM12/5-pole female connector.

Smile 10EA 30-051-04 Emergency stop 2 xNC, 1 m cable 5 x 0.34 mm2.




Smile 10EK 30-051-06 E-stop 2 xNC, 0,5 m wires 4 x 0,5 mm2.

Smile 11 SA 30-051-09 Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male. Black button.

Smile 12 SA 30-051-10 Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-polefemale. Black button.

Smile 11 SAR 30-051-11 Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male. Black button.Enclosure reversed.

Smile 12 SAR 30-051-12 Emergencystop 2 x NC, 1 x M12/5-pole male, 1 x M12/5-polefemale. Black button. Enclosure reversed.

JST2 30-051-13 Termination for Smile 12.

JSKL1-NS/2A 30-001-10 JSKL1-NS/2A Emergency stop button box with internalTina 2A.

JSKL1-NS/3A 30-001-11 JSKL1-NS/3A Emergency stop button box with internalTina 3A.

JSKL1-NS 30-003-02 Emergency stop button box with internal 2NC relay.

JSNY10 20-034-00 JSNY10 Emergency stop pull-rope switch.

JSNY10-M6 20-034-01 JSNY10-M6 Nut.

JSNY10-S6 20-034-02 JSNY10-S6 Eyebolt.

JSNY10-T4 20-034-03 JSNY10-T4 Wire thimble.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



JSNY10-L3 20-034-04 JSNY10-L3 Duplex wire clamp.

JSNY10-W3 20-034-05 JSNY10-W3 Red plastic-coated wire.

JSNY10-V6 20-034-06 JSNY10-V6 Wire turnbuckle M6 x 60.

JSNY10-K 20-034-07 JSNY10-K Mounting kit, 25 m wire.

JSNY10-S8 20-034-09 JSNY10-S8 Eyebolt M8 x 50.

Nödstoppssky-lt JSNY10

20-034-10 Emergency stop sign JSNY10 (in Swedish).

Nödstoppssky-lt JSNY10

20-034-11 Emergency stop sign JSNY10 (in English).

JSNY10-R5 20-034-13 JSNY10-R5 Swivel for wire.

Contact edges

AL 25-14 76-002-02 AL 25-14 Aluminium profile for 25-xx.

Kabel LIYY 76-002-18 Cable LIYY 2 x 0.34.

SKL 15-10 76-015-10 SKL 15-10 Mini-safety contact rail including AL 15-8.

KKB 76-015-12 KKB 2.2 m cable for SKL15-10 2.2 m.

Klämlist 76-027-38 Safety contact rail 25-25 EPDM with lip.

76-025-25 Safety contact rail 25-25 EPDM.





76-125-25 Safety contact rail 25-25 NBR.76-125-40 Safety contact rail 25-40 NBR.

76-125-65 25-65 NBR with lip.

76-135-60 Safety contact rail 35-60 NBR.

Bumpers

Bumper ASB 76-200-01 Bumper ASB 53/100 black.

76-200-02 Bumper ASB 100/200 black.



76-200-05 Bumper ASB 53/100 black/yellow.




76-200-09 Bumper ASB 60/100 NBR black (63/100).

76-200-10 Bumper ASB 100/200 NBR black.





76-200-15 Bumper ASB 100/200 NBR black/yellow.

76-200-16 Bumper ASB 150/250 NBR black/yellow.




Safety Mats

ASK 76-301-05 Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim, size to order.

76-300-03 Safety mat ASK-1P2-TBV stainless steel.

76-300-04 Safety mat ASK-1P2-ARB aluminium.

ASK 76-301-06 Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Size to order with cast-in rampedge trim.

ASK 76-310-05 Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim1000 x 750 mm.

76-310-06 Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim1000 x 1000 mm.

76-310-07 Safety mat ASK-1U4.4RF No ramp edge trim1000 x 1500 mm.

ASK 76-310-10 Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Cast-in ramp edge trim1000 x 750 mm.

76-310-11 Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Cast-in ramp edge trim1000 x 1000 mm.

76-310-12 Safety mat ASK-1T4.4RF Cast-in ramp edge trim1000 x 1500 mm.

Junction cable 76-900-32 Junction cable including 1 off M8 male and 1 off M8 femaleconnectors, 2.5 m cable.

76-900-33 Junction cable including 1 off M8 male and 1 off M8 femaleconnectors, 5 m cable.

RS 14 76-300-05 RS 14, Ramp rail in aluminium.

BS 14 76-300-08 BS 14 profile for ASK in aluminium.

Corner piece 76-300-09 Corner piece for RS14, in polyamide.

Fencing System QuickGuard, SafeCAD, Roller Door

Aluminium profiles

JSM A4416 40-037-70 Aluminium profile, 44 x 16, naturally anodised, per metre.

40-037-74 Aluminium profile, 44 x 16, naturally anodised,

L=6000 mm.

JSM A44A 40-037-35 Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, per metre.

40-037-36 Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 44, L=1100 mm.







JSM A4488A 40-037-42 Aluminium profile, naturally anodised, 44 x 88, per metre.





1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



JSM A88 40-037-33 Cable duct 88 x 68 L=2000 mm.

JSM A12 40-037-28 U-profile edging, per metre.

40-037-27 U-profile edging L=1076 mm.



JSM A13 40-037-50 H-profile, per metre.

40-037-51 H-profile, L=1076 mm.

40-037-52 H-profile, L=1476 mm.

40-037-53 H-profile, L=2020 mm.

JSM A3130B 40-037-26 Aluminium guide rail including screws.

JSM A56 40-037-49 Aluminium guide rail including screws, per metre.

40-037-08 Aluminium guide rail including screws, L=2000 mm.

40-037-48 Aluminium guide rail including screws, L=6000 mm.

JSM A25A 40-037-13 Cable duct 44 x 25 with ”keyhole”, including lid, L=2000 mm.

JSM A25B 40-037-14 Cable duct 44 x 25 including lid, L=2000 mm.

JSM A60A 40-037-15 Cable duct 44 x 60 with ”keyhole”, including lid, L=2000 mm.

JSM A60B 40-037-16 Cable duct 44 x 60 including lid, L=2000 mm Cap, L= 2 M.

JSM A8888 40-037-75 Al-profile 88 x 88 Natural anodized aluminium(cut to length).

40-037-79 Al-profile 88 x 88 Natural anodized aluminium L=6000.

JSM AS1 40-037-95 Profile for 25 mm sound-absorbing panel, (per metre).

40-037-09 Profile for 25 mm sound-absorbing panel, L=2000 mm.

JSM AS2 40-037-96 Profile for double 5 mm polycarbonate panel(per metre).

40-037-10 Profile for double 5 mm polycarbonate panel, L=2000 mm.




JSM AS3 42-021-80 Profile for 50 mm sound-absorbing panel(per metre).

42-021-81 Profile for 50 mm sound-absorbing panel,L=6000 mm.

Fixing

JSM 30B-K 40-030-06 JSM 30B-K Floor bracket, pre-fitted, in aluminium.

JSM 36-K1 40-030-09 Floor bracket in steel plate, pre-fitted with 3 screws.

JSM 36-K2 40-030-10 Floor bracket in steel plate, pre-fitted with 3 screws.

JSM 39-K 40-030-14 Aluminium floor bracket, pre-fitted.

JSM 30B-K1 40-030-11 Angle fitting, pre-fitted with 4 screws.

JSM 31AI-K 40-030-04 JSM 31A1-K Small angular bracket one countersunk hole.

JSM31B-K 40-030-13 Small angled bracket, pre-fitted.

JSM 32B-K 40-030-07 JSM 32B-K L-bracket, pre-fitted.

JSM 33B-K 40-030-08 T-bracket, pre-fitted.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



JSM 34A-K 40-031-04 I fitting, pre-fitted.

JSM 35-K 40-033-14 Hinge including screws, centres at 47 mm.

JSM 37 40-033-31 Spacer screw for Economy.

Fixing for switches

JSM D4A 40-033-09 JSM D4A Fittings for JSNY5, hinged door.

JSM D4AA 40-033-34 Securing fitting for JSNY5 hinged door.

JSM D4B 40-033-10 Fittings for JSNY5 sliding door with guide rail.

JSM D4E 40-033-18 Fixing plate for JSNY7 hinged door.

JSM D4G 40-033-33 Securing fitting for JSNY7 sliding door.

JSM D4C 40-033-16 JSM D4A Fittings for JSNY8 and JSNY9 hinged door.




JSM D4D 40-033-17 JSM D4D Fittings for JSNY8 sliding door.

JSM D4F 40-033-30 Securing fitting for JSNY9 sliding door.

JSM D4H 40-033-36 JSM D4H Securing fitting for ADAM & EVA (EDEN) hingeddoor and sliding door.

JSM D4K 40-033-45 Securing fitting for EDEN/EDEN E. Stainless steel.

JSM D4J 42-020-40 Securing fitting for Adam/Eva. Folding par titions.

Door components

JSM D1A 40-033-15 Hinge including screw 62 mm centres.

JSM D1B 42-020-47 Sprung hinge, complete.

JSM D2 40-033-01 JSM D2 Handle including screw.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



JSM D18 42-020-50 Handle including spacer angle.

JSM D5 40-033-04 JSM D5 Suspension wheel.

JSM D6 40-033-05 JSM D6 Sliding element, rectangular.

JSM D7 40-033-06 JSM D7 Sliding element, round.

JSM D8 40-033-07 JSM D8 Sliding element, guide.

JSM D9 40-033-08 Castor wheel, with locking brake, 75/97.

JSM D9-K 40-033-11 Castor wheel, with locking brake, 75/97, including anglebracket.

JSM D9A 40-033-12 Apparatus fixed wheel, 75/95.

JSM D9A-K 40-033-13 JSM D9A-K Guide roller 75/79 including angle bracket.

JSM D12 40-033-22 Guide pin for sliding door, vertical.

JSM D12A 40-033-23 Guide pin for sliding door, horizontal.

JSM D12B 40-033-24 Guide plate for sliding door.

JSM D13 40-033-25 Door stop, vertical, with vibration damper, for sliding door.




JSM D13A 40-033-26 Door stop, right angle.

JSM D13B 40-033-27 Door stop, horizontal, with vibration damper, for sliding door.

JSM D14 40-033-28 Cross brace for door 20 x 5 L=1160 mm.

JSM D14A 42-021-73 Cross brace for door 20 x 5 L=400 mm.

JSM D3 40-033-02 JSM D3 Door closer, including mounting components forhinged door.

JSM D19 42-020-56 Door closer incl. mounting components for sliding door.

JSM D11B 40-033-41 Ball latch for hinged door.

JSM D11C 40-033-42 Ball latch for sliding door.

JSM D11D 42-020-52 Ball latch folding door.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



JSM D22 42-024-10 Gas spring including fixture, stroke length 300 mm.

JSM D22A 42-024-11 Gas spring including fixture, stroke length 350 mm.

JSM D10 40-033-20 Sliding bolt.

JSM D10A 40-033-21 Sliding bolt with return spring L=1000 mm.

JSM D10B 40-033-38 Door sliding bolt with spring.

JSM D15 40-033-39 Cam lock, complete, excluding key.

JSM D16 40-033-44 Key to fit JSM D15.

JSM D17 42-020-22 Securing plate for padlock.




JSM D21 42-023-00 Magne 1A mounting fixture.

Express sections height 2000 och 2200

JSM E11-N20X8

40-101-03 Mesh section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2000.

JSM E15-N20X8


JSM E11-PC20X8

40-101-53 Pc section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2000.

JSM E11

-N22X8


JSM E15-N22X8

40-102-08 Mesh section c-c=1500 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2200

JSM E11-PC22X8


JSM E11-N/PC20X8

40-104-01 Mesh/Pc-section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2000.

JSM E11-N/PC22X8

40-105-01 Mesh/Pc-section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=2200.

JSM E11-N20Z

40-101-04 Mesh for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2000.

JSM E15

-N20Z


JSM E11-PC20Z

40-101-54 Pc for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2000.

JSM E11-N22Z


JSM E15-N22Z


JSM E11-PC22Z


JSM E11-N/PC20Z

40-104-02 Mesh/Pc for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2000.

JSM E11

-N/PC22Z

40-105-02 Mesh/Pc for Q-G Express c-c=1100 H=2200.

JSM E11-N20G

40-101-05 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh H=2000.

JSM E11-PC20G

40-101-55 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with Pc H=2000.

JSM E11-N22G

40-102-05 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh H=2200.

JSM E11-PC22G

40-102-55 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with Pc H=2200.

JSM E11-N/PC20G

40-104-03 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh/Pc H=2000.

JSM E11

-N/PC22G

40-105-03 Door frame c-c=1100, door leaf with mesh/Pc H=2200.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



JSM E11-N20S

40-101-06 Sliding door section c-c=1100 with mesh H=2000.

JSM E15-N20S


JSM E11-PC20S

40-101-57 Sliding door section c-c=1100 with Pc H=2000.

JSM E11

-N22S


JSM E15-N22S


JSM E11-PC22S

40-102-56 Sliding door section c-c=1100 with Pc H=2200.

JSM E11-N/PC20S

40-104-04 Sliding door section c-c=1100 with mesh/Pc H=2000.

JSM E11-N/PC22S

40-105-04 Sliding door section c-c=1100 with mesh/Pc H=2200.

JSM E11-20Y8

40-103-21 Post 44 x 88 incl. floor bracket L=2000.

JSM E11

-22Y8


Express sections height 1400

JSM E11-N14X4


JSM E11-N14X8


JSM E15-N14X4


JSM E15-N14X8

40-106-07 Mesh section c-c=1500 with 1 off. 44 x 88 post H=1400

JSM E11-PC14X4

40-106-52 Pc section c-c=1100 with 1 off. 44 x 44 post H=1400

JSM E11-PC14X8


JSM E11-N14Z


JSM E15-N14Z


JSM E11-PC14Z





JSM E11-N14G

40-106-05 Door frame c-c=1100 incl. door leaf with mesh H=1400.

JSM E11-PC14G

40-106-55 Door frame c-c=1100 incl. door leaf with Pc H=1400.

JSM E11-14Y4


JSM E11-14Y8


Cap and edges

JSM L1A 40-034-00 Terminal cap for JSM A44A, yellow.

JSM L1B 40-034-03 Terminal cap for JSM A44A, grey.

JSM L4A 40-034-04 Terminal cap for JSM A4488A, yellow.

JSM L4B 40-034-05 Terminal cap for JSM A4488A, grey.

JSM L2 40-034-01 Terminal cap for JSM A25, grey.

JSM L3 40-034-02 Terminal cap for JSM A60, grey.

JSM T3A 40-037-31 Cover strip, narrow, yellow, L=2000 mm.

JSM T3B 40-037-32 Cover strip, narrow, grey, L=2000 mm.

JSM T2A 40-037-19 Wide PVC cover strip yellow.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



Surfaces and fixations

JSM NL2 40-031-06 JSM NL2 Netting lock in plastic, for welded mesh.

JSM NL3 40-031-08 JSM NL3 Netting lock in zinc, for mesh.

JSM PL3 40-038-11 Securing fixture in zinc for surfacing material.

JSM PL1_ 40-038-01 Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.L=842 mm for 5 mm panels.

40-038-02 Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.L=1152 mm for 5 mm panels.



JSM PL2_ 40-038-07 Edge fitting in black ABS plastic.L=842 mm for 4 mm panels.




12

3

JSM G2 40-038-06 Foam rubber edging, self-adhesive 5 x 20 mm.

1

2

JSM G3 41-930-06 U-Rubber strip 12 x 2 x 6.

JSM YN40W1 40-040-13 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black 2020 x 864 mm.








JSM YN40W11 40-040-29 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3.5 black 1074 x 1216 mm.

JSM YN40W9 40-040-16 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 black per square metre.




JSM YN40WE1 40-040-25 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 rostfritt (SS 2333)2020 x 864 mm.

JSM YN40WE2 40-040-18 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 rostfritt (SS 2333)1074 x 1816 mm.

JSM YN40WE9 40-040-19 Welded steel mesh 40 x 40 x 3,5 rostfritt per square metre.

JSM YPC5A1 40-039-10 5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 2020 x 864 mm.JSM YPC5A2 40-039-11 5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 2020 x 1174 mm.

JSM YPC5A3 40-039-17 5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, 1076 x 1816 mm.



JSM YPC5A9 40-039-12 5 mm clear polycarbonate panel, per square metre.



JSM YPC4A9 40-039-16 4 mm clear polycarbonate panel, per square metre.

JSM YPC3AC1 40-039-25 3 mm dark tinted polycarbonate weld-protected panel,2050 x 3000.

JSM YPC3AC9 40-039-24 3 mm dark tinted polycarbonate weld-protected panel, persquare metre.

JSM YGP1A9 40-039-07 1.0 mm cross-bent galvanized panel.

JSM YGP2A9 40-039-09 1.5 mm cross-bent galvanized panel.

JSM YG6A9 42-150-06 Laminated glass 6.4 mm.

JSM YHG5A9 40-039-03 Toughened glass 5.0 mm.

JSM YLA25A1 40-039-26 Sound-absorbing panel 25 mm smooth (white polyester)/perforated (galvanized), 1963 x 1200 mm.

JSM YLA25A9 40-037-11 Sound-absorbing panel 25 mm smooth (white polyester)/perforated (galvanized), per metre.

JSM YLA50A9 42-150-23 Sound-absorbing panel 50 mm smooth (white polyester)/perforated (galvanized), per metre.

Accessories

JSM M4B 40-035-07 Captive nut, M4 galvanized.




1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12




JSM B4C 40-035-50 Centring washer M4 galvanized steel.

JSM B5C 40-035-51

Centring washer M5 galvanized steel.



JSM S8D 41-014-01 Screw MC6S 8.8 M8 x 16 galvanized.

JSM S8C 41-014-02 Screw MC6S 8.8 M8 x 20 galvanized.

JSM S8A 41-019-00 Screw MC6S 10.9 M8 x 16 Dacrolite.

JSM S8E 41-019-01 K6S 10,9 M8 x 12 galvanized (for JSM A56).

JSM S5B 41-039-01 Screw MRX-Z M5 x 12 galvanized.

JSM S6A 41-039-02 Screw MKFX-Z M6 x 12 galvanized.

JSM X1 40-033-43 Cable clamp, white nylon, including screw and box of 10.

JSM X2 41-900-43 M10 x 68 expansion bolt, galvanized.

JSM X3 41-910-00 Polishing and anti-static compound for polycarbonate. 0,5 l.

JSM X4 41-911-01 Bolt croppers.




1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12





1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



Försäkran om överensstämmelseVi JOKAB SAFETY AB

Boplatsgatan 3S-213 76 Malmö

försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETY med nedanståendetypbeteckningar och funktioner, är i överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna iföreskrifternaAFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG),ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG)/(2006/95/EG)ELSÄK-FS 2003:2 (89/336/EEG, 92/31/EEG, 93/68/EEG)/ELSÄK-FS2007:1(2004/108/EG)

Produkt Certifikat/Anmält organ Produkt Certifikat/Anmält organSäkerhetsreläer förgenerell användning

Pulsrelä

JSBR3 06-SKM-CM-0124, NB0409 JSA2

JSBR4 06-SKM-CM-0516, NB0409 TrelägesdonJSBT3 08-SKM-CM-0108, NB0409 JSHD4 06-SKM-CM-0130, NB409

JSBT4 08-SKM-CM-0109, NB0409 Ljusbommar/LjusridåerJSBT5(T), 06-SKM-CM-0127, NB0409 Focus, F2/4-14/35-xxx TÜV Z10 03 05 49833 003), NB0123

BT50 (T), BT51(T) 08-SKM-CM-0144, NB0409 Focus, F2/4-Kxx-xxx TÜV Z10 03 04 49833 002, NB0123

RT6 06-SKM-CM-0146, NB0409 NyckelbrytareRT7 08-SKM-CM-0110, NB0409 JSNY5

RT9 06-SKM-CM-0145, NB0409 JSNY7R/M 06-SKM-CM-0132, NB409

JSBRT8 06-SKM-CM-0123, NB0409 JSNY8

JSBRT11 08-SKM-CM-0105, NB0409 JSNY9 ET 04224, NB0340

JSE1, JSS1, JSG1 TvåhandsdonExpansionsrelä JS TD 1, J ST D25 01- MA L- CM- 01 09, N B409

JS R1T 0 6- SK M- CM- 0126 , NB 409 JS TD 20 01- MA L- CM- 0101, N B409

JSR2A 08-SKM-CM-0106, NB409 LinnödstoppJSR3T 08-SKM-CM-0107, NB409 JSNY10

E1T 06-SKM-CM-0143, NB409 FotmanöverdonSäkerhetstimer Fox

JSHT1A/B 06-SKM-CM-0128, NB409

JSHT2A/B/C 06-SKM-CM-0129, NB409

Tillämpade harmoniseradestandarder

EN 292-1,-2/EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 418/EN ISO 13850EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, EN 60204-1,EN 50081-2/EN 61000-6-4, EN 50082-2/EN 61000-6-2

Torgny OlssonMalmö 2008-05-05

Mats LingerKungsbacka 2008-05-05

EC Declaration of conformityWe JOK AB S AF ET Y A B

Boplatsgatan 3S-213 76 MalmöSweden

declare that the safety components of JOKAB SAFETY make with type designations andsafety functions as listed below, is in conformity with the Directives98/37/EC,73/23/EEC, 93/68/EEG/(2006/95/EC)89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC/ (2004/108/EC)

Product Certificate/Notified Body Product Certificate/Notified Body

Safety relay forgenaral use

Pulse relay


JSBR4 06-SKM-CM-0516, NB0409 Three position deviceJSBT3 08-SKM-CM-0108, NB0409 JSHD4 06-SKM-CM-0130, NB409

JSBT4 08-SKM-CM-0109, NB0409 Light beam/Lightcurtain

JSBT5(T), 06-SKM-CM-0127, NB0409 Focus, F2/4-14/35-xxx TÜV Z10 03 05 49833 003), NB0123


RT6 06-SKM-CM-0146, NB0409 Safety interlockingswitches

RT7 08-SKM-CM-0110, NB0409 JSNY5




JSE1, JSS1, JSG1 Two hand deviceExpansion relays JS TD1 , JS TD25 01- MA L- CM- 0109, N B409

JS R1T 06- SK M- CM- 012 6, NB 409 JS TD20 01- MA L- CM -0 101, NB 409

JSR2A 08-SKM-CM-0106, NB409 Emergency stop wireswitch

JSR3T 08-SKM-CM-0107, NB409 JSNY10

E1T 06-SKM-CM-0143, NB409 Three position pedal

Safety timer-relay Fox


JSHT2A/B/ C 06-SKM-CM-0129, NB409

Applicable harmonizedstandards

EN 292-1,-2/EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 418/EN ISO 13850EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, EN 60204-1,EN 50081-2/EN 61000-6-4, EN 50082-2/EN 61000-6-2



EG-Konformitätserklärung

Wi r J OK AB SAF ET Y A BBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 MalmöSchweden

erklären, daß nachfolgend aufgeführte Gerätetypen des Herstellers JOKAB SAFETYden Anforderungen der aktuellen Richtlinien98/37/EG,73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG/(2006/95/EG)89/336/EEG, 92/31/EEG, 93/68/EEG/ (2004/108/EG) entsprechen

Produkt Zertifikat/Gemeldete Stelle Produkt Zertifikat /Gemeldete StelleSicherheitsrelais füralgemeineAnwendungen

Pulsrelais


JSBR4 06-SKM-CM-0516, NB0409 ZustimmungsschalterJSBT3 08-SKM-CM-0108, NB0409 JSHD4 06-SKM-CM-0130, NB409

JSBT4 08-SKM-CM-0109, NB0409 Lichtschranke -Lichtvorhang

JSBT5(T), 06-SKM-CM-0127, NB0409 Focus, F2/4-14/35-xxx TÜV Z10 03 05 49833 003), NB0123


RT6 06-SKM-CM-0146, NB0409 Sicherheitsschalter

RT7 08-SKM-CM-0110, NB0409 JSNY5




JSE1, JSS1, JSG1 ZweihandsteuerungExpansionsrelais JS TD 1, J ST D2 5 01- MA L- CM-0 109, N B409

JS R1T 0 6-S KM- CM- 0126, NB 409 J ST D20 01- MA L- CM- 0101, N B409

JSR2A 08-SKM-CM-0106, NB409 SeilzugschalterJSR3T 08-SKM-CM-0107 , NB409 JSNY10

E1T 06-SKM-CM-0143, NB409 FußschalterSicherheits”zeitrelais”

Fox


JSHT2A/B/ C 06-SKM-CM-0129, NB409

Harmonisierte Normen EN 292-1,-2/EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 418/EN ISO 13850EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, EN 60204-1,EN 50081-2/EN 61000-6-4, EN 50082-2/EN 61000-6-2



13:0

Confirmation of compliance - Safety relays, switches, control devices, light beams/light curtainsOther language versions may be obtained on request.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Försäkran om överensstämmelse

Vi JOKAB SAFETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 Malmö

försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETYmed nedanstående typbeteckningar och funktioner, är iöverensstämmelse med bestämmelserna iföreskrifternaAFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG),ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (2006/95/EG)ELSÄK-FS 2007:1 (2004/108/EG)

Produkt Typbeteckning

Klämlist GP 25-25, GP25-40Bumper ASB Y x X

tillsammans med valdsäkerhetsmodulSäkerhetsreläer RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9, RT10

Säkerhetsmodul ochAnpassningsenhet

Vital 1 inklusiveTina 6A

Säkerhets-PLC Pluto


EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1, EN 1760-2,EN 1760-3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2,EN 60204-1

Anmält organ enligt nedan har fått tillsänt teknisk dokumentation enligt AFS 1994:48,Bilaga 6, för förvaring.

SP Sveriges Provnings- och ForskningsinstitutBox 857501 15 BoråsID-nr NB 0402


Mats Linger, VDKungsbacka 2008-05-05

EC Declaration of conformity

We JOKAB SAFETYABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 MalmöSweden

declare that the safety components of JOKABSAFETY manufacture, with type designations andsafety functions as listed below, are in conformitywith the Directives

98/37/EC2006/95/EC2004/108/EC

Product Type

Contact rail GP 25-25, GP25-40

Bumper ASB Y x X

Together with safetymoduleSafety relays RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9, RT10

Safety module andadapter unit

Vital 1 inclusive Tina 6A

Säkerhets-PLC Pluto


EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1, EN 1760-2,EN 1760-3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2,EN 60204-1

The technical documentation according to 98/37/EC, Annex VI, has been sent to thefollowing Notified Body

SP Technical Research Institute of SwedenBox 857501 15 BoråsSweden

ID-nr NB 0402



Confirmation of compliance - door sensitive edges, bumpersOther language versions may be obtained on request.



Försäkran om överensstämmelse

Vi JOKAB SAFETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 Malmö

försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETYmed nedanstående typbeteckningar och funktioner,är i överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna iföreskrifternaAFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG),ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG)ELSÄK-FS 2003:2 (89/336/EG, 92/32/EEG,93/68/EEG)

Produkt Typbeteckning

Kontaktmat ta ASK-P-RF

tillsammans med säkerhetsrelä

Säkerhetsreläer RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9


EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1,EN 1760-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2

Anmält organ enligt nedan har fått tillsänt teknisk dokumentation enligt AFS1994:48, Bilaga 6, för förvaring.

SP Sveriges Provnings- och ForskningsinstitutBox 857501 15 Borås

ID-nr NB 0402



EC Declaration of conformity

We JOKAB SAFETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 MalmöSweden

declare that the safety components of JOKABSAFETY manufacture, with type designations andsafety functions as listed below, are in conformitywith the Directives98/37/EG,73/23/EEG, 93/68/EEG,89/336/EEG, 92/31/EEG, 93/68/EEG

Product Type

Safety mat ASK-P-RF

Together with safety relays

Safety relays RT6, RT7A, RT7B, RT9

Appliacable harmonizedstandards

EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN 954-1, EN 1760-1,EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2

The technical documentation according to 98/37/EC, Annex VI, has been sent to thefollowing Notified Body

SP, Technical Research Institute of SwedenBox 857501 15 BoråsSweden

ID-nr NB 0402



Confirmation of compliance- fencingOther language versions may be obtained on request.

Confirmation of compliance- safety matsOther language versions may be obtained on request.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12



försäkrar att produkterna av fabrikat JOKAB SAFETY mednedanstående typbeteckningar och funktioner, är iöverensstämmelse med bestämmelserna i föreskrifternaAFS 1994:48 (98/37/EG),

ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (2006/95/EG)ELSÄK-FS 2007:1 (2004/108/EG)

Produkt Certifikat/Anmält organ

Vital1 06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409

Eden (Adam , Eva) 06-SKM-CM-0131, NB409

Tina 1-8 06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409

Tina Duo 1, Tina Duo 2,Tina 8B Profibus

05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409

Spot 10, 35 06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409


EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088,EN 61496-1, -2, EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2



EC declaration of conformityWe J OKAB SAFETY AB


Sweden

declare that the safety components of JOKAB SAFETY manufacture,with type designations and safety functions as listed below, are inconformity with the Directives

98/37/EG2006/95/EG2004/108/EG

Product Certificate/Notified Body



Tina 1-8 06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409


05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409

Spot 10, 35 06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409


EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850, EN 954-1, EN 574,EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, -2,EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2




Wir JOKAB SAF ETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 Malmö

Schweden

erklären, dass nachfolgend aufgeführte Gerätetypen desHerstellers JOKAB SAFETY den Anforderungen der aktuellenRichtlinien

98/37/EG2006/95/EG2004/108/EG

Produkt Zertifikat/Gemeldete Stelle



Tina 1-8 06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409


05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409

Spot 10, 35 06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409

Harmonisierte Normen EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850, N 954-1, EN 574,EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, -2,EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2



DÉCLARATION DE CONFORMITÉ CE

Nous JOKAB SAFETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 Malmö

Suède

déclarons que les composants de sécurité de la marque JOKABSAFETY, de types et fonctions de sécurité listées ci-dessous, sontconformes aux Directives

98/37/CE2006/95/CE2004/108/CE

Produit Certificat/Organisme notifié



Tina 1-8 06-SKM-CM-0134, NB409


05-SKM-CM-0138, NB409

Spot 10, 35 06-SKM-CM-0517, NB409

Normes harmoniséesapplicables

EN ISO 12100-1,-2, EN ISO 13850EN 954-1, EN 574, EN 1760-1, -2, -3, EN 1088, EN 61496-1, -2,EN 60204-1, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2

Torgny OlssonMalmö 05/05/2008

Mats LingerKungsbacka 05/05/2008

Confirmation of compliance- the Vital conceptOther language versions may be obtained on request.





försäkrar att säkerhetskomponenterna av fabrikat JOKABSAFETY med nedanstående typbeteckningar ochfunktioner, är i överensstämmelse med bestämmelserna iföreskriftAFS 1994:48 (98/37/EEG),ELSÄK-FS 2007:1 (2004/108/EC)

ELSÄK-FS 2000:1 (2006/95/EC)

Programmerbart elektroniskt säkerhetssystem (Säkerhets-PLC) Pluto versionA20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i

Tillämpadeharmoniseradestandarder

EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,EN ISO 13849-2:2003 ,EN 62061:2005,EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005, EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997,EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007,EN 61000-4-

Övriga standarder IEC/EN 61508DIN V VDE 0801:1990 med tillägg A1:1994,

EG-Typkontroll TÜV-Rheinland, Anmält organ nr. 0197

Certifikat nummer BB 60020181 0001

Mats LingerKungsbacka 2007-11-15 Torgny OlssonMalmö 2007-11-15

EC declaration of conformity

We JOKAB SAFETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 MalmöSweden

declare that the safety components of JOKABSAFETY manufacture, with type designations andsafety functions as listed below, are in conformity withthe Directives98/37/EEC,2004/108/EC2006/95/EC

Programmable electronic safety system (Safety PLC system) Pluto version A20, B20,B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i

Applicableharmonizedstandards

EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005,EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005,EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007,EN 61000-4-

Other applicablestandards anddocuments

IEC/EN 61508DIN V VDE 0801:1990 with amendment A1:1994

EC Type-Examination TÜV-Rheinland, Notified body No. 0197

Certificate no BB 60020181 0001


DÉCLARATION DE CONFORMITÉ CE

Nous JOKAB SAFETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 MalmöSuède

déclarons que les composants de sécurité de lamarque JOKAB SAFETY, de types et fonctions desécurité listées ci-dessous, sont conformes auxDirectives98/37/EEC,2004/108/EC2006/95/EC

Système de sécurité électronique programmable (automate programmable industrieldédié sécurité) Pluto, versionsA20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i

Normesharmoniséesaplicables

EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007EN 61000-4-

Autres normes etdocumentsapplicables

IEC/EN 61508DIN V VDE 0801:1990 et supplément A1:1994

Examen de typeCE

TÜV-Rheinland, organisme notifié n°. 0197

n° de certificat BB 60020181 0001




Wir JOKAB SAFETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 MalmöSchweden

erklären, dass nachfolgend aufgeführte Gerätetypendes Herstellers JOKAB SAFETY denAnforderungen der aktuellen Richtlinien98/37/EEG,2004/108/EG2006/95/EG

Programmierbare Sicherheitssteuerung (Sicherheits-SPS) Pluto versionA20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i

AngewandteharmonisierteNormen

EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007EN 61000-4-

Andere NormenIEC/EN 61508DIN V VDE 0801:1990 und Änderung A1:1994

EG-Baumusterprüfung:

TÜV-Rheinland, gemeldete Stelle Nr. 0197

Nummer derBescheinigung

BB 60020181 0001


Confirmation of compliance - Pluto safety PLCOther language versions may be obtained on request.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

12

Declaração de Conformiddae EC

Nós JOKAB SAFETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 MalmöSweden

declaramos que os componentes produzidos pela JOKABSAFETY, com as designações e funções de segurançaabaixo indicadas, estão em conformidade com as98/37/EEC,2004/108/EC

2006/95/EC

Sistema de segurança electrónico programável (Safety PLC system) Pluto versãoA20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i

Aplicações standard: EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007EN 61000-4-

Outras aplicações edocumentos standard

IEC/EN 61508DIN V VDE 0801:1990 e correcções A1:1994

Tipo de exame EC TÜV-Rheinland, Notified body No. 0197

Certificado no BB 60020181 0001


Torgny Olsson

Malmö 2007-11-15

EG-verklaring van overeenstemming

Wij JOKAB SAFETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 MalmöSweden

verklaren, dat ondergenoemde veiligheidscomponenten,geproduceerd door JOKAB SAFETY, voldoen aan deeisen zoals gesteld in de actuele richtlijnen98/37/EEC,2004/108/EC

2006/95/ECProgrammeerbare veiligheidsbesturing (Veiligheids-PLC) Pluto versiesA20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i

Toegepastegeharmoniseerdenormen:

EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,EN ISO 13849-2:2003 EN 62061:2005EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007EN 61000-4-

Andere normen IEC/EN 61508:2000 deel 1 t/m 7DIN V VDE 0801:1990 en wijzigingen A1:1994,

EG-Type-onderzoek TÜV-Rheinland, aangemelde instantie nr. 0197

Certificaat nummer BB 60020181 0001



EC dichiarazione di conformità

Lasottoscritta

JOKAB SAFETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 MalmöSweden

Dichiara che i componenti di sicurezza prodotti daJOKAB SAFETY identificati e svolgenti le funzioni disicurezza di cui sotto, sono prodotti in conformitàalle Direttive98/37/CEE,2004/108/CE2006/95/CE

Sistemi programmabili di sicurezza (PLC di sicurezza) Pluto versioniA20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i

Standardsarmonizzatiapplicabili

EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005,EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005, EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997,EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007,EN 61000-4-

Altri Standard edocumenti applicabili IEC/EN 61508

DIN V VDE 0801:1990 e revisione A1:1994

Ente esaminatore -EC

TÜV-Rheinland, registrato al No. 0197

Certificato n. BB 60020181 0001



ES-IZJAVA O SKLADNOSTI

Mi JOKAB SAFETY ABBoplatsgatan 3S-213 76 MalmöSweden

zagotavljamo in potrdimo da varnostne komponente znamkeJOKAB SAFETY spodaj navedenega tipa oznake invarnostne funkcije, so v skladudolocenih direktiv98/37/EEC,2004/108/EC2006/95/EC

Programljiv elektronski varnostni sistem (Varnostni PLC sistem) Pluto različica A20, B20, B16, S19, S20, B46-6, S46-6, AS-i

Veljavniharmoniziranistandardi

EN ISO 13849-1:2006/EN 954-1:1996,EN ISO 13849-2:2003, EN 62061:2005,EN 61496-1:2004, EN 574:1996, EN 692:2005, EN 60204-1:1997, EN 50178:1997,EN 61000-6-2:1999, EN 61000-6-4:2007,EN 61000-4-

Drugi veljavnistandardi indokumenti

IEC/EN 61508DIN V VDE 0801:1990/A1:1994

ES-Preskus tipa TÜV-Rheinland, Priglašen organ st. 0197

Certifikat število BB 60020181 0001





Confirmation of compliance- Smart stop timerOther language versions may be obtained on request.



Australia

Sensorplex Pty LtdUnit B3/2A Hallmarc Business ParkCnr Westall & Centre RoadsClayton Vic 3168Tel: +61 (03) 9562 6699Fax: +61 (03) 8080 5988E-mail: [email protected]: www.sensorplex.com/jokab.htm

Austria

Contra GmbHAutokaderstr. 104A-1210 Wien

Tel: +43 (0)1 278 25 55Fax: +43 (0)1 278 25 58E-mail: [email protected]: www.contra.at

Belgium

Jokab Safety AB, SwedenE-mail: [email protected]: www.jokabsafety.com

Brazil

Jokab Safety Div. of ABGAv. das Araucárias, 509 - BarigüiCEP 83707-000 Araucária(Curitiba) ParanáTel: +55 41 3643 1384Fax: +55 41 3643 3628

E-mail: [email protected]: www.abg.ind.br

Canada

NCC Electronics LTD.7800 Twin Oaks DriveWindsor, OntarioCanada, N8N 5B6Tel: +1 519 735 1106Fax: +1 519 735 1299E-mail: [email protected]: www.jokabsafetyna.com

China

Jokab Safety China2610/1701 Beijingxi RDNew Century Plaza

JingAn DistrictShanghai 200 040Tel: +86 21 613 242 77Fax: +86 21 613 242 80E-mail: [email protected]: www.jokabsafety.com.cn

Finland

Juha-Elektro OYKylvöpolku 6,P.O. Box 57FI-00641 HelsinkiTel: +358 (0) 10 8328 100Fax: +358 (0) 10 8328 109E-mail: [email protected]: www.juha-elektro.fi

France

Jokab Safety France SAS30, rue Godot de Mauroy75009 Paris

Tel: +33 810 08 36 20Fax: +33 810 40 91 14E-mail:[email protected]: www.jokabsafety.com

Germany

Jokab Safety (D) GMBHMax-Planck-Straße 21DE-78549 SpaichingenTel: +49 (0) 7424 95865 0Fax: +49 (0) 7424 95865 99E-mail: [email protected]: www.jokabsafety.comJokab Safety (D) GMBH

Büro GünzburgIchenhauser Str. 36D-89312 GünzburgTel. +49 (0) 8221 204313 0Fax +49 (0) 8221 204313 99E-mail: [email protected]: www.jokabsafety.deDebra GMBH (Cologne)Bunzlauerstraße 2DE-50858 Köln (Weiden)Tel: +49 (0) 2234 78898Fax: +49 (0) 2234 74071E-mail: [email protected]: www.debra-safety.de

Ireland

Pressure Hydraulics LtdHead Office

Unit 1/3O’Brien RoadCarlowTel: +353 (0) 59 9143601Fax: +353 (0) 59 9143731E-mail:[email protected]

Korea

Hanlim Auto Co., Ltd.Room 1124 & 1125, OPUS 1 B/D,#611-26 Gurobon-Dong, Guro-Gu,SEOULTel: 82-2-2639-8567/8Fax: 82-2-2639-8778E-mail: [email protected]: www.jokabsafety.co.kr

Netherlands

Isolectra B.V.Rivium Boulevard 101NL-2909 LK Capelle aan den IJssel

Tel: +31 (0) 10 28 55 285Fax: +31 (0) 10 28 55 400E-mail: [email protected]: www.isolectra.nl

Norway

Automasjon og SikkerhetSkipperveien 16NO-3150 TolvsrødTel: +47 33 01 52 20Fax: +47 33 01 52 04E-mail: [email protected]: www.jokabsafety.no

Poland

Contra Sp. Z.O.O.ul. Stawowa 71

43-400 CieszynPolskaTel: +48 33 857 53 44Fax: +48 33 857 54 14E-mail: [email protected]: www.contra-polska.pl

Portugal

Prosistav LdaZona Industrial da MotaRua 7 lote 6 AGafanha da EncarnaçãoPT-3830-527 ÍlhavoTel: +351 (0) 234 397 210Fax: +351 (0) 234 181159E-mail: [email protected]: www.prosistav.pt

Singapore/Malaysia

Pics TechnologiesBlk 3, Ang Mo Kio Pk 2A,#05-06, Singapore (568 050)Tel: +65 6744 8018Tel +65 6481 2894

Kungsbacka

Jokab Safety ABVarlabergsvägen 11SE - 434 39 KungsbackaTel: +46 (0) 300-67 59 00Fax: +46 (0) 300-67 59 01E-mail: [email protected]

Malmö

Jokab Safety ABBoplatsgatan 3SE - 213 76 MalmöTel: +46 (0) 40-67 15 600Fax: +46 (0) 40-67 15 601E-mail: [email protected]

Jönköping

Jokab Safety ABMekanikervägen 6SE - 564 35 BankerydTel: +46 (0) 36-37 04 60Fax: +46 (0) 36-37 04 69E-mail: [email protected]

Stockholm

Jokab Safety ABKanalvägen 17SE - 183 30 TäbyTel: +46 (0) 8-544 707 40Fax: +46 (0) 8-544 707 49E-mail: [email protected]

Västerås

Jokab Safety ABFältmätargatan 16SE - 721 35 VästeråsTel: +46 (0) 21-81 44 30Fax: +46 (0) 21-81 44 39E-mail: [email protected]

Sweden

Global sales Slovenia

Kolektor Synatec D.O.O.Vojkova ulica 8b5280 Idrija, SloveniaTel: +386 5 37 20 677Fax: + 386 5 37 20 660E-mail: [email protected]: www.kolektorsynatec.si

South AfricaPK Welding RoboticsUnit 17, Eastend Prime ParkMontague Gardens, Milnerton 7441Cape Town

Tel: +27 21 552 5249Fax: +27 21 552 5349E-mail: xxx@xxx

Spain

Safework S.L.C/ Bac de Roda n° 7ES-08005 BarcelonaTel: +34 93 308 07 38Fax: +34 93 307 22 62E-mail: [email protected]: www.safework.es

Switzerland

Mattle Industrieprodukte AGIn der Mühle 5CH-8340 Hinwil

Tel: +41 44 938 13 33Fax: +41 44 938 13 34E-mail: [email protected]: www.mattle-ag.ch

Turkey

S-Mikron Elektronik Elektrik SanayiTaah. Ltd. ŞtiNilüfer Ticaret Merkezi 66. Sok. No:816110 Nilüfer – Bursa/turkeyTel: +90224 443 52 33Fax: +90224 443 52 42Web: www.s-mikron.com.tr

United Kingdom

Jokab Safety (UK) LtdUnit G, Old Stratford Business Park

Falcon DriveOld StratfordMilton KeynesNorthamptonshireMK19 6FGTel: +44 (0) 1908 261595Fax: +44 (0) 1908 267100

Documents

En Safety Handbook 08v2